Home

Lucent Technologies 555-233

1. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Task Tables 3 7 Table 3 1 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r System Continued Y Task Description Page Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Cabling Critical Reliability 3 33 Release 8r Connect Power and Ground 3 46 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages 3 47 Install System Access Ports 3 47 Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 3 47 Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System 3 47 Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire 3 47 Reboot the System 3 48 Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 3 48 Label Main Distribution Frame 3 48 Reconnect Cables 3 49 Power Up the EPN Cabinet 3 49 Install Rear Ground Plates Systems with Earthquake Protection 3 49 Install Cabinet Clips Systems without Earthquake Protection 3 51 Install Cable Clamps 3 52 Retranslate Port Circuits 3 52 Re record Announcements TN750 B Only 3 53 Administer Fiber Links 3 53 Enable TTI 3 53 Check Link Status 3 53 Resolve Alarms 3 53 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 3 54 Save Translations 3 55 Return Replaced Equipment 3 55 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Pr
2. 2 2 2 kd 3150csu RBP 062696 1 H600 348 quad cable 5 Network interface 9 Cable C 2 15 pin male D connectors to DTE jacks on CSU 6 Smart jack if provided 10 Cable D 3 Channel service unit CSU 7 Cable A 4 H600 307 cable RJ 48C to RJ 48C 8 Cable B Figure 6 57 3150 3170 Channel Service Unit Connections DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Installing a 3150 3170 Channel Service Unit cydf010 RPY 090597 1 Port carrier 2 DS1 converter connector 3 50 pair female connector to DEFINITY System connector cable to the channel service unit 4 14 Inch 35 57 cm Y cable Issue 1 April 2000 6 147 9 5 50 Pin Male 50 pin female double headed 6 Quad cable with 50 pin male connector connects Figure 6 58 DS1 Converter Connections Using Double Headed cable Table 6 14 Y cable Lengths DS1 converter Only Length in cm Description Comcode 14 35 5 TN1754 to adjacent expansion interface circuit pack or 847245750 TN573B switch node interface circuit pack in same carrier 70 177 8 TN1754 to expansion interface circuit pack or switch node 847245778 interface in another carrier 14 35 5 TN1754 to fiber optic transceiver DC powered cabinets only 847245777
3. Y Task Description Page Save Translations 5 9 Make Source Tape for TRACS Report 5 9 Required Hardware 5 15 Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance 5 16 Label Cables 5 16 Check Link Status 5 17 Disable TTI 5 17 Power Down G2 System 5 17 Install Power Failure Transfer Ground Wire 5 17 Disconnect Cables 5 18 Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carrier A 5 18 Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A 5 18 Remove Module Control Carrier A 5 18 Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier 5 23 Install New Expansion Control Carrier A 5 23 Install Circuit Packs 5 26 Interconnect Port Networks 5 26 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages 5 35 Remove Power Failure Ground Wire 5 35 Boot the Release 8 System 5 36 Set Daylight Savings Rules 5 37 Set Date and Time 5 38 Set Additional Administration 5 40 Reconnect Cables to Upgraded EPN Cabinet 5 40 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Task Tables 5 11 Table 5 3 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r Standard Reliability Continued Y Task Description Page Power Up the EPN Cabinets 5 41 Retranslate Port Circuits 5 41 Enable TTI 5 41 Check Link Status 5 41 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 5 41 Resolve Alarms 5 41 Enable Customer Options and Alar
4. Icda6fop RPY 021698 Figure 6 7 Fiber Optic Cable and Adapter 5 From the rear route the fiber optic cable through the opening vacated by the I O cable connector 6 If necessary remove the fiber adapter from the tool and plug the fiber optic cable into the SC SC single mode or ST SC multimode adapter See Figure 6 8 Check the house cabling before selecting a coupling to use 7 From the front of the I O connector adapter bracket with fiber cable snap the coupling into the supplied I O connector adapter bracket 8 Snap the I O connector adapter bracket into the I O connector opening 9 Attach the outside fiber plant to the I O connector on the rear of the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 17 I SS pem WU 117 SSSSSSS eee V Icda7fop KLC 051198 Nc Figure Notes 1 Fiber cable 3 SC SC adapter 2 I O connector adapter bracket 4 SC ST adapter Figure 6 8 Bracket Attachments 10 Wrap the cable disconnect label around the fiber optic cable See Figure 6 9 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic
5. WP91716 L7 SLOT 21 La SEE NOTE i J58890BB D PORT CARRIER TOMILAN CABLE TDM BUS WP91716 L6 TERMINATOR SLOT 21 tay SEE NOTE v ZAHFA l iu i J58890BB E PORT CARRIER REAR VIEW NOTE ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB 1 CONNECT THE TDM CABLE OR TDM TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02 ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB 2 AND 3 CONNECT THE TDM CABLES TO SLOT 01 Figure 6 54 TDM LAN Bus Connections for Standard or High Reliability EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 139 TDM LAN BUS TERMINATOR ZAHF4 SEE NOT SLOT 21 I J58890BB C PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L6 ICCB ICCA SLOT m n fi fi J58890BB SEE NOTE B PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE lt INTERCARRIER wP91716L6 7 CABLES A AND B Sioro H600 204 G1 SLOT 21 I l i lU J58890AF 1 EXPANSION ICCB ICCA A CONTROL CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L7 SLOT 21 1 amp l J58890BB D PORT CARRIER SEE NOTE TDM LAN CABLE TDM LAN BUS WR31718 L6 TERMINATOR ZAHF4 SLOT 214a SEE NOTE amp Li i J58890BB E PORT CARRIER REAR VIEW NOTE ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB 1 CONNECT TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATO
6. PORT CARRIER D PORT CARRIER E REAR VIEW COVERS REMOVED FANS GROUNDING JUMPERS Issue 1 April 2000 6 135 Figure 6 51 Locations of Grounding Jumpers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 136 99 LH SS 74 9t MUMMU rCICTr1 W a 9 Y J DIIS y NS gt 9 ZNN cadf052 KLC 102297 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 7 Slot 21 2 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 8 Slot 00 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716L6 9 TDMLAN Gable WP91716L7 4 Process Carrier A Position 10 Port Carrier B Position 5 Port Carrier D Position 11 Slot TDM LAN2 20 6 Port Carrier E Position Figure 6 52 TDM LAN Bus Connections for Standard Reliability R8r PPN gt NOTE On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TMD cables or TDM terminator to slot 01 If the port carrier has J58890BB 1 and J58890BB 2 stencilled on it treat it as a J58890BB 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 137
7. TO CABINET 1 E3 E20 lt ow ow om Na SWITCH NODE CARRIER J58890SA 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 9587654321 H600 278 Lit i LD 4 H gt TO CABINET 2 THRU 16 B2 ADD IN ALTERNATING SWITCH NODE CARRIER J58890SA ORDER 20 3 19 4 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 987654321 18 5 ETC T H600 278 Leah x 2o x 7 z 1 TO CABINET 2 THRU 16 Al ADD IN ALTERNATING ORDER 20 3 19 4 18 5 ETC POWER DISTRIBUTION CABINET 1 PPN W ONE DUPLEX SWITCH NODE FAN fark Gee on PME NZ A PORT CARRIER J58890BB 201918 17 16 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 p Ani PORT CARRIER J58890BB 201918 1716 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 E A POWER DISTRIBUTION CABINET 2 THRU 16 EPN Figure 6 43 Critical Reliability Fiber Optic Connections through Center Stage Switch DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 121 Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 Reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors Power Up System 1 At each EPN if present set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 Atthe PPN set the main circuit breaker to
8. MUM S jo it cad 051 KLC 102297 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 8 Slot 00 POSCIT MUERE Terminator 9 TDM LAN Cable WP91716L7 3 TOM LAN Cable WP91716L6 45 pe coss Carrier B Position 4 Process Carrier A Position 11 ICCD Connector 5 Port Carrier D Position 12 ICCC Connector 6e Por Camery E Paston 13 Intercarrier Cable D WP 91954 7 Slot 21 14 Intercarrier Cable C H600 182 Figure 6 53 TDM LAN Bus Connections for Critical Reliability PPN gt NOTE On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TMD cables or TDM terminator to slot 01 If the port carrier has J58890BB 1 and J58890BB 2 stencilled on it treat it as a J58890BB 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 138 TDM LAN BUS TERMINATOR ZAHF4 SLOT 21 F SEE NOTE es Cc PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L6 SLOT 21 J SEE NOTE l I J58890BB B PORT CARRIER TOMILAN CABLE WP91716 L6 SLOT21 La SLOT 02 i I J58890AF EXPANSION A CONTROL CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE
9. eer ZB WS 0000 SS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication April 2000 6 85 UV Ue U Uc LIMIT AX 3 MUMMUW W s i Ul N m T E LUU NI NNN Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C 2 Port Carrier B 3 Ground Jumpers 4 Control Carrier A 5 Port Carrier D 6 Port Carrier E 7 Cabinet with standard fan unit and carriers 8 Cabinet with enhanced fan unit and enhanced carriers Figure 6 29 Locations of Ground Jumpers on standard and enhanced fan unit cabinets DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 86 Prepare New Control Carrier B 1 Visually inspect the new carrier for any damage Verify that the backplane pins are not bent gt NOTE The enhanced R8r PPN AC carrier may look different than th
10. 5 x poc Di WWE lo AL NN cadf003 KLC 103096 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 6 Port Carrier E Position 2 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 7 Slot 21 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L6 8 Slot 02 4 Expansion Control Carrier A Position 9 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L7 5 Port Carrier D Position 10 Port Carrier B Position Figure 5 13 TDM LAN Connections for High Reliability Release 8 EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 54 Table 5 11 TDM LAN Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890BB 1 Port 21 02 J58890BB 2 Port 21 01 J58890BB 3 Port 21 01 J58890AF EPN Control A 21 02 12 Install the front trim plate on the A carrier 13 Install the power units removed from G2 module control carrier into the A carrier Do not interchange the physical locations of the units The 631AR1 631WA1 631DA1 or 6444 install in the left side while the 631BR1 631WB1 631DB1 or 645B install in the right side gt NOTE In most cases the new Release 8 carrier will contain the same power supplies as in the existing system However the new Release 8 carrier may contain a 649A Power Unit If so use the power units fr
11. ChannelService Network Pin Color Unit Designation Designation Function 1 BK Line in 0 R1 RCV 2 Y Line in 1 T1 3 Shield 4 R Line out 0 R XMT 5 G Line out 1 T 7 Shield 7 Not assigned 8 Not assigned Table 6 13 H600 383 cable Lengths by Group Number Group Length Group Length 1 25 feet 7 7 m 5 125 feet 38 1 m 2 50 feet 15 2 m 7 200 feet 71 m 3 75 feet 22 9 m 7 400 feet 122 m 4 100 feet 30 5 m 8 750 feet 198 1 m DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Installing a 3150 3170 Channel Service Unit 6 146 Installing a 3150 3170 Channel Service Unit 1 Install the CSU as shown in Figure 6 57 For some installations Such as a DS1 converter use a Y cable to connect the DEFINITY System to the quad cable Table 6 14 shows the Y cable lengths Be sure to label all cables Figure 6 57 shows a typical connection from the H600 348 Quad cable to the CSU through the H600 307 network cable and to the network interface through the smart jacks The quad cable provides up to four connections using a 15 pin connector that plugs into the DTE jack on each CSU The H600 348 quad cable may require an adapter cable
12. Usable Circuit Packs Every circuit pack used in the Release 8 system must conform to the minimum usable vintage requirements for that system At a presale site inspection the remediation process checks the vintages of existing circuit packs to be reused in the Release 8 system Replace all unusable vintage circuit packs with current vintages Refer to Technical Quarterly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages Change Notices and to the Software Release Letter for information about usable circuit pack vintages For information about usable vintages of non U S circuit packs refer to the ITAC Tech Alert from your regional distributor DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Read This First 1 3 Software Upgrade Release 8 software and translations are saved to removable media Although the translations automatically update to Release 8 several features require special attention because of screen changes or potential naming conflicts in the process Between customer confirmation and the actual update or upgrade check the screens to ensure the translations meet the customer s needs After rebooting the system enter the translations either locally or remotely If done remotely Contact Field Support Administration Center FSAC for the remote entry For information to make the required changes refer to
13. May June July August c o 0o oc1 RI WwW PM September October a4 eo a November k N December 4 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month field Type the day of month 1 through 31 and press Tab to move to the next field 5 The cursor is positioned on the Year field Type the current year and press TAB to move to the next field 6 The cursor is positioned on the Hour field Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock Press Tab to move to the next field 7 The cursor is positioned on the Minute field Type current minute 0 through 59 Seconds cannot be set 8 Type standard or daylight savings in the Type field 9 Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rule field 10 Press Enter when the information is correct 11 Type display time and press Enter to verify date time data DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 40 Set Additional Administration 1 Type list configuration software version and press Enter to compare the version number of the Release 8 software program displayed on the terminal with the TN786B version number written on a label on the TN786B s faceplate If the version numbers are not the same change the version number on the TN786B label so that they agree Type
14. Connect ICC Cables From To Carrier Pin Field Block Carrier Pin Field Block EPN J58890AF ICCA J58890BB ICCA ICCB ICCB ICCB ICCA TDM LAN pndfaf KLC 012097 Figure Notes 1 ICCA Connectors 3 CURL Current Limiter Connectors 2 ICCB Connectors Figure 5 26 ICC Connections for the Expansion Control Carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 89 pndfbb KLC 012097 Figure Notes 1 ICCA Connectors 2 ICCB Connectors Figure 5 27 ICC Connections for the Port Carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 90 Test the CURL 1 Plug the cabinet power cord into the appropriate receptacle 2 Atthe power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON 3 Unplug the power cord from the power unit B right hand side in the A carrier 4 The fans must be running If not check the installation of the CURL 5 Reconnect the power cord to the power unit in the A carrier then unplug the power cord from power unit B right hand side in the B carrier 6 The fans must be running If not check the installation of the CURL 7 Re
15. Figure 6 17 Switch Connected Release 8r with SNC in EPN 27 Connect an H600 278 Metallic Cable from Slot 2 in the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 4 4B02 to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4 4D19 gt NOTE Both fibers from each PN must connect to the same slot number in each Switch Node Carrier For example if Slot 3A01 of EPN 3 connects to Switch Node Carrier Slot 4E19 then Slot 3B02 of EPN 3 must connect to Switch Node Carrier Slot 4D19 28 Proceed to Appendix A Fiber Link Administration to add the new fiber links DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 34 Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System All Systems Before starting the EPN removal process perform the following gt NOTE If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter Use screen 2 to disable Terminal Translation Initialization TTI by changing the setting to n 2 Unadminister all of the affected trunks attendant consoles voice terminals and data modules associated with the port circuit packs in the EPN cabinet being removed These port related translations must be unadministered before removing any hardware Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server
16. BCMS Basic Call Management System BCT See business communications terminal BCT Bearer capability class BCC Code that identifies the type of a call for example voice and different types of data Determination of BCC is based on the callers characteristics for non ISDN endpoints and on the Bearer Capability and Low Layer Compatibility Information Elements of an ISDN endpoint Current BCCs are 0 voice grade data and voice 1 DMI mode 1 56 kbps data transmission 2 DMI mode 2 synchronous asynchronous data transmission up to 19 2 kbps 3 DMI mode 3 64 kbps circuit packet data transmission 4 DMI mode 0 64 kbps synchronous data 5 temporary signaling connection and 6 wideband call 128 1984 kbps synchronous data BER Bit error rate BHCC Busy hour call completions bit binary digit One unit of information in binary notation having two possible values 0 or 1 bits per second bps The number of binary units of information that are transmitted or received per second See also baud and bit rate bit rate The speed at which bits are transmitted usually expressed in bits per second Also called data rate See also baud and bits per second bps BLF Busy Lamp Field BN Billing number BOS Bit oriented signaling BPN Billed party number bps See bits per second bps bridge bridging The appearance of a voice terminal s extension at one or more other voice terminals BRI The ISD
17. 3 Behind processor carrier A of each EPN cabinet a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1A01 b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 105 4 Behind port carrier B of each EPN cabinet a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1B02 b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray REAR VIEW REAR VIEW PORT CARRIER J58890BB PORT CARRIER J58890BB 20191817161514131211109 8 76 5 4 3 2 1 20191817161514131211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CONTROL CARRIER J58890AP PORT CARRIER J58890BB CLOCK AUX TERMINAL 201918 17 16 15 14 1312 B l A BI HIN S S 7654221
18. Figure 6 16 Switch Connected Release 8r with SNC in EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 31 Switch Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and EPN Critical Reliability For the following connection example the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1 the first EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2 and the EPN cabinet containing the Switch Node Carrier is called Cabinet 4 gt NOTE For the following example add links to PNs in alternating order for example 20 and 2 19 and 3 18 and 4 and so forth Atthe rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 1C02 See Figure 6 17 Connect a 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 4 easier 3 Route the fiber cable to the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4 10 11 12 13 At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 4E02 Connect the 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector
19. gt NOTE Note the position of the TDM LAN cables before disconnecting 1 Disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and C carriers from the A carrier See Figure 5 1 2 Disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and D carriers from the A carrier Av WARNING When removing the TDM LAN cables from a previously upgraded carrier be careful that none of the short pieces of shrink tubing come off the 4 corner pins of the pin field block Otherwise when the new equipment is connected 48 volts could short to ground 3 On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to Slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TDM cables to Slot 01 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 20 LUU N T IBEW Qo 7 WML le LLL NNW cadf002 KLC 103096 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 6 Port Carrier E Position 2 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 7 Slot 21 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L6 8 Slot 01 4 Module Control Carrier A Position 9 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L7 5 Port Carrier D Position Figure 5 1 TDM L
20. m DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide Required Hardware The equipment in Table 1 1 must be on site before the upgrade begins To place a claim for missing equipment as part of the Streamlined Implementation process call 1 800 772 5409 or the number provided by your Lucent Technologies representative Table 1 1 Required Hardware Quantity Equipment Description Standard High Critical 106495120 TN1650B Memory circuit pack 1 2 105533780 V4 or later TN1657 Disk Drive circuit 1 2 pack if needed 108566381 UNS332C MSSNET circuit pack 1 2 107849754 TN2211 optical drive 1 2 106590953 Z100A1 Apparatus Blank Faceplate 1 2 J58890TO 1 L1 Formatted removable media 21 4 w Release 8 software 848445086 Carrier A strip label 1 NA 848445094 Carrier B strip label NA 1 1 For a maintenance update acquired from the Technical Service Center For an upgrade shipped from the factory DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Task Tables 1 4 Task Tables Table 1 2 lists the high level tasks to perform the upgrades Refer to the appropriate page for instructions for each step The upgrade procedure is similar for both the standard and high or critical reliability system with a few exceptions These exceptions are noted as you go through the
21. 1 601087091 20 ft DB 25 serial cable from modem to TN802B external cable assembly U S customers only Non U S customers must provide a serial cable 3 Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory The TN802B external cable assembly is a bundle of cables with an amphenol connector at the end of the bundle and various PC type connectors VGA Universal Serial Bus USB mouse keyboard Ethernet modem and COM at the ends of the individual cables See Figure 6 20 Look for the label where the bundle enters the amphenol connector DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 48 m VV 99 9 9 9 9 9 cbdfocto AWF 122398 Figure Notes 1 Amphenol connector to connector 5 To mouse corresponding to TN802B slot 6 To ethernet 2 To VGA monitor 3 To USB not used 4 To keyboard 7 25 pin male connector to modem 8 25 pin male connector to COM2 Figure 6 20 TN802B IP Interface External Cable Assembly Connect the Cables 1 Determine into which port slots you are putting the TN799B C LAN and TN802B IP Interface circuit packs gt NOTE Make sure that at least 3 adjacent slots are free for the TN802B From the rear of the cabinet 2 If adding a new TN799B connect the 259A connector to the backplane connector c
22. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 36 4 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable coming from the PPN to the lightwave transceiver at slot 2A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet 9 UUN V ot SCO SSS UMS iii LLO 1000000 NNNNA AO NNN LUUN VIDA SSSSSSy B 2 RR NNNM AR NN Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 3 Cabinet Stack 3 EPN 2 2 Cabinet Stack 2 EPN 1 Figure 3 12 Critical Reliability Release 8r with 2 or 3 Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5
23. Figure Notes 1 Switch Node SN 1 5 EPN Cabinet 11 2 Switch Node 2 6 EPN Cabinet 12 3 PPN Cabinet 7 EPN Cabinet 23 4 EPN Cabinet 1 8 Inter SN Connection 4 fibers Figure 6 45 2 Switch Node CSS with High Inter SN Traffic Fiber Engineering for 2 SNs Switches with 2 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient switching fabric at the CSS The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not require engineering Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to the other SN and vice versa must be engineered The traffic that links across these fibers is simply the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add Center Stage Switch 6 125 Figure 6 46 shows 2 SNs used as a CSS for up to 29 EPNs Use this configuration when low inter SN traffic is expected cydfpbx1 RPY 081897 Figure Notes 1 Switch Node SN 1 5 EPN Cabinet 14 2 Switch Node 2 6 EPN Cabinet 15 3 PPN Cabinet 7 EPN Cabinet 29 4 EPN Cabinet 1 8 Inter SN Connection 1 fiber Figure 6 46 2 SN CSS with Low Inter SN Traffic Fiber Engineering for 2 SNs Switches with 2 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient switching fabric at the CSS The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not require engineering
24. GRS Generalized Route Selection H H0 An ISDN information transfer rate for 384 kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards H11 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1536 kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 25 H12 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1920 kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards handshaking logic A format used to initiate a data connection between two data module devices hertz Hz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second high reliability system A system having the following two control carriers duplicate expansion interface El circuit packs in the PPN in R5r with CSS and duplicate switch node clock circuit packs in the switch node SN carriers See also duplicated common control duplication duplication option and critical reliability system HNPA See home numbering plan area code HNPA holding time The total length of time in minutes and seconds that a facility is used during a call home numbering plan area code HNPA The local area code The area code does not have to be dialed to call numbers within the local geographical area hop Nondirect communication between two switch communications interfaces SCI where the SCI message passes automatically without intermediate processing through one or more
25. A 17 A 18 A 19 o system access ports single carrier 3 47 T tables TDM LAN connections 6 90 task list G2 MCC to DEFINITY ECS Release 5si m EPN 5 10 G3si with TN790 to R5r 3 6 software only upgrade process TDM LAN bus terminators single cabinet 3 18 TDM LAN cable connections 6 140 TDM LAN connection table 6 90 TDM LAN connections 6 104 6 118 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability EPN 6 139 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability PPN 6 137 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability R7r EPN 6 103 6 116 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability R7r PPN 6 117 TDM LAN connections for high reliability EPN 6 138 TDM LAN connections for R5r PPN 6 89 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability EPN 6 138 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability PPN 6 136 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability Rbr PPN 6 84 1 4 2 5 4 4 TN794 1 12 2 11 tools required 3 1 3 10 4 3 transceiver 300A single mode type 3 27 3 33 9823 type 3 27 single mode 3 27 3 33 TII enable procedure 1 20 2 19 3 53 4 16 5 41 5 72 5 111 6 37 6 40 U UN332C circuit pack 2 1 upgrade paths xvii upgrade process single carrier with TN790 to R5r 3 1 software only 1 1 2 1 4 1 upgrades MCC G2 Universal Module to R5si m EPN 5 1 V verify system 1 17 We d like your opinion Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your co
26. Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday NN OD oy amp oO PP Saturday 3 Type the current month in English January through December in the Month field See Table 1 4 for English month names When done press Tab to move to next field DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 20 Table 1 4 English Month Names Number Name Number Name 1 January 7 July 2 February 8 August 3 March 9 September 4 April 10 October 5 May 11 November 6 June 12 December 4 Type the day of month 1 through 31 in the Day of the Month field and press Tab to move to the next field 5 Type the current year in the Year field and press TAB to move to the next field 6 Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock in the Hour field and press Tab to move to the next field 7 Type the current minute 0 through 59 in the Minute field seconds cannot be set When done press Tab to move to next field 8 Type standard or daylight savings in the Type field according to the current time in the local time zone For example if currently on standard time type standard 9 Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rule field 10 When all the information is correct press Enter 1
27. Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8si Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination 2 When administration is completed log in as craft at the Login prompt init login administration 1 Log inas init 2 Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set 3 Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade 4 Type change system parameters offer options and press Enter 5 Ifthe Activate Offer field is n set it to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know whether you need to save translations and reboot to make the change permanent 6 Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes 7 Contact the requester when done DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Apri
28. T1 A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS1 rate of 1 544 Mbps A T1 facility is divided into 24 channels DSOs of 64 kbps These 24 channels with an overall digital rate of 1 536 Mbps and an 8 kbps framing and synchronization channel make up the 1 544 Mbps transmission When a D channel is present it occupies channel 24 T1 facilities are also used in Japan and some Middle Eastern countries TAAS Trunk Answer from Any Station TABS Telemetry asynchronous block serial TAC Trunk access code tandem switch A switch within an electronic tandem network ETN that provides the logic to determine the best route for a network call possibly modifies the digits outpulsed and allows or denies certain calls to certain users tandem through The switched connection of an incoming trunk to an outgoing trunk without human intervention tandem tie trunk network TTTN A private network that interconnects several customer switching systems TC Technical consultant TCM Traveling class mark TDM See time division multiplexing TDM TDR Time of day routing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 48 TEG Terminating extension group terminal A device that sends and receives data within a system See also administration terminal tie trunk A telecommunications channel that dire
29. T1 Installations Only For an E1 site proceed to E1 Installations Only T1 Installations Only 1 The Framing Mode field is display only 2 The DS81CONV 1 Line Compensation and the DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation fields are display only 3 Remove the Facility Circuit ID information from the facilities being unadministered if used Press Enter 4 A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED E1 Installations Only 1 The CRC field must remain administered 2 The Line Termination field is display only 3 Remove the Facility Circuit ID information from facilities being unadministered if used Press Enter 4 A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 39 All Installations 1 When the system reset is finished type status port network 2 and press Enter The Port Network Status screen appears Verify that PNC Active is up and that the Service State is in A Span LED on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack must be off for each inactive facility administered F
30. TO CABINET 1 D3 D20 2 BOTH CONNECTIONS FROM EACH CONTROL CARRIER J58890AP EPN MUST GO TO THE SAME EXPANSION CONTROL CARRIER J58890AF CLOCK AUX TERMINAL SLOT NUMBER E G EPN 19 18 171615 1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1AUX TERM CABINET 2 2A1 TO IE3 AND II3nrmrnmrnrnmmnmnnmnrmimn p A M A Hr AND CABINET 2 2B2 TO 1D3 a2 TO CABINET 1 EX E20 lt aa a caer CS VR ACH RESINA n E FAN FEN HN FAN FAN FAN kcu OU XO 7 Nl SWITCH NODE CARRIER J58890SA PORT CARRIER J58890BB 2120 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 9876543 201918 1716 15 14 1312 11 10 9 quu me GER 1 4 t TO CABINET 2 THRU 16 B2 ADD IN ALTERNATING SWITCH NODE CARRIER J588908A ORDER 20 319 PORT CARRIER J5889UBB 2120 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 9876543 18 5 ETC 201918 17161514 13 12 11 10 9 8 EE QE L s GE TO CABINET 2 THRU 16 Al ADD IN ALTERNATING ORDER 20 3 19 4 18 5 ETC POWER DISTRIBUTION POWER DISTRIBUTION CABINET 2 THRU 16 CABINET 1 PPN W ONE DUPLEX SWITCH NODE Figure 6 37 Critical Reliability Fiber Optic Connections through Center Stage Switch DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115
31. Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 80 14 Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches then from the back be sure that no 15 16 17 cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet carrier framework CAUTION Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the carrier Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet Repeat Steps 12 through 15 for the A carrier On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or the TDM terminator to Slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TDM cables or the TDM terminator to Slot 01 If the port carrier has J58890BB 1 and J58890BB 2 printed on it treat it as a J58890BB 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 81 mm ANN sfo eerie TE aff rv d cut eee PITT RRS md 1 9 9 9 lo A SS cadf001 KLC 103096 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 7 Slot 21 2 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 8 Slot 01 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L6 9 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L
32. VALU distinctive alerting Call Center VALU call coverage Advocate related enhancements Transfer to Audix ASAl computer telephony integration CTI enhancements Coverage interaction support Increased Call Center capacities G3r CAS Attendant display of COR Site stats for ATM connected remote EPNs CAS Attendant return call CMS measurement of ATM trunks CAS Display enhancements CALLMASTER V CC 6416D native support CAS Priority queue PASTE update CAS RLT emulation via PRI CentreVu computer Telephony on MAPD Green to Standard DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems DWBS 13 digit authorization codes red to std X station mobility Networking Other Hospitality IP Solutions Auto digit rotation for direct inward dial Interworking with bandwidth constricted ATM networks Crisis alert to pager ATM Hybrid reliability Suite check in via the hunt to feature System availability serviceability International Optical drive Administrable loss plan Restart notification Brazil and Hungary E amp M signaling Reliability options China special dial tone C LAN serviceability tools China time supervision amp forced release Terminal support Japan Support for Japan National Private Networking IDS 6200 family of analog terminals native support Japan Transfer Call Back 6400
33. gt NOTE To properly seat a circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged 1 Insert the UN332C circuit pack into the MSSNET slot 2 Replace the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET circuit pack 3 Insert the TN2211 optical drive Figure 2 1 into the right most TAPE DRIVE slot It only takes up 2 slots 4 Place a blank faceplate over the left most TAPE DRIVE slot 4 Red lt Green Yellow TN2211 OPTICAL DRIVE EN fpdf2211 KLC 010600 Figure 2 1 TN2211 Optical Drive DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 12 5 Place the formatted removable media label facing left into the optical drive gt NOTE Make sure the formatted removable media is not write protected before placing it into the optical drive see Figure 2 2 hidfdsk KLC 112499 Figure Notes 1 Not write protected 2 Write protected Figure 2 2 Make sure the disk is not write protected A CAUTION The removable media has a sliding metal cover to protect the surface of the disk DO NOT TOUCH THE DISK see Figure 2 3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additi
34. or the number provided by your Lucent Technologies representative Table 5 14 Required Hardware Equipment Description Quantity PEC 6300 05X Processor Port Network 1 J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier 1 J58890BB 3 Port Carrier 1 106647985 TN775B Maintenance 1 103557294 TN776 Expansion Interface 4or 12 AT TN570 Expansion Interface 4or 1212 J58890TO 1 L1 Removable Media 4 H 600 204 G1 ICC 23 407439975 20 Foot Multi mode Fiber Optic Cable 20r6 106455348 9823 A Lightwave Transceiver 4 or 12 See Note 1 106455363 9823 B Lightwave Transceiver 4 or 12 See Note 1 106689516 TN771D Maintenance Test 1or2 1 Use 4 for a critical reliability system with 2 port networks or 12 with 3 port networks Either 2 or 8 Expansion Interfaces Els ship loose with the EPN equipment The factory has installed the other 2 or 4 Els in the new PPN 2 Required port network interfaces in a Release 8 system with the optional packet bus Required for an EPN in a critical reliability system 4 Use 4 or 12 if the EPNs and the PPN are remotely located Assuming acceptable lengths the fibers previously connecting an upgraded G2 universal module not a traditional module to the G2 TMS have the correct transceiver connectors and can be reused e DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Cri
35. 11101000 Line Coding ami zcs ami zcs ami zcs ami zcs Framing Mode DS1CONV 1 Line Compensation 1 1 HE T DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation 1 1 1 1 Facility A Circuit ID 09876543 Facility B Circuit ID 234567889 a Screen 6 5 Fiber Link Administration form for T1 TN1654 Circuit Pack DS1 Converter Complex Administration page 2 of 3 The following unique fields display when administering a T1 TN1654 DS1 Converter a Bit Rate Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654 Enter either 1 544 for domestic T1 operation or 2 048 for international E1 operation gt NOTE Since one bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1 Converter complex the Bit Rate field displays only under Facility A m Facility Startup Idle Code Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654 Enter 8 digits each digit must be 0 or 1 The second digit must be 1 Default is 11101000 You can administer this field on a per circuit pack basis This is the idle code used when a TN1654 first establishes a link on a T1 E1 facility The initial idle code used by the TN1654 is overwritten by the center stage switch to an all ones pattern once framing is established on that T1 E1 facility a Framing Mode For TN1654 with 1 544 Mbps Bit Rate this is a display only field DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administrat
36. 2100 01 00 Stop first Sunday on or after October 25 at 2 00 21 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 3 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 4 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 5 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 6 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 7s Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 2 Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day Month Date Time and Increment fields for each rule for example 1 00 equals one hour gt NOTE You can change any rule except rule 0 zero You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens 3 When done press Enter Set Date and Time 1 Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen z DATE AND TIME Daylight Savings Rule 0 ES DATE Day of the Week Tuesday Month February Day of the Month 8 Year 2000 TIME Hour 20 Minute 30 Second XX Type standard DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 18 2 Type the day in English Sunday through Saturday in the Day of the Week field See Table 2 3 for English day names When done press Tab to move to next field Ta
37. 3 Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory Connect the Cables 1 Determine into which port slot you are putting the TN802B IP Interface gt NOTE Make sure that at least 3 adjoining slots are free 2 From the rear of the cabinet connect the amphenol connector on the external cable assembly to the backplane connector corresponding to that slot the highest numbered connector of the 3 slots required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 59 Connect the Modem gt NOTE These instructions are for connecting the U S Robotics modem supplied to U S customers only If using a different modem follow the manufacturer s instructions on connecting the modem 1 Connect the RS232 port of the modem to the MODEM connector of the TN802B external cable assembly gt NOTE Check the labels near the connectors the MODEM and COM2 connectors look the same 2 Connect an analog telephone line to the leftmost analog line port on the modem as shown in Figure 6 25 3 Make sure that the modem s DIP switches are set as shown in Figure 6 25 and Table 6 7 4 Plug the modem into an AC power outlet 5 Turn on the modem using the switch on the front of the modem modfrobo KLC 030
38. 5 TDM LAN Bus Terminator ZAHF4 3 Processor Carrier A Position 6 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L7 Figure 6 36 TDM LAN Connections for Standard Reliability R8r EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 104 Table 6 9 TDM LAN Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890BB L1 Port 21 02 J58890BB L2 Port 21 01 J58890BB L3 Port 21 01 J58890AP Control 21 02 Install Circuit Packs 1 Install the new circuit packs into carrier D Use the decal and the upgrade configuration document provided with the equipment as a guide 2 Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs Interconnect Port Networks 1 Behind the cabinet containing the switch node carrier See Figure 6 37 a Connect the metallic intracarrier cable H600 278 to slots 1D01 and 1D02 2 Behind switch node carrier D of PPN cabinet 1 See Figure 6 37 a For each EPN install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector with the following order of slots 1D20 1D03 1D19 1D04 1D18 1D05 and so forth b Connect 1 end of a fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions
39. 6 Port Carrier E Position 2 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 7 Slot 21 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L6 8 Slot 01 4 Module Control Carrier A Position 9 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L7 5 Port Carrier D Position Figure 5 10 TDM LAN Connections for High Reliability System DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 49 3 Disconnect the 16 ground straps from the top and bottom of the A carrier See Figure 5 11 These straps reconnect to the new A carrier Ui T M UE M E C 9 J I SS ee TAMU DC defoot KLC 102996 Figure Notes 1 Rear of Cabinet 4 Module Control Carrier A Position 2 Port Carrier C Position 5 Port Carrier D Position 3 Ground Jumpers Figure 5 11 Locations of Ground Jumpers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 50 4 Disconnect the P1 and P2 cables from the A carrier See Figure 5 12 5 Slide the latch up and disconnect the P1 cable from the B carrier crdfp12 KLC 101596
40. 6 113 Prepare New Switch Node Carrier D 1 Visually inspect the new carrier for any damage Verify that the backplane pins are not bent 2 Place the switch node carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up 3 Verify that the four AHF105 switch node SN bus terminators are installed on the D carrier to the pin field blocks marked SNTRM top and bottom portions of slots 02 and 20 See Figure 6 39 The SN bus terminators are attached with the components on the left side as viewed from the rear 4 Atthe rear connector panel determine which connectors will have a cable attached and install a 4C cable retainer on each of these connectors ROW 49 oo poe ws KML dodo Nt ROW 35 ROW 25 gt us os B vs EL n oder ect SNITRMI TDM LAN TDM LAN SLOT 4 gt 04 03 02 01 00 SNITRM2 ROW 24 Figure 6 39 ICC Connections for Switch Node Carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 114 Install New Switch Node Carrier D 1 Install the J58890SA switch node carrier in position D by lining up the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips will support the carrier while the screws are being replaced E
41. For a critical reliability system with 1 collocated expansion port network use 2 fiber optic cables and 4 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks For a critical reliability system with 2 collocated expansion port networks use 6 fiber optic cables and 12 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks gt NOTE Based on floor plan considerations the length of these cables may vary 20 foot 6 1 m cables are normally adequate for a Release 8r with 2 port networks For collocated cabinets route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to each EPN cabinet Since a Release 8r PPN cabinet is collocated with a Single Carrier Cabinet stack the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level Fiber Remoted Port Networks For a critical reliability system with 1 fiber remoted EPN use 4 fiber optic cables 4 lightwave transceivers and 4 lightguide interface units provided by the PSC For a critical reliability system with 2 fiber remoted EPN use 12 fiber optic cables 12 lightwave transceivers and 12 lightguide interface units provided by the PSC DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 34
42. Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to the other SN and vice versa must be engineered The traffic that links across these fibers is simply the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN Figure 6 47 shows 3 SNs used as a CSS for up to 31 EPNs Use this configuration when high inter SN traffic is expected DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add Center Stage Switch 6 126 cydfpbx2 RPY 081897 Figure Notes 1 Switch Node SN 1 7 Inter SN Connections 3 fibers 2 Switch Node 2 8 EPN Cabinet 10 3 Switch Node 3 9 EPN Cabinet 20 4 PPN Cabinet 10 Inter SN Connection 2 fibers 5 EPN Cabinet 1 11 EPN Cabinet 21 6 EPN Cabinet 9 12 EPN Cabinet 31 Figure 6 47 3 SN CSS with High Inter SN Traffic Fiber Engineering for 3 SNs Switches with 3 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient switching fabric at the CSS The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not require engineering Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to another SN and vice versa must be engineered The traffic that links across these fibers is simply the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabin
43. Power Up the EPN Cabinet 1 2 Behind each EPN cabinet power supply set the circuit breaker to ON After about 40 seconds EPN power and PPN EPN communications return After power returns to the EPN and all trouble is cleared verify the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode Install Rear Ground Plates Systems with Earthquake Protection 1 Loosen the 4 screws at the bottom of the top cabinet and at the top of the cabinet underneath the top cabinet See Figure 3 17 Align the mounting holes in the rear ground plate over the bottom screws in the top cabinet See Figure 3 17 Align the mounting holes in the ground plate with the 4 holes at the top of the cabinet below the top cabinet Slide the mounting plate down to seat on the screws Check all TDM bus cables and the ICC to be sure they are not pinched by the plates Repeat Steps 1 3 until the rear ground plates are installed between all stacked cabinets Do not tighten the screws yet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 50 Install Front Ground Plates Systems with Earthquake Protection Use 1 front ground plate between 2 stacked cabinets 1 Atthe front of the cabinets align the holes in the top of the front ground plate with
44. Read This First 1 2 Read This First Service Interruption The upgrade process requires 2 non call preserving service interruptions in a standard reliability system and must be closely coordinated with the customer and the local account team Call Management System CMS The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade This causes CMS data to be lost This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just after the last CMS measurement interval All measurement data is lost during the upgrade including BCMS If needed the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the conference dropped off the call before the end of the call Customers experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to r3v4ao e or higher Software Compatibility and Translation Errors Before starting the upgrade always check the Software Release Letter that accompanies the system removable media Translation corruption will occur if incompatible software is loaded After loading the new software check for translation errors To do this log off and then log back in Check for a Translation Corruption Detected message before proceeding with the upgrade If the message indicates errors refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors are corrected
45. Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 33 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 4 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 5s Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 6 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 72 Start first on or after at A e Stop first on or after at 2 Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day Month Date Time and Increment fields for each rule for example 1 00 equals one hour gt NOTE You can change any rule except rule 0 zero You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens 3 When done press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware Set Date and Time Issue 1 April 2000 1 Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen FK DATE DATE AND TIME TIME Hour 20 Minute 30 Second XX Daylight Savings Rule 0 Day of the Week Tuesday Month Day of the Month 8 Year February 2000 Type standard lt 1 19 2 Type the day in English Sunday through Saturday in the Day of the Week field See Table 1 3 for English day names When done press Tab to move to next field Table 1 3 English Day of the Week Names Day Number
46. Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 96 9 2 MH o idi cydff06 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 EPN1 Carrier B Slot 2B02 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A01 6 Fiber Optic Cable 3 To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 7 TX Connector 4 PPN Carrier B Slot 1B01 8 RX Connector Figure 5 29 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 97 a a o 4 s RX TX i o Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02 6 Fiber Optic Cable 3 To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01 7 TX Connector 4 To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02 8 RX Connector Figure 5 30 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 98 cydffO6 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 To EPN2 Carrier B Slot 3B03 2 To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A02 6 Fiber Optic Cable 3 To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A02 7 TX Connector 4 To EPN1 Carrier B Slot 2B03 8 RX Connector Figure 5 31 Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server R
47. Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 2 Circuit Pack Form After installing the equipment including circuit packs the circuit packs must be administered before the fiber link is administered Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide for more information The following information describes general circuit pack administration information a Use the Circuit Packs form to administer circuit packs to carrier slots Install or administer the circuit packs or assigned using the Circuit Packs form before administering voice terminals attendant consoles or trunks Each page of the form represents 1 carrier in the cabinet shown on the command line Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Planning and Configuration for more information about circuit pack administration and port assignment records For initial installation assign circuit packs to slots using the hardware configuration layout record from the factory or Customer Services Organization Do not arbitrarily assign circuit packs to slots If the carrier type administered on the Cabinet Administration form does not match the physical hardware question marks may display in the Code fields When a circuit pack in a slot differs from what has been administered on the form a displays between the Sfx and Name fiel
48. V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory 1 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade the software from a DEFINITY G3rV2 V3 or V4 system to a Release 8r system The chapter also provides information on replacing the following hardware m The TN1657 disk drive if drive is not Vintage 4 or later m The TN 1656 tape drive with the TN2211 optical drive m The UN332 B MSSNET circuit pack with the UN332C circuit pack required for the optical drive m ATN1650B memory circuit pack if the system does not contain 3 of these circuit packs gt NOTE Adding memory to the standby SPE causes an error because the memory number between the standby and active carriers does not match If the system already contains 3 TN1650B Memory circuit packs and a V4 or later TN1657 disk drive skip to Chapter 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory The procedures step you through a software and hardware upgrade that can be done on either a standard reliability system or a high or critical reliability system For more help refer to the following books DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Maintenance for Rer DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory
49. Wait 10 minutes Ah CAUTION Allow 10 minutes after unlocking to make sure the standby SPE has fully returned to service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 15 Verify Interchange H C only This step is performed twice once for each carrier but not at the same time gt NOTE Because of the memory mismatch between the standby and active SPEs typing the status spe command yields two different scenarios After the circuit packs have been replaced in the first carrier 1 Type status spe and press Enter m The Standby Refreshed field shows no m The Standby Shadowing field shows off m The Standby Handshake field shows up 2 Go to Upgrade other carrier H C only After the circuit packs have been replaced in the second carrier 1 Type status spe and press Enter to make sure the active side is ready for interchange When it is ready m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up 2 Go to Affix position label s Upgrade other carrier H C only To upgrade the other carrier lock the SPE switches on the DUPINT to the other carrier gt NOTE The new active carrier resets cold 2 restart Wait until the login prompt appears then log in Repeat the steps from Check the activ
50. as appropriate ITU T Formerly CCITT ECMA ETSI IPNS DPNSS National ISDN 1 National ISDN 2 ISO 9000 ANSI FCC Part 15 and Part 68 EN55022 EN50081 EN50082 CISPR22 Australia AS3548 AS NZ3548 Australia AS3260 IEC 825 IEC 950 UL 1459 UL 1950 CSA C222 Number 225 TS001 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book LASER Product xxiii LASER Product The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device operates within the following parameters Maximum Power Output 5 dBm Wavelength 1310 nm Mode Field Diameter 8 8 mm CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1993 A CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following EMC standards as appropriate m Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment EN55022 CISPR22 1993 m EN50082 1 European Generic Immunity Standard m FCC Part 15 m Australia AS3548 gt NOTE The system conforms to Class A industrial equipment Voice terminals meet Clas
51. change the administrator password and if desired the user name to ensure security See your Windows NT server documentation for details DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 65 If administered locally on a monitor keyboard and mouse 1 Press CTRL ALT and DEL simultaneously Type administrator in the User Name field Type iptrunk in the Password field and click OK AA OO Im After logging on for the first time change the administrator password and if desired the user name to ensure security See your Windows NT server documentation for details A Law versus Mu Law For systems using A Law companding an additional procedure is necessary On the SAT 1 Busyout the trunk group associated with the IP trunk by typing busyout board UUCSS and pressing Enter In the Windows interface to TN802B 1 Click on Control Panel Services Highlight IP Trunk Service then click on Stop In the lower left hand corner right click Start Explore 2 3 4 Goto the c drive and click on its then bin 5 Double click on the its ini file to open it in Notepad 6 Under the MediaLib section go to COMPANDING MLAW Change MLAW to ALAW 7 Click on File Save to save the file 8 Click on File Exit to exit Notepad 9 Click on Control Panel Services 10 High
52. connector behind PPN control carrier A or install the G3 MA according to the Set Up G3 MA chapter of DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Management Applications Operations 585 229 202 Insert the translation cards in the TN794 faceplates At each EPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON At the PPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process loading the default system translations from the translation card This takes 8 to 11 minutes Getthe order number of the upgrade and call the regional CSA to request an init login so the right to use options can be enabled on the upgraded system To use Access Security Gateway ASG see Appendix C Access Security Gateway Set Daylight Savings Rules You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules If you have cabinets in several different time zones you can set up rules for each on a location basis A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight savings time It also specifies the increment at which to transition gt NOTE 1 The default daylight savings rule is 0 no daylight savings Type change daylight savings rules and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Addition
53. frame on the left side gt NOTE DC powered carriers do not use these carrier ground straps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 85 12 Connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and D 13 14 carriers to the pin field block marked TDM on the right side of the A carrier see Figure 5 26 and Table 5 15 The other end remained connected to the D carrier when the old carrier was removed Connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the B and C carriers to the pin field block marked TDM on the right side of the B carrier The other end remained connected to the C carrier when the old carrier was removed Install the TDM LAN cable between the A and B carriers The cable is connected to the A and B carriers at the pin field blocks marked TDM on the left side of each carrier Table 5 15 TDM LAN Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890BB 1 Port 21 02 J58890BB 2 Port 21 01 J58890BB 3 Port 21 01 J58890AF EPN Control A 21 02 15 On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or the TDM terminator to Slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TDM cables or the TDM terminator to Slot 01 If the port carrier has
54. in ASpan LED on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack must be on for each active facility administered For example if Facility A and Facility B are administered then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be on yellow The yellow LEDs are on only if no problems were encountered during the administration of hardware Span LEDs associated with non administered facilities C and D in this example should be off Perform a test call if desired DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 8 Fiber Link Administration Form This form administers fiber links each of which is identified by a fiber number gt NOTE Fiber link administration only applies to R5r and later configurations Port networks PNs are connected via direct fiber link connections or through a center stage switch CSS to provide the interconnection of port networks required for voice data information transfer The CSS is composed of switch nodes that can be interconnected in one or two levels to provide Port Network Connectivity PNC The CSS provides circuit switched connectivity for voice and data communications as well as packet switched connectivity Fiber link administration permits an administration of translation data associated with a switch connection such as optical fiber metallic cable or DS1 CONV circ
55. in the B C and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading to indicate that this DS1 facility is suitable to be used as a clock source If the DS1 signal does not come directly from the far end converter circuit pack or the network such as when the signal is converted from digital to analog and then back to digital enter no Default is yes for Facility A This field determines whether the DS1 converter circuit pack can use receive DS1 signal timing to time the transmit fiber signal This is necessary for passing timing from a master PN to a slave PN across a Converter Complex m Digital Data Compatible Enter yes default in the B C and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading to indicate that this DS1 facility is suitable for transmission of digital data At least Facility A must be suitable for transmission of digital data If Customer Premises Equipment that alters digital data exists on this facility such as with a channel expansion multiplexer enter no DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 14 Line Coding Enter the line coding format ami zcs default or ami basic b8zs or hdb3 in the A B C and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading for each DS1 facility When ami zcs line coding is used all zero bytes are prevented from being transmitted on th
56. time shut down Windows NT first by pressing the recessed reset button on the faceplate see Figure 6 22 of the TN802B IP Interface until the LCD shows a flashing MSHUT When the flashing stops and the asterisk disappears about 2 min it is safe to remove the circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Issue 1 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 51 E 9 am Ie pdfmapd KLC 030899 Figure Notes 1 LCD display 4 PCMCIA card slot 2 Reset button recessed 5 Yellow PCMCIA disk in use LED 3 Red board status LED Figure 6 22 TN802B IP Interface faceplate gt NOTE If replacing the existing TN799 circuit pack remove it first and replace it with the new one 1 Insert the TN799B circuit pack into the port slot identified earlier gt NOTE To properly seat the circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 52 2 Insert the TN802B IP Interface into the right most of the three slots you reserved for it see Figure 6 23 and seat it properly When y
57. when a call is answered or abandoned or the agent changes work modes The BCMS feature monitors work states and uses this information to provide BCMS reports write operation The process of putting information onto a storage medium such as a hard disk WSA Waiting session accept WSS Wireless Subscriber System Z ZCS Zero Code Suppression DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Index Index Numerics 300A single mode fiber transceiver 3 27 3 33 9823 type fiber optic transceiver 3 27 A Access Security Gateway C 1 Access Security Gateway Feature xvi adding circuit packs 6 2 control carrier 6 80 disk drive 1 9 MCC port carriers 6 128 port carriers 6 128 switch node carrier 6 94 6 108 address plugs single carrier 3 16 alarm origination disable procedure 4 8 announcement rerecording 3 53 ASG C 1 B blank carrier panel 6 134 bracket attachments for fiber pass thru kit 6 17 C cabinet fastening together 3 50 stabilizing for earthquake 3 49 cabinet clip 3 51 cable connections intercabinet single carrier 3 20 cable disconnect label 6 17 cable labels 3 12 cabling local port networks single carrier 3 45 public network single carrier 3 46 center stage switch fiber optic connections 3 40 6 105 6 120 CFY1 Current Limiter CURL 3 20 Channel Service Unit cabling to DS1 Converter 6
58. 1 Insert the new Release 8r removable media into the optical drive 2 Power up the Release 8r cabinet and allow the system to boot up completely List Configuration Software Long 1 Type list configuration software long and press Enter to verify the removable media contains the required Release 8 software 2 Make note of the entire alohanumeric string of the software version This information is used later DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 4 G8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Install the Release 8r Cabinets Restore Disk Full Issue 1 April 2000 4 12 1 Type restore disk full and press Enter This instructs the system to copy the entire removable media to disk and takes about 30 minutes to complete Release 8 system software with translations are now resident on the disk gt NOTE Until this command finishes the system provides no user feedback on the management terminal Do not press Enter while the command executes Doing so causes the terminal screen to clear as the command finishes erasing any success failure messages the System may provide 2 Type upgrade software G3V8r XX X XXX X entire alphanumeric string of target software version and press Enter This takes about 15 minutes to complete For Release 5 this is call preserving 3 Login as craft at the Login prompt Set Daylight Savings Rules You can set up to 15 customiz
59. 146 Smart Jacks 6 146 Issue 1 April 2000 IN 1 circuit packs adding 6 2 expansion control cabinet 3 14 sorted by code 6 3 collocated port networks single carrier 3 22 communication between equipment rooms 3 2 connect new EPN to existing EPN and PPN standard reliability 6 26 connect new EPN to existing PPN critical reliability 6 31 high reliability 6 28 standard reliability 6 23 6 27 connections ICC 6 91 ITS network 6 50 6 53 6 60 TDM LAN 6 90 6 104 6 118 6 140 TDMILAN for critical reliability EPN 6 103 6 116 TDMILAN for critical reliability PPN 6 117 control cabinet remove existing single carrier 3 15 control carrier adding 6 80 ICC connections 6 91 Control LAN circuit pack 6 42 critical reliability fiber optic connections through center stage switch 6 105 6 120 TDM LAN connections for EPN 6 139 TDM LAN connections for PPN 6 137 D date set procedure 4 13 day of the week table of English names 1 19 2 18 4 14 5 38 5 69 5 108 daylight savings rules 1 18 2 16 4 12 5 37 DCS Interface 6 42 disk drive adding 1 9 distributed communications system 6 42 DS1 CONV connections to EI SNI Cables 3 46 remoted cabinets 3 45 remoted port networks 3 27 DS1 Converter Y cable 6 146 cabling 6 146 quad cable 6 146 DS1 CONV remoted port networks single carrier 3 23 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for
60. 1D02 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable Route the fiber cable to Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 3 4E03 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa Connect an H600 278 Metallic Cable from Slot 1 in the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 4 4A01 to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 4E19 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 30 I SS A NNN P NS V n I SS 4 N Be OQ UU M NS I NS LI SS LL NSSSSSS WO WO V WI V cadf030 PDH 111196 X7 Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 3 Cabinet 4 MCC EPN 2 Cabinet 2 3 and 5 through 16 MCC or SCC EPNs with One Switch Node
61. 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5dr R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory 2 1 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade the software from a DEFINITY ECS Release br Release 6r or Release 7r to a Release 8r system without adding memory The chapter also provides information on replacing the tape drive with the optical drive and replacing the UN332B MSSNET circuit pack with the UN332C circuit pack which is required for the optical drive The procedures step through a software and hardware upgrade that can be done on either a standard reliability or a high or critical reliability system There are many configurations of DEFINITY ECS Release 5r 6r 7r in the field and each system can have a unique configuration This book addresses the most common configurations Also refer to the following books DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Maintenance for Rer gt NOTE If the cabinet is older than Release 5 refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3r G3r Upgrades and Aaditions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Read This First 2 2 Read This First Service Interruption The upgrade process requires 2 non call preserving se
62. 24 m 3 wiooooooooooQ o000000000 2 O 00000000 0 14 nuaogugaooooouuuugijiooooouununmnubBu nngumugooooonuumnuuuuloooonunurnmnrmucu nngumumunooooonumnuuuuloooounurnmnrmuu nuaagagagoooooduduudloooooduuuco wiooooooooooQ oooo0o00000000 9o00 000000006 CURL Pinfield nungumunooooonuumuuulooooounumunn nngumngooooonuumuuulooooounumunun nngumugooooonumnuuuuloooounurmnucucdu oom0o000000000000jo0o00000000 nangunooooonuuuuaooooonugungunuHu noaungamnooooonuuuuaoooooaudununmunu nungnuooooonuuuudgooooonuununmuHu noungumunooocooouuuuuuooooouununulu eceuumuumuooooouuuugooocooounununmuuu Qvs lnuunna unooooonunnn nooooonnnnun amp HumngHnunoooconununbBHooooonuHHBnuH ec ounugunmuooooonunumnmuoooooognnnunu C RS c o o Figure 3 4 ICC Pinfield Blocks on J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet O oona oojo o oo o o 24 oono oojoo onoo unuua oojoo oooo oooo0 oojoo ooo00 oogo oojoo oogo oooo oojoo oooo 200ga ola o nnun e orel oojo nnun nun oojoo onoono ICCB caua JB Waaa nonn nuun nan oogo ooooa oyaa oogo uuu uou oooo unuun ooo ooao uuun ooo unun nuun unu unun nuun ooon oogo uuu oogo oono nunn onoo unuuu oooa oooo oooo onoo oooo oooo unuun oooa soon Jaano foooo O oooo oooo oooo o oooo ooo ooooj00 3210 o Oo 0e 010 00 O O 6 00 5 00 4 00 3 00 2 00 1 00 0 00 I
63. 29 W BR 8 04 BR W GRD 9 30 W S 10 05 S W GRD 11 31 R BL 12 06 BL R GRD 13 32 R O 14 07 O R GRD 15 33 R G 16 08 G R 17 34 R BR 18 09 BR R 19 35 R S 20 10 SR 21 36 BK BL XFER48 22 11 BL BK GRD 23 37 BK O XFER48 24 12 O BK GRD 25 38 BK G XFER48 26 13 G BK GRD 27 39 BK BR XFER48 28 14 BR BK GRD 29 40 BK S XFER48 30 15 S BK GRD 31 41 Y BL XFER48 32 16 BL Y GRD 33 42 Y O XFER48 34 17 O Y GRD 35 43 Y G 36 18 G Y 37 44 Y BR GRD 38 19 BR Y ACC48A 39 45 Y S GRD 40 20 S Y ACC48B 41 46 V BL GRD 42 21 BL V ACC48C 43 47 V O 44 22 O V 45 48 V G EXT_ALM 46 23 G V EXT_ALM_RT 47 49 V BR 48 24 BR V 49 50 V S INADS TIP 50 25 S V INADS RING DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 9 Save Translations 1 Log in at the Manager Il on the G2 2 Type rtx run tape execute and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the tape 3 Remove the system tape and install the backup tape 4 Type rtx and press Enter Make Source Tape for TRACS Report A spare G2 tape must be acquired from the remediation before performing the following steps For each processor there must always be 2 tapes on site with the G2 system Do not send a system or backup tape to STS After performing the previous procedures copy the G2 tr
64. 30 A CAUTION If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets Type ninthe Alarm Origination field and press Enter if the field is not set to neither gt NOTE For some software loads set the Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields to n before pressing Enter Check Link Status Type display communication interface links and press Enter Write down all enabled links Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for all links Write down which links are in service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 9 Disable TTI gt NOTE Do this step only if the Terminal Translation Initialization TTI is enabled CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 2 On the second screen set the TTI Enabled field to n to de activate the TTI feature Check TTI Status 1 Type status tti and press Enter Wait until the Percent Complete field shows 100 Busyout MMI Circuit Packs H C only A CAUTION Multimedia to voice station calls are not preserved on an upgrade Failure to busy out the TN787 Multimedia Interface MMI circuit packs results in unusable
65. 4 Plug the monitor into an AC power receptacle and turn it on DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 61 Connect the Ethernet 1 Connect the network cable to the ETHERNET connector on the TN802B external cable assembly gt NOTE You need a CAT5 or better cable for 100 Mbyte operation Install the Circuit Pack A CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap gt NOTE The TN802B IP Interface is hot swappable so you do not need to power down the carrier to install it If you need to remove the TN802B IP Interface from the carrier at a later time shut down Windows NT first by pressing the recessed reset button on the faceplate see Figure 6 26 of the TN802B IP Interface until the LCD shows a flashing MSHUT When the flashing stops and the asterisk disappears about 2 min it is safe to remove the circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 62 Z 2 Lucent pdimapd KLG 030899 Figure Notes 1 LCD display 4 PCMCIA card slot 2 Reset button recessed 5 Yellow PCMCIA di
66. 5 19 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 cydf013 CJL102396 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 Optical Cross Connect Facility 2 To PPN Carrier D Slot 1D02 6 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 3 To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01 7 TX Connector 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 RX Connector Figure 5 20 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 66 cydf013 CJL 102396 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 Optical Cross Connect Facility 2 To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A02 6 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 3 To EPN2 Cabinet A Slot 3A02 7 TX Connector 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 RX Connector Figure 5 21 Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages Verify that each reused circuit pack conforms to the usable vintage requirements for a Release 8 system see Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices Remove Power Failure Ground Wire Remove the 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm ground wire from the power failure transfer unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 67 Boot the Release 8 System 1 a A OO Io Connect the management terminal to the TERMINAL
67. 631DB1 AC Power Unit Power 644A1 DC Power Unit Power 645B1 DC Power Unit Power 649A DC Power Unit Power 676B C DC Power Supply Power 982LS Current Limiter Power CFY1B Current Limiter Power CPP1 Memory Expansion Control ED 1E546 DEFINITY AUDIX R3 System Port TN2169 Assembly TN2170 TN566 TN567 ED 1E546 Call Visor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway Port TN2208 R1 Assembly TN2170 J58890M1 CallVisor ASAl CallVisor PC LAN over the DEFINITY Port TN801 LAN Gateway R2 Assembly TN417 Auxiliary Trunk Port TN419B Tone Clock Control TN420B C Tone Detector Service TN429B C D Direct Inward Outward Dialing DIOD Trunk Port TN433 Speech Synthesizer Service TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN437 Tie Trunk Australia Port Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware List of Circuit Packs 6 4 Table 6 1 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN438B Central Office Trunk Port TN439 Tie Trunk Port TN447 Central Office Trunk Port TN457 Speech Synthesizer Service TN458 Tie Trunk U K Port TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN464C D E F DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Port TN465 B C Central Office Trunk Port TN467 Analog Line Port TN468B Analog Line Por
68. 73 Save Translations 5 74 Back Up Disk 74 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Task Tables 5 13 Table 5 5 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r Critical Reliability Y Task Description Page Upgrade Cabinets 5 75 Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance 5 76 Label Cables 5 76 Check Link Status 5 77 Disable TTI 5 77 Power Down G2 System 5 77 Install Power Failure Transfer Ground Wire 5 77 Disconnect Cables 5 78 Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carriers A and B 5 78 Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A 5 78 Remove Module Control Carriers A and B 5 79 Prepare the New A and B Position Carriers 5 83 Install the New A and B Position Carriers 5 84 Test the CURL 5 90 Install Circuit Packs 5 90 Interconnect Port Networks Critical Reliability 5 91 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages 5 105 Remove Power Failure Ground Strap 5 106 Boot the Release 8 System 5 106 Set Daylight Savings Rules 5 107 Set Date and Time 5 108 Set Additional Administration 5 110 Close Upgraded EPN Cabinet and Reconnect Cables 5 110 Power Up the EPN Cabinets 5 111 Retranslate Port Circuits 5 111 Enable TTI 5 111 Check Link Status 5 111 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 5 111 Co
69. A and D carriers to the pin field block labeled TDM LAN on the right side of both carriers See Figure 6 36 and Table 6 9 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 102 9 If a switch node carrier was installed in the D position verify that the 10 11 12 ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator is installed at slot 02 of the switch node carrier D See Figure 6 36 If a switch node carrier is being installed in the E position verify that the ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator is installed at slot 21 Install the front trim plates on the D carrier Install the new power units into the D carrier Install a 649A on the left and right sides of the carrier Connect the power cords to the power units The power cords are the white cables equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front of each carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 103 LUU NW LUUN uw cadf012 KLC 033197 uw Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 4 Switch Node Carrier D Position 2 Port Carrier B Position
70. A station that is monitored and controlled via a domain control association COR See Class of Restriction COR COS See Class of Service COS coverage answer group A group of up to eight voice terminals that ring simultaneously when a call is redirected to it by Call Coverage Any one of the group can answer the call coverage call A call that is automatically redirected from the called party s extension to an alternate answering position when certain coverage criteria are met coverage path The order in which calls are redirected to alternate answering positions coverage point An extension or attendant group VDN or ACD split designated as an alternate answering position in a coverage path covering user A person at a coverage point who answers a redirected call CP Circuit pack CPE Customer premises equipment CPN Called party number CPN BN Calling party number billing number CPTR Call progress tone receiver CRC Cyclical Redundancy Checking critical reliability system A system that has the following duplicated items control carriers tone clocks El circuit packs and cabling between port networks and center stage switch in a CSS connected system See also duplicated common control and duplication CSA Canadian Safety Association CSCC Compact single carrier cabinet CSCN Center stage control network CSD Customer service document DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release
71. Answer DLC Data line circuit DLDM Data line data module DMI Digital multiplexed interface DND Do not disturb DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service DOD Direct Outward Dialing domain VDNs ACD splits and stations The VDN domain is used for active notification associations The ACD split domain is for active notification associations and domain control associations The station domain is used for the domain control associations domain control association A Third Party Domain Control Request capability initiates a unique CRV link number combination which is referred to as a domain control association domain controlled split A split for which Third Party Domain Control request has been accepted A domain controlled split provides an event report for logout DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 19 domain controlled station A station for which a Third Party Domain Control request has been accepted A domain controlled station provides event reports for calls that are alerting connected or held at the station domain controlled station on a call A station that is active on a call and which provides event reports over one or two domain control associations DOSS Delivery Operations Support System DOT Duplication Option Terminal DPM Dial Plan Manager DPR Dual port RAM DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 D
72. B channel call control and out of band signaling information With nonfacility associated signaling NFAS ISDN PRI can include 24 B channels and no D channel See alsolntegrated Services Digital Network ISDN andIntegrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI intercept tone A tone that indicates a dialing error or denial of the service requested interface A common boundary between two systems or pieces of equipment internal call A connection between two users within a system International Telecommunications Union ITU Formerly known as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee CCITT ITU is an international organization that sets universal standards for data communications including ISDN ITU members are from telecommunications companies and organizations around the world See alsoBX 25 International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee See International Telecommunications Union ITU interflow The ability for calls to forward to other splits on the same PBX or a different PBX using the Call Forward All Calls feature intraflow The ability for calls to redirect to other splits on the same PBX on a conditional or unconditional basis using call coverage busy don t answer or all criteria DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 28 internal measurements B
73. Carrier Open the rear doors Remove the blank port carrier panel by pushing outward on panel from the rear of the cabinet until the panel clears the 4 retaining pins on the cabinet frame See Figure 6 49 Use a screwdriver to loosen and remove the 4 retaining pins from the cabinet frame Align the carrier through the front of the system cabinet with the 4 pilot holes on cabinet frame gt NOTE Support the carrier by the molded in support pins above the top mounting holes Insert self tapping screws in the pilot holes and tighten 6 Attach the magnetically held nomenclature panel to front of carrier Atthe rear install 8 grounding jumpers from the adjacent backplane to the new carrier backplane wiring Figure 6 50 and Figure 6 51 Connect a 9 pin D subminiature plug on right side of cabinet to P1 connector on carrier If necessary cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable to the upright in the area of the carrier being installed Connect the TDM LAN cable to the newly installed port carrier See Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 or Figure 6 55 and Table 6 11 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 131 10 Install a 631AR 631WA1 631DA1 or 644A power unit in the leftmost slot and a 631BR 631WB1 631DB1 645B or 649A power unit in the
74. D6 Connector on G2 System Terminal Number Pin Color Designation Terminal Pin Color Designation 1 26 W BL UNIT20 2 01 BL W UNIT19 3 27 W O UNIT22 4 02 O W UNIT21 5 28 W G UNIT24 6 03 G W UNIT23 7 29 W BR 8 04 BR W UNIT25 9 30 W S UNIT27 10 05 S W UNIT26 11 31 R BL UNIT29 12 06 BL R UNIT28 13 32 R O UNIT31 14 07 O R UNIT30 15 33 R G AUXCTMP 16 08 G R UNIT32 17 34 R BR EXTEQMN 18 09 BR R EXTEQMJ 19 35 R S AUXCRCT 20 10 S R AUXCHO 21 36 BK BL AUXCCB 22 11 BL BK AUXCFRQ 23 37 BK O AUXCFAN 24 12 O BK 25 38 BK G EXTPRMJ 26 13 G BK EXTPRMN 27 39 BK BR UNIT2 28 14 BR BK UNIT1 29 40 BK S UNIT4 30 15 S BK UNITS 31 41 Y BL UNIT6 32 16 BL Y UNITS 33 42 Y O UNIT8 34 17 O Y UNIT7 35 43 Y G UNIT10 36 18 G Y UNIT9 37 44 Y BR 38 19 BR Y UNIT11 39 45 Y S UNIT13 40 20 SY UNIT12 41 46 V BL UNIT15 42 21 BL V UNIT14 43 47 V O UNIT17 44 22 O V UNIT16 45 48 V G 46 23 G V UNIT18 47 49 V BR RINGO 48 24 BR V TIPO 49 50 V S RING1 50 25 S V TIP1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 8 Table 5 2 Pinouts for Auxiliary Connector on Release 8 Systems Terminal Terminal Number Pin Color Designation Number Pin Color Designation 1 26 W BL AUXMJ 2 01 BL W GRD 3 27 W O AUXMN 4 02 O W GRD 5 28 W G 6 03 G W GRD 7
75. DS1 CONV Remoted Port Networks For a critical reliability system with 1 DS1 CONV remoted EPN this arrangement requires Four DS1 CONV circuit packs TN1654 m Four DS1 CONV to El cables 847245750 and or 847245768 m Four H 600 348 cables m Two 4 6 or 8 pairs of channel service units CSUs m Two 4 6 or 8 pairs of wall field cables provided with the CSUs m 5 10 or 15 dB attenuators single mode fiber only 5dB Attenuator 106060718 10dB Attenuator 106060734 15dB Attenuator 106061021 For a critical reliability system with 2 D81 CONV remoted EPNs this arrangement requires a 12 DS1 CONV circuit packs TN1654 m 12 DS1 CONV to El cables 847245750 and or 847245768 m 12 H 600 348 cables m 6 12 18 or 24 pairs of CSUs m 6 12 18 or 24 pairs of wall field cables provided with CSUs m 5 10 or 15 dB attenuators single mode fiber only 5dB Attenuator 106060718 10dB Attenuator 106060734 15dB Attenuator 106061021 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 35 For 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind port carrier C of the multicarrier PPN See Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 13 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1C02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Ligh
76. Do not continue with the upgrade until the translations errors are corrected Reset SPE status H C only 1 Type status SPE and press Enter Wait until the Standby Handshake field displays up which takes about 3 minutes 2 Type reset spe standby 4 and press Enter gt NOTE You can continue the process while the SPE is resetting List Configuration Control 1 Type list configuration control and press Enter to verify the system recognizes the third TN1650B Memory circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 18 Set Daylight Savings Rules You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules If you have cabinets in several different time zones you can set up rules for each on a location basis A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight savings time It also specifies the increment at which to transition gt NOTE The default daylight savings rule is 0 no daylight savings 1 Type change daylight savings rules and press Enter a DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES UN Rule Change Day Month Date Time Increment 0 No Daylight Savings 1 Start first Sunday on or after April L at 22300 01 00 Stop first Sunday on or after October 25 at 2 00 2
77. If the G2 system being upgraded used more than 1 major or more than 1 minor alarm monitor appearance these extra appearances they can either be distributed to the AUXILIARY connector on a DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPN or ganged so that several external devices share the same appearance The alarms can also be accommodated by paralleling them to the above connections gt NOTE When several external devices are ganged to the same appearance each device loses its individual identity An alarm on a shared appearance only denotes that 1 of several devices reported a problem Subsequent maintenance effort is needed to determine which device reported the problem and the nature of the problem The control circuit pack behind the AUXILIARY connector detects external alarms with a ground detector chip Therefore to gang several external devices every device must be able to return a true relay ground closure to the AUXILIARY connector Alternatives such as a TTL low driver are inadequate The following tables correlate wall field terminal numbers connector pin numbers lead colors and lead designations for the G2 D6 and DEFINITY ECS Release 8 AUXILIARY connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 7 Table 5 1 Pinouts for
78. J58890BB 1 and J58890BB 2 printed on it treat it as a J58890BB 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 86 oi ALL NW 57 We Le AL SS QD Dim WW olo A NNN cadf060 KLC 011697 Figure Notes 1 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 5 Slot 02 2 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L6 6 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L7 3 Slot 21 7 ICCA and ICCB Connectors 4 Inter Carrier Cables A and B H600 204 G1 Figure 5 25 TDM LAN Connections for Critical Reliability Release 8 EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 87 16 Install the front trim plates first on the A carrier and then on the B 17 18 19 20 carrier Install the ICC cables H600 204 G1 between carriers A and B Connect the cables to the ICC pin field block on both carriers see Figure 5 27 and Figure 5 28 and Table 5 16 Install the cable so that the dark stripe is on the bottom at both ends A CAUTION While installing the ICC cable connectors be careful not to bend any backplane pins Double check each connection to verify that the pins are stra
79. LAN bus from the SPE at a TN553 Packet Data Line circuit pack where Mode 3 to Mode 2 conversion is done m Routing the converted data through the cross connect field and back to a TN726B Data Line where the equivalent Mode 2 data can access the TDM bus for subsequent routing to an EIA endpoint The endpoints that use these EIA interfaces and therefore require the Mode 2 to Mode 3 conversion include m Generic 3 Management Applications G3 MA m Remote Management Terminal m Basic Call Management System BCMS terminal a Call Detail Recording Unit CDRU Centralized Attendant Service Plus CAS m Property Management System PMS m Printers Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Reseat the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly into the backplane Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 Reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire 1 Remove the ground wire from the emergency transfer unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 48 Reboot the System 1 a A W DY 10 11 Connect the management terminal to the TERMINAL connector on the rear of PPN control carrier A or install the G3 MA according to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Management Applications Operations 585 229 202 Insert the new Relea
80. On screen 1 a Remove the Board Location information for ENDPOINT 1 and ENDPOINT 2 This is the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of an SNI or El circuit pack that is the first endpoint of the fiber link Repeat for the remaining endpoints b The Board Type field is display only DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 38 c Inthe DS1CONV Board Location field remove the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 1 s duplicate along with Endpoint 2 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B PNC link d The DS1CONV Board Type field is a display only field e The Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex field must remain administered if other fiber connections associated with the facility will remain 3 Scroll to screen 2 a Remove the DS1 Converter Facilities information In the Facility Installed field type no for all facilities A B C and D to be removed b The Bit Rate field must remain administered c The idle codeinthe Idle Code MSB 1 LSB 8 field must remain administered d The data in the Line Coding field must remain administered 4 Fora Tl site proceed to
81. R8r 555 233 115 Index E earthquake front plate 3 50 earthquake protection cabinet clip 3 51 electromagnetic shielding 3 50 English day names table of 1 19 2 18 4 14 5 38 5 69 5 108 English month names table of 1 20 2 18 4 14 5 39 5 70 5 109 EPN TDM LAN connections 6 103 6 116 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability 6 139 TDM LAN connections for high reliability 6 138 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability 6 138 EPN cabinet installation 6 22 EPN1 fiber optic connections 3 24 EPN2 fiber optic connections 3 25 3 26 expansion control cabinet circuit pack locations 3 14 F fiber single mode 3 27 3 33 Fiber Link Administration for form A 8 to A 19 administration commands A 8 instructions basic fiber link administration A 10 DS1 converter boards A 17 A 18 A 19 DS1C converter boards A 12 A 16 duplicated fiber link administration A 11 PNC duplication 6 37 A 5 A 9 simplex PNC 6 37 A Ae fiber optic cable pass thru fiber optic connections 3 2 4 525 6 center stage switch 3 43 43 through center stage switch 3 41 fiber pass thru kit bracket attachments 6 17 fiber pass thru tool 6 14 fiber remoted port networks single carrier 3 22 3 27 figures 6 89 blank carrier panel 6 134 critical reliability fiber optic connections through center stage switch 6 105 6 120 ICC connections for R7r control carrier 6 91 ICC connections for switch node carrier 6 99 6 1
82. Read This First 5 2 m Task Tables 5 10 a Standard Reliability 5 15 a High Reliability 5 44 m Critical Reliability 9 75 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware 6 1 m Single Mode Fiber Attenuators 6 1 a Add Circuit Packs 6 2 m List of Circuit Packs 6 3 a Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 8 a Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 22 m Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 34 m Add External Modem to EPN 6 41 Issue 1 April 2000 iv DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Contents V a Add DCS Interface 6 42 a Add IP Interface Assembly 6 45 m Add TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunks 6 79 a Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 80 a Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 94 a Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 108 m Add Center Stage Switch 6 123 m Add MCC Port Carriers 6 128 m DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 6 141 a Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU Module 6 142 a Installing a 3150 3170 Channel Service Unit 6 146 A Fiber Link Administration A 1 a Administer Fiber Links A 1 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade B 1 New for Release 8 B 2 m Troubleshooting Guidelines B 7 m Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades B 9 C Access Security Gateway C 1 a Using the ASG Mobile C 2 GL Glossary and Abbreviations GL 1 IN Index IN
83. Related Books The following books are useful for system related information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 System Description Pocket Reference DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8si DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Single Carrier Cabinets DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Upgrades and Additions for R8si DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals AT amp T Network and Data Connectivity Reference BCS Products Security Handbook DEFINITY Wireless Business System Users Guide DEFINITY Wireless Business System Installation and Test Guide DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems System Interface Switch Administration for DEFINITY AUDIX DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administration for Network Connectivity How to Order Books In addition to this book other description installation and test maintenance and administration books are available A complete list of DEFINITY books can be found in the Business Communications System Publications Catalog This book and any other DEFINITY books can be orde
84. Release 8 Administrator s Guide for more information Unadminister Fiber Links Simplex Systems The fiber links routing to and from the EPN cabinet being removed must be unadministered before removing any hardware from the cabinet A CAUTION Failure to unadminister fiber links before removing hardware causes unnecessary alarm reports to INADS and causes errors that are very difficult to clear The fiber links are administered to match hardware and the Fiber Optic Cable Running List Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the endpoint pairs for each link To properly unadminister the fiber links this translation data must be removed 1 Unadminister the TN570 Expansion Interface and the TN574 or TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit packs Type change circuit packs and press Enter Scroll through the screens until the carrier containing the circuit packs is displayed Remove the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit packs from the slot locations on the screen Press Enter when finished 2 Type list fiber and press Enter All administered fiber connections are displayed Make note of which fiber links are to be removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 35 3 Type change fiber link and press Enter The Fiber Link Administration Screen appears Use
85. Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 91 EA va du rae ee es E ICCB P E de davon d 4 SCA T es aca ICCA PX ICCD ICCC TDM LAN CURL SLOT gt 05 04 02 01 00 Figure 6 32 ICC Connections for R8r Control Carrier 15 Install the front trim plate on the B carrier 16 Install the new power units into the B carrier The 631DA1 or 644A is installed on the left side while the 631DB1 or 645B and the 649A are installed on the right side 17 Connect the white power cords to the power units The power cords are equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front of each carrier Install Circuit Packs 1 Install a new UN330B Duplication Interface circuit pack into carrier A Use the decal as a guide 2 Install the new R8r control circuit packs into carrier B Use the new decal provided with the equipment as a guide 3 Install the new TN570B Expansion Interface circuit packs into each port network and if not duplicating a switch node carrier interconnect the port networks with the fiber optic cables 4 For a critical reliability R8r system install a new TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack into an available port slot of each EPN if not already present 5 Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or
86. Software Upgrade For this upgrade a Translation Upgrade Tool TUT is required The translations on the translation card must be copied to tape This procedure must be performed before the upgrade begins 1 Copy the translations in the present system to a spare translation card Type save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation card gt NOTE The off site STS translation upgrade does not preserve the content of recorded announcements Therefore during the upgrade any announcements stored on a TN750 B circuit pack must be re recorded The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in non volatile memory saving the announcements is not needed 2 Mail the translation card to Software Technical Support STS with next day delivery to be converted and written to a Release 8r removable media This process takes several days The new Release 8r software removable media including 1 with translations must be on site before the upgrade begins For each Release 8r processor 2 removable media 1 system and 1 backup must always be retained on site with the system 3 Insert the original translation card back into the present system 4 lf possible the customer should put a freeze on any new translations while the spare tape is being converted If not be sure the customer s switch administrator keeps detailed records of any translation changes m
87. TN787 and TN788 Multimedia Voice Conditioner ports 1 Type display system parameters customer options and press Enter On screen 2 under the Multimedia Call Handling MMCH options check the Basic and Enhanced fields 2 If either the Basic or Enhanced field is y type list configuration all and press Enter to locate all MMI TN787 circuit packs 3 If there are MMI circuit packs type busyout board cabinet carrier slot and press Enter to remove the circuit packs from service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 10 Lock the active SPE H C only 1 Type status spe and press Enter to determine which control carrier is active or observe the control carrier LEDs gt NOTE For high or critical reliability systems we recommend that you replace the circuit packs in the standby carrier first A CAUTION When replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap 2 Move the SPE SELECT switches on both Duplication Interface DUPINT circuit packs one at a time to the active carrier Check the Active Tone Clock H C only 1 Type status port network 1 and verify that the Tone Clock is in the same carrier as the active SPE and that the Service State field shows in gt NOTE This ta
88. TN802B R8 gt NOTE The upgrade takes about 20 minutes 1 Insert the flash disk into the right most slot on the TN802 IP trunk On the monitor a dialog box assigns a drive letter with the removable media designation the default is D 2 Right click on Start Explore to open the Windows NT Exploring pane and select the drive letter indicated in step 1 3 Double click on Medpro and select the Setup icon 4 Follow the Install Shield procedure to transfer all the necessary files to the TN802 IP Interface gt NOTE In the Finish dialog box select I will restart later Do not select Restart computer This would be a good time to read the Readme txt file 5 Click on Start Settings Control Panel Services 6 Select IP Trunk and click on Startup gt NOTE Do not click on Start 7 Under Startup Type select Disabled and click OK to disable IP Trunk mode gt NOTE If IP trunk and MedPro services are both set to automatic the TN802B defaults to IP Trunk and MedPro features cannot be used 8 Select MedPro and click on Startup gt NOTE Do not click on Start 9 Under Startup Type select Automatic and click OK to enable MedPro mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 77 10 Click Start Shut Down and select Restart the computer or on th
89. This cable is for intercabinet cabling only 14 35 5 TN1754 to adjacent TN570 B C expansion interface circuit 847747741 pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 1 Fiber Link Administration This appendix describes the steps required to administer fiber links on G3rV4 and later systems Before starting the administration process verify the following 1 Be sure all fiber optic transceivers and all fiber optic cables are correctly installed on the DS1 and or DS1 converter circuit packs 2 Verify connections to the Lightguide Interconnect Units LIUs or shelves to the fiber multiplexers and to the outside world Refer to Appendix A in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets Administer Fiber Links Administer system fiber link configurations to match the hardware installed and according to the Fiber Optic Cable Running List gt NOTE Fiber link administration interacts with or depends upon other system features that must be administered before it Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the endpoint pairs for each link Endpoints can be m An Expansion Interface El circuit pack m ASwitch Node Interface SNI circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1
90. Type y or nin the CRC field The CRC means Cyclic Redundancy Check This is an error detection algorithm The Line Termination field is display only A 75 75 Ohms or 120 120 Ohms typically displays Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED All Installations 1 3 When the system reset is finished type status port network 2 and press Enter The Port Network Status screen appears Verify that PNC Active is up and that the Service State is in ASpan LED on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack must be on for each active facility administered For example if Facility A and Facility B are administered then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be on yellow The yellow LEDs are on only if no problems were encountered during the administration of hardware Span LEDs associated with non administered facilities C and D in this example should be off Perform a test call if desired DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 5 Administer Fiber Links on Duplex System
91. Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 102 Rear View Rear View Rear View I58890BB Port Carrier J58890BB Port Carrier J58890BB 5 14 13 12 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 20 19 15 14 13 12 i 000000000 a i T To Cabinet 2 Sd i i eae diol vse ond To Cabinet 1 B2 ur UIUUUULUU U ODD r2 Bug To Cabinet 2 o pu Dd operi qi Tocant Fro AL A2 To Cabinet 3 To Cabinet 1 A A2 lt To Cabinet 3 ho fon zN E a a N a E rM RE AUR e HDD Y AN I Fan Fan I Fan I Fan Fan y I Fan To Cabinet 1 Re Lo X Port Carrier J58890BB Port Carrier J58890BB 2019 1817 16 15 141912 11109 8 7 8 8 4 22 1 20 9 1817 16 154 10012109 8 7 8 8 4822 1 Port Carrier J58890BB Port Carrier J58890BB Port Carrier J58890BB e Fiii DA HA Power Distributi Power Distributi Power Distributi Unit Unit Unit Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Cabinet 3 PPN EPN 1 EPN2 Figure 5 32 Critical Reliability Release 8 with 2 or 3 Port Networks DEF
92. Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 116 9 Also for the PPN connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and D carriers to the other pin field block marked TDM LAN on the right side of the D carrier See Figure 6 41 and Table 6 10 The other end remained connected to the A carrier when the old carrier was removed TDM LAN BUS TERMINATOR ZAHF4 x SEE NOTE SLOT 21 I I J58890BB C POSITION PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE 7 WP91716 L6 CCB ICCA SLOT 21 ia gt l J58890BB B POSITION SEE NOTE PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE INTERCARRIER WP91716L6 7 CABLES A AND B H600 204 G1 SLOT l J58890AF 1 A POSITION EXPANSION CONTROL ICCB ICCA CARRIER TDM LAN BUS Aj TERMINATOR J58890SA ZAHF4 D POSITION SLOT 01 SWITCH NODE CARRIER SLOT 01 j J58890SA 1 E POSITION SWITCH NODE CARRIER REAR VIEW NOTE ON PORT CARRIER J68890BB 1 CONNECT TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02 ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB 2 AND 3 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 1 Figure 6 41 TDM LAN Connections for Critical Reliability R8r EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and A
93. adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 10 Cabinet Preparation 1 Open the front door gt NOTE Administration may be required before removing the circuit pack in the following step Determine which slot 1 or 2 will contain the new fiber optic circuit pack Remove the circuit pack or the blanking plate from this slot gt NOTE If a circuit pack is removed from the required slot it must be installed into a different slot in the cabinet All translations associated with this circuit pack must also be moved Remove the circuit pack or the blanking plate from the slot next to the slot determined in step 2 Two consecutive open slots are required to install the fiber optic adapter gt NOTE If a circuit pack was removed in step 3 it will be replaced into the same slot later in this section Install the new circuit pack 5 Open the rear door From the rear remove the I O cable connector associated with the slot that will contain the new fiber optic circuit pack See Figure 6 2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for
94. and press Enter to backup all changed files 2 Type test stored data long and press Enter This instructs the system to verify the consistency of the MSS files on the disk and removable media Return Replaced Equipment Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Single Mode Fiber Attenuators Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Issue 1 April 2000 6 1 This chapter contains information to add or remove cabinet hardware To install adjunct or peripheral equipment refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals To add fiber optic cables to an existing system refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets Single Mode Fiber Attenuators Attenuators may be required when using single mode fiber See the table below 106060718 5 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection 106060734 10 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection 106061021 15 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection A different value attenuator may be required even though the fiber span is between the same 2 cabinets local and r
95. automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add Center Stage Switch 6 123 Add Center Stage Switch Because of the numerous installation possibilities for center stage switches this section is intended to provide general installation procedures only For exact requirements per site contact your Lucent Technologies representative The center stage switch CSS is comprised of 1 2 or 3 switch nodes SNs Each SN consists of a switch node carrier SNC or 2 SNCs for high reliability Each SNC supports up to 16 switch node interface SNI circuit packs and up to 16 EPNs Connections between the CSS and PNs and between SNs within the CSS are generally made with fiber optic links Figure 6 44 shows 1 switch node used as a center stage switch for 11 EPNs cydfpbx3 RPY 081897 Figure Notes 1 Switch Node 1 3 EPN Cabinet 1 2 PPN Cabinet 4 EPN Cabinet 11 Figure 6 44 Single Switch Node CSS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add Center Stage Switch 6 124 Figure 6 45 shows 2 SNs used as a CSS for up to 23 EPNs Use this configuration when high inter SN traffic is expected cydfpbx1 RPY 081897
96. be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces RS 232C RS 449 and V 35 to customer provided data terminal equipment DTE See also processor data module PDM modular trunk data module MTDM A trunk data module that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces RS 232 RS 449 and V 35 to customer provided data terminal equipment modulator demodulator See modem monitored call See active notification call MOS Message oriented signaling MPDM Modular processor data module MS Message server ms Millisecond MS T Main satellite tributary MSA Message servicing adjunct DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 34 MSG Message service MSL Material stocking location MSM Modular System Management MSS Mass storage system MSSNET Mass storage network control MT Management terminal MTDM Modular trunk data module MTP Maintenance tape processor MTT Multitasking terminal multiappearance voice terminal A terminal equipped with several call appearance buttons for the same extension allowing the user to handle more than one call on that same extension at the same time Multicarrier cabinet A structure that holds one to five carriers See also single carrier cabinet Multifrequency Compelled MFC Release 2 R2 signaling A signal consisting of two frequency co
97. be removed for service Power Up the AUDIX System m If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet 1 Re install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors m If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the cabinet 1 Power up the cabinet The AUDIX reboots automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors m If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered down 1 At the AUDIX console hold the crti key and type cc 2 Type 5 at the prompt In about 2 minutes the AUDIX boots up 3 When the system initialization is complete log in as craft 4 Check for AUDIX System errors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU Module 6 142 Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU Module The integrated channel service unit ICSU is a combination of a 120A CSU module integrated with a DS1 circuit pack Use this device with the 700A DS1 loopback jack when testing the DS1 span Checking for required components The integrated channel service unit ICSU package contains 120A CSU module m Cable H600 383 4 pair modular cord Group 2 50 Foot 15 2 m cable standard m Cord DW8A DE 4 pair modular cord to alarm contacts DSi circuit pack The basic ICSU requires a TN474E or TN
98. by the Electronic Industries Association EIA RS 232C transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet RS 449 Recommended Standard 449 RSC Regional Support Center ROSE See Remote Operations Service Element ROSE S S1 The first logical signalling channel of DCP The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP s I1 channel S2 The second logical signaling channel of DCP The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP s I2 channel SABM Set Asynchronous Balance Mode SAC Send All Calls SAKI See sanity and control interface SAKI sanity and control interface SAKI A custom VLSI microchip located on each port circuit pack The SAKI provides address recognition buffering and synchronization between the angel and the five control time slots that make up the control channel The SAKI also scans and collects status information for the angel on its port circuit pack and when polled transmits this information to the archangel SAT System access terminal SCC 1 See single carrier cabinet 2 Serial communications controller DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 44 SCD Switch control driver SCI Switch communications interface SCO System control office SCOTCH Switch Conferencing for TDM Bus in Conc
99. cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 5 Behind port carrier B of each EPN cabinet a Install a lightwave transceiver on slot B02 b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability REAR VIEW PORT CARRIER J58890BB 2019 18 1716 15 14131211109 8 7654321 Issue 1 April 2000 6 120 REAR VIEW PORT CARRIER J58890BB 2019 18 17 16 15 14 131211109 8 7654321 PORT CARRIER J58890BB 2019 18 17 16 15 14 131211109 8 765432 CONTROL CARRIER J58890AP CLOCK AUX TERMINAL TO CABINET 1 D3 D20 BOTH CONNECTIONS FROM EACH CONTROL CARRIER J58890AP EPN MUST GO TO THE SAME CLOCK AUX TERMINAL SLOT NUMBER E G EPN CABINET 2 2A TO IE3 AND A nn AND CABINET 2 2B2 TO 1D3 EXPANSION CONTROL CARRIER J58890AF 1918 171615 14 131211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1AUX TERM A
100. carton should contain the following for each IP Interface ordered Table 6 6 Required Hardware Comcode Code Description Quantity J58890MA 1 L30 TN802B IP Interface Assembly 1 601939804 H600 512 G1 external cable assembly 1 407633999 U S Robotics Sportster external 1 modem model number USR 33 6 EXT U S customers only 601087091 20 ft DB 25 serial cable from modem 1 to TN802B external cable assembly U S customers only 1 For non U S customers you need a modem comparable to the U S Robotics Sportster and a serial cable The TN802B external cable assembly is a bundle of cables with an amphenol connector at the end of the bundle and various PC type connectors VGA Universal Serial Bus USB mouse keyboard Ethernet modem and COM at the ends of the individual cables See Figure 6 24 Look for the label where the bundle enters the amphenol connector DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 58 m VV 99 9 9 9 9 9 cbdfocto AWF 122398 Figure Notes 1 Amphenol connector to connector 5 To mouse corresponding to TN802B slot 6 To ethernet 2 To VGA monitor 3 To USB not used 4 To keyboard 7 25 pin male connector to modem 8 25 pin male connector to COM2 Figure 6 24 TN802B IP Interface External Cable Assembly
101. clear amw all extension and press Enter This clears the message waiting lamp for the specified extension 2 Repeat the command for each extension with a lit message waiting lamp DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add External Modem to EPN 6 41 Add External Modem to EPN U S Robotics Model USR 33 6 EXT External Modem 9 WN EA J cydfepnm KLC 100397 Figure Notes 1 U S Robotics External Modem 3 Expansion Port Network 2 RS 232 Cable Figure 6 18 Connect External Modem to EPN 1 Connect an RS 232 cable to the modem See Figure 6 18 gt NOTE In the following steps a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 may be substituted for the dumb terminal Use the Hyperterminal terminal emulation application 2 Connect the opposite end of the RS 232 cable to a dumb terminal 3 Set the dumb terminal to full duplex mode 4 Type AT amp N6 to set the baud rate to 9600 gt NOTE The modem connects at 9600 baud but throughput is at 1200 baud 5 Type AT amp WO to save the setting into non volatile RAM 6 Set Switch 5 to the OFF up position to disable auto answer 7 Disconnect the RS 232 cable from the terminal and connect it to the TERMINAL connector on the rear of the system cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Ser
102. coil either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet 9 LUMI NNN oe ZUM WSK _ Ms Dn UI SS PEST E PEEST PEERS aT AT NS W KZ U U cadfo20 PDH 101096 L Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 4 From Cabinet 3 A1 to Cabinet 1 C2 2 Cabinet Stack 2 EPN 1 5 From Cabinet 2 A2 to Cabinet 3 A2 3 Cabinet Stack 3 EPN 2 6 From Cabinet 1 B2 to Cabinet 2 A1 Figure 3 6 Standard Reliability Release 8r with 2 or 3 Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 25 cydff05 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02 5 TX Connector 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 6 RX Connector Cabinet Stack 2 Figure 3 7 Typical Fiber Optic Connections For 1 or 2 Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind port carrier B of the multicarrier PPN See Figure 3 6 and Figure 3 8 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1B02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect a fiber optic cable to the tran
103. com mon carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 or contact your local Lucent representative Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15 Class A Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a resi dential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Part 68 Network Registration Number This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of the FCC Rules It is identi fied by FCC registration number AS593M 13283 MF E Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operate
104. contact Log into your communications package window as either init inads or craft Instead of a password prompt a seven digit challenge number appears in the window of your communications package Move to the ASG Mobile V1 1 Authentication window 8 Type the 10 digit Product ID in the Equipment ID field The default ID is 10 11 12 13 14 10 zeros 0000000000 Type init inads or craft in the Equipment Login field The craft login ID is the default Type the challenge number from your communications package window into the Challenge field Do not use the character Type the trouble ticket number in the Ticket Number field If there is no ticket number you can use this field as a one word comment field or leave it blank Click the Start button The Activity Status field displays Started and the Response field displays a new seven digit number Move to your communications package window Type the new seven digit response number in the Response field Do not use the character DEFINITY ECS verifies the response If correct DEFINITY logs you on If the response is incorrect return to step 1 If this is the third rejection see the maintenance book for your system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 1 Glossary and Abbreviations Numerics 800 s
105. fiber connection For each connection install one 9823 type lightwave transceiver in an EPN and 1 in the PPN A 9823 type transceiver can be reused from each upgraded G2 universal module Additional transceivers also ship loose with the EPN equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability Required Tools 5 45 The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade High intensity flashlight or AC drop light 3 8 inch flat blade screwdriver with a 10 inch shank minimum 5 16 inch and 1 4 inch sockets with a ratchet and 10 inch extension Long nose pliers to disconnect ground straps and straighten backplane pins Static proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit packs Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the rear of cabinets Twelve spare 12 and 10 self tapping screws Four spare carrier ground straps Wrist ground strap Repair kit for backplane pins KS 22876 L2 or equivalent One copy of each of the following manuals DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Aaministrator s Guide Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance Follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the system to be upgraded For information about the pr
106. for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 7 T1 Installations Only 1 2 The Framing Mode field is display only and shows the hardware setting The DS1CONV 1 Line Compensation and the DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation fields are display only and show the hardware setting Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED E1 Installations Only 1 Type y or nin the CRC field The CRC means Cyclic Redundancy Check This is an error detection algorithm The Line Termination field is display only A 75 75 Ohms or 120 120 Ohms typically displays Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED All Installations 1 3 When the system reset is finished type status port network 2 and press Enter The Port Network Status screen appears Verify that PNC Active is up and that the Service State is
107. from the PPN to the EPN cabinet If a DEFINITY style PPN cabinet is collocated with another DEFINITY style EPN cabinet route the cables up the cable tray and out the top of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the other cabinet through the top of the cabinet and down the cable tray to the desired carrier level If a DEFINITY style PPN cabinet is collocated with either a small cabinet medium cabinet or single carrier cabinet stack route the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 92 Fiber Remoted Port Networks For a critical reliability system with 1 fiber remoted EPN use 4 fiber optic cables 4 lightwave transceivers and 4 lightguide interconnect units provided by the PSC For a critical reliability system with 2 fiber remoted EPNs use 12 fiber optic cables 12 lightwave transceivers and 12 lightguide interconnect units provided by the PSC For fiber remoted cabinets route the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the cabinet to the MDF to the lightguide interconnect units For Either 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 see Figu
108. from the rear of the system Retain any cables that can be reused with the Release 8r cabinet 3 Remove the AC power cord from the system 4 Remove the ground wires from the system If the wires can reach the Release 8r cabinet retain them for connection to the Release 8r system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 GS8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Install the Release 8r Cabinets 4 11 Install the Release 8r Cabinets Unpack and Install the Release 8r Cabinet 1 Refer to the installation instructions in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets A CAUTION Do not power up the Release 8r system 2 Return to this section when the installation of the Release 8r is completed Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire 1 If the Release 8r is being installed while the present system is in service a Connect a 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm wire either to pin 49 of the connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel associated with the emergency transfer panel b Route the other end of the wire to an approved ground and connect 2 If the present system was removed to make room for the Release 8r cabinet a Disconnect the 10 AWG 425 2 6 mm wire installed earlier from the connecting block or pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel Power Up the Release 8r
109. in Cabinet 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 2A01 Connect a 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 4E20 Connect the 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier position E in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa At the rear of the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 3 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 3A01 Connect a 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 3 4E03 Connect the 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier position E in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in position A in Cabinet 3 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 3B02 Connect a 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the trans
110. is completed log in as craft at the Login prompt init login administration 1 Log inas init 2 Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set 3 Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade 4 Type change system parameters offer options and press Enter 5 Ifthe Activate Offer field is n set it to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know whether you need to save translations and reboot to make the change permanent 6 Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes 7 Contact the requester when done DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 113 Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto disk If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade the following error message displays when logging in Ah WARNING Translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately gt NOTE The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears See Troubleshooting an Upgrade on page B 1 Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk
111. is positioned on the Minute field Type current minute 0 through 59 Seconds cannot be set 8 Type standard or daylight savings in the Type field 9 Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rule field 10 Press Enter when the information is correct 11 Type display time and press Enter to verify date time data DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 71 Set Additional Administration 1 Type list configuration software version long and press Enter to compare the version number of the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 software program with the version number written on a label on the processor s faceplate If the version numbers are not the same change the version number on the processor label so that they agree 2 Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter Use this screen to enable the Release 8 option and to assign the customer s other right to use options on the G2 to DEFINITY ECS Release 8 upgrade order See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide for details on enabling these options 3 Type change site data and press Enter Use this screen to assign system specific information such as building floor stations and so forth 4 Type status system 1 and press Enter to verify the system is in the active standby mode 5 Typ
112. its backplane connectors Power Down Present System A CAUTION Powering down the PPN will cause important system data such as BCMS data records of queued ACD calls Automatic Wakeup requests and Do Not Disturb requests to be lost Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar for information about preparing the system for a power down 1 At the PPN cabinet power supply set the main circuit breaker to OFF Install Emergency Transfer Ground Wire A CAUTION To avoid contaminating single point ground do not connect the ground strap while the system is powered up 1 Connect a 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm wire either to pin 49 of the connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel associated with the emergency transfer panel 2 Route the other end of the wire to an approved ground and connect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Remove the Present System 4 10 Disconnect Power and Ground 1 Disconnect the cabinet power cords from the rear of the cabinet 2 Disconnect the 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm coupled bonding conductor wire 3 Disconnect the 6 AWG 40 4 1 mm CABINET GROUND wire from the ground bar in the cabinet Remove the Present System 1 Disconnect the management terminal from the TERM connector 2 Remove all of the 25 pair cables
113. log in as craft 4 Check for AUDIX System errors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Single Mode Fiber Attenuators Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN April 2000 5 1 This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade a DEFINITY G2 universal module to a multicarrier EPN of a R8r system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide lists Release 8 features and functions and provides the commands procedures and forms to initialize and administer the system Single Mode Fiber Attenuators Attenuators may be required when using single mode fiber See the table below 106060718 5 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection 106060734 10 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection 106061021 15 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection A different value attenuator may be required even though the fiber span is between the same 2 cabinets local and remote cabinet Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets for detailed fiber attenuator information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 2 Read This First Service Interruption The upgrade
114. must be up 4 Connect power connector here Figure 6 21 External Modem Connections for U S Robotics Modem DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 50 Table 6 5 U S Robotics Modem Dip Switch Settings Dip Switch Setting Description 1 UP Data Terminal Ready normal DOWN Data Terminal Ready override 2 UP Verbal result codes DOWN Numeric result codes 3 UP Suppress result codes DOWN Display result codes 4 UP Echo offline commands DOWN No echo offline commands 5 UP Auto answer on first ring or higher if specified in NVRAM DOWN Auto answer off 6 UP Carrier detect normal DOWN Carrier detect override 7 UP Load NVRAM defaults DOWN Load factory defaults 8 UP Dumb mode DOWN Smart mode Connect the Ethernet 1 Connect the network cable to the ETHERNET connector on the TN802B external cable assembly gt NOTE You need a CAT5 or better cable for 100 Mbyte operation Install the Circuit Packs A CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap gt NOTE The TN799B and TN802B circuit packs are hot swappable so you do not need to power down the carrier to install them If you need to remove the TN802B IP Interface from the carrier at a later
115. on the other transceiver and vice versa Atthe rear of the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 1D02 Connect a 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 4D02 Connect the 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 2B02 Connect a 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 4D20 Connect the 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier position D in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 32 14 Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in position A
116. optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2B02 Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 100 For Two Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to th
117. or service node Also called access trunk access trunk See access tie trunk ACCUNET A trademarked name for a family of digital services offered by AT amp T in the United States ACD See Automatic Call Distribution ACD ACD also refers to a work state in which an agent is on an ACD call ACD work mode See work mode active notification association A link that is initiated by an adjunct allowing it to receive event reports for a specific switch entity such as an outgoing call active notification call A call for which event reports are sent over an active notification association communication channel to the adjunct Sometimes referred to as a monitored call active notification domain VDN or ACD split extension for which event notification has been requested ACU See Automatic calling unit ACU AD See Abbreviated Dialing AD ADAP AUDIX Data Acquisition Package ADC See analog to digital converter ADC adjunct A processor that does one or more tasks for another processor and that is optional in the configuration of the other processor See also application adjunct control association A relationship initiated by an application via Third Party Make Call the Third Party Take Control or Domain Station Control capabilities to set up calls and control calls already in progress adjunct controlled call Call that can be controlled using an adjunct control association Call must have been origina
118. press Enter Change the Enable operation of PNC duplication field to yes Press Enter Type status pnc and press Enter Verify the Duplicated field is yes Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar Ifthe Alarm Origination Activated field administration that you previously noted is already set to y be sure to enable Alarm Origination Otherwise you do not need to enable Alarm Origination proceed to the next section Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter The name of the Alarm Origination Activated field was changed to Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers to support more than 1 OSS Type first only in this field to enable Alarm Origination to the first OSS which should be INADS Be sure to type y in both Cleared Alarm Notificationand Restart Notification fields if they are not enabled already Press Enter Type save translation spe a or both disk and press Enter If you have lost the previous administration of the A1arm Origination field you may register the system again with the INADS Database Administrator at the TSC The INADS Administrator enables Alarm Origination as part of the registration process Ah WARNING If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the switch will not report any alarm to the TSC
119. refer to the ITAC s Tech Alert from your regional distributor Contact Network Technicians Contact the technician for each public and private network accessed by the system before the upgrade begins Otherwise it is possible that network access trunk facilities will be busied out at the far end Required Tools The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade 1 4 inch flat blade screwdriver 1 4 inch socket with ratchet optional Long nose pliers to straighten backplane pins Static proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit packs Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the rear of cabinets One dozen 8 self tapping screws Repair kit for backplane pins KS 22876 L2 or equivalent One copy of each of the following manuals DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 GS8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Task Tables 4 4 Task Tables Table 4 1 provides the high level tasks to perform the upgrade in this chapter Table 4 1 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r V Task Description Page Software U
120. request an init login so the right to use options can be enabled To use Access Security Gateway ASG see Appendix C Access Security Gateway DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 107 Set Daylight Savings Rules You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules If you have cabinets in several different time zones you can set up rules for each on a location basis A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight savings time It also specifies the increment at which to transition gt NOTE The default daylight savings rule is 0 no daylight savings 1 Type change daylight savings rules and press Enter a DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES ON Rule Change Day Month Date Time Increment 0 No Daylight Savings 1 Start first Sunday on or after April 1 at 2 0001 00 Stop first Sunday on or after October 25 at 2 00 2 Start first on or after at H Stop first on or after at 33 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 4 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 5s Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 6 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 72 Start first on or after at A e Stop first on or after
121. right side of the expansion control cabinet as shown in Figure 3 3 b Install the AHF110 TDM LAN bus terminator on the top port cabinet at the end of the daisy chain of the bus DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 April 2000 3 19 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r E Ir 9 UH WWW E mj AU SS a 9 UU SS 1000000 SNR Figure Notes died 1 AHF110 TDM LAN Bus Terminator 6 Slot 18 2 Slot 17 7 J58890H Port Cabinet D 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L3 Position 4 Slot 00 5 Slot 03 Position 8 J58890H Port Cabinet C 9 J58890H Port Cabinet B Position 10 J58890NExpansion Control Cabinet A Position Figure 3 3 TDM LAN Connections for Release 5 6si EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 20 Connect TDM LAN Cables and ICC Cables 1 Route and connect the TDM LAN cables If any of the Release 5 6si port cabinets b
122. right most slot of installed port carrier as follows a Set the circuit breaker on the power unit to be added to OFF b Move locking slide on power unit to its leftmost position and open the lever c Align and slide the power unit into slot in the carrier until some resistance is felt d Lift the locking lever upward until it latches e Move the locking slide on power unit to its rightmost position f Connect a power cord inside the cabinet to the outlet on the power unit g Set the circuit breaker on the power unit to ON 11 Install a TN736 power converter in the slot next to the 631AR power converter or a TN752 power converter in the slot next to the 631WA1 power converter on the left side of the carrier gt NOTE The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 power unit is used in the J58890B 2 or J58890B 3 port carriers It is required in the J58890B 1 port carrier regardless of which 631 power unit is provided Use the TN752 or TN755B if the system is equipped with neon message waiting 12 Install the port circuit packs in the carrier 18 Connect the AC DC power cords located inside the cabinet to the power units 14 Install the rear panels around the port carrier 15 Install cables from the port carrier to the MDF 16 Install the cable access panel as required Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors in the carrier Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX Syst
123. software and hardware to record call data same as CDRU Call Detail Recording utility CDRU Software that collects stores optionally filters and outputs call detail records Call Management System CMS An application running on an adjunct processor that collects information from an ACD unit CMS enables customers to monitor and manage telemarketing centers by generating reports on the status of agents splits trunks trunk groups vectors and VDNs and enables customers to partially administer the ACD feature for a communications system call reference value CRV An identifier present in ISDN messages that associates a related sequence of messages In ASAI CRVs distinguish between associations call vector A set of up to 15 vector commands to be performed for an incoming or internal call callback call A call that automatically returns to a voice terminal user who activated the Automatic Callback or Ringback Queuing feature call waiting ringback tone A low pitched tone identical to ringback tone except that the tone decreases in the last 0 2 seconds in the United States Call waiting ringback tone notifies the attendant that the Attendant Call Waiting feature is activated and that the called party is aware of the waiting call Tones in international countries may sound different call work code A number up to 16 digits entered by ACD agents to record the occurrence of customer defined events such as account codes socia
124. straps were left connected to the C carrier For an AC powered system install the 2 new carrier ground straps One strap connects ground point 1 to the A carrier frame right side and the other connects ground point 8 to the A carrier frame left side gt NOTE DC powered carriers do not use these carrier ground straps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 9 10 11 5 52 Connect the remaining end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and D carriers to the pin field block marked TDM on the right side of the A carrier See Figure 5 13 and Table 5 11 The other end remained connected to the D carrier when the old carrier was removed Connect the remaining end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and C carriers to the pin field block marked TDM on the left side of the A carrier The other end remained connected to the C carrier when the old carrier was removed On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to Slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TDM cables to Slot 01 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 53 919 ii LUU WWW
125. take place Verify System Status 1 Before proceeding examine the system for alarms and correct all problems The system must be alarm free Disable Alarm Origination 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Make anote of the Alarm Origination Activated field administration If the feature is enabled type n in this field to disable Alarm Origination Ah WARNING If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the switch the switch may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble lickets gt NOTE For some releases of the software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields before submitting the form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 95 Save Translations Log in at the management terminal Type save translation disk and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the disk If the system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed type list configuration software version and press Enter Check screen 2 to find out when the announcements were last saved Save th
126. the cable connector at slot 1A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m At the top of the cabinet coil the surplus of fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 58 For Two Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connecta fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to t
127. the call asynchronous data transmission A method of transmitting data in which each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit thus permitting data characters to be transmitted at irregular intervals This type transmission is advantageous when transmission is not regular characters typed at a keyboard Also called asynchronous transmission See also synchronous data transmission asynchronous data unit ADU A device that allows direct connection between RS 232C equipment and a digital switch asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM A packet like switching technology in which data is transmitted in fixed size 53 byte cells ATM provides high speed access for data communication in LAN campus and WAN environments ATB See All trunks busy ATB ATD See Attention dial ATD attendant A person at a console who provides personalized service for incoming callers and voice services users by performing switching and signaling operations See also attendant console DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 6 ATM See asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM attendant console The workstation used by an attendant The attendant console allows the attendant to originate a call answer an incoming call transfer a call to another extension or trunk put a call on hold and remove a call from hold Attendants
128. the carrier in position A by aligning the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips support the carrier while installing the screws Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self tapping screws saved from the removal of the old carrier gt NOTE Carefully realign the threads on the self tapping screws by turning them counterclockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the threads out of the framework Connect the P2 and P1 cables to the A carrier See Figure 5 3 Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made Connect the 8 ground straps from the C carrier to the new A carrier See Figure 5 2 Connect the 8 ground straps from the D carrier to the new A carrier 6 For AC powered systems install the 2 new ground straps One strap connects ground point 1 to the A carrier frame right side and the other connects ground point 8 to the A carrier frame left side gt NOTE DC powered systems do not use these carrier ground straps Connect the remaining end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and D carriers to the pin field block marked TDM on the right side of the A carrier See Figure 5 4 and Table 5 7 Connect the remaining end of the TD
129. the control cabinet to be upgraded prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down A CAUTION Make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system A WARNING a A Oo I Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway See the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu Select Shutdown from the Heset System menu Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 110 Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 Shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down Refer to DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures on page 6 141 Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk 2 Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors Power Down System 1 At the PPN set the main circuit break
130. the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 5 Behind port cabinet B of each single carrier EPN a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot B02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot B02 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and place the coil either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 44 9 MUUMMU Ws SS AU SS A NS DIDI dee EEE TP SN LOTS S uU X EAE IB SU VAI CA Xo cad 010 KLC 112996 6 l V I Figure Notes 1
131. the holes at the bottom of the upper cabinet and insert the 4 screws Do not tighten the screws yet See Figure 3 17 2 Atthe front of the cabinets align the holes in the bottom of the front ground plate with the holes at the top of the lower cabinet Insert the 4 supplied 12 24 x 1 2 inch 1 27 cm thread forming screws Do not tighten the screws yet 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all stacked cabinets are fastened together 4 Tighten all screws securely grdpltec LJK 031096 Figure Notes 1 Front Ground Plate or Cabinet Clip 3 Rear Ground Plate 2 Battery Figure 3 17 Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Cabinet Clip Side View DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 51 Install Cabinet Clips Systems without Earthquake Protection A cabinet clip is required between each pair of stacked cabinets 1 Atthe front of the cabinets install a cabinet clip between each pair of cabinets by hooking the clip into the slot of the upper cabinet and snapping the straight leg of the clip into the slot on the lower cabinet See Figure 3 18 A scdfep2 KLC 101596 Figure Notes 1 Control Cabinet 4 Port Cabinet 2 Port Cabinet or Expansion Control Ca
132. the local area code that must be dialed to call outside the local geographical area DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 24 FRL Facilities Restriction Level FX Foreign exchange G G3 MA Generic 3 Management Applications G3 MT Generic 3 Management Terminal G3r Generic 3 RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer generalized route selection GRS An enhancement to Automatic Alternate Routing Automatic Route Selection AAR ARS that performs routing based on call attributes such as Bearer Capability Classes BCCs in addition to the address and facilities restriction level FRL thus facilitating a Uniform Dial Plan UDP that is independent of the type of call being placed glare The simultaneous seizure of a 2 way trunk by two communications systems resulting in a standoff GM Group manager GPTR General purpose tone receiver grade of service The number of call attempts that fail to receive service immediately Grade of service is also expressed as the quantity of all calls that are blocked or delayed ground start trunk A trunk on which for outgoing calls the system transmits a request for services to a distant switching system by grounding the trunk ring lead To receive the digits of the called number that System grounds the trunk tip lead When the system detects this ground the digits are sent
133. the state of the light lit flashing fluttering broken flutter or unlit stroke counts A method used by ACD agents to record up to nine customer defined events per call when CMS is active SVN Security violation notification switch Any kind of telephone switching system See also communications system switchhook The buttons located under the receiver on a voice terminal switch node SN carrier A carrier containing a single switch node power units and optionally one or two DS1 converter circuit packs An SN carrier is located in a center stage switch switch node SN clock The circuit pack in an SN carrier that provides clock and maintenance alarm functions and environmental monitors switch node interface SNI The basic building block of a switch node An SNI circuit pack controls the routing of circuit packet and control messages switch node link SNL The hardware that provides a bridge between two or more switch nodes The SNL consists of the two SNI circuit packs residing on the switch nodes and the hardware connecting the SNIs This hardware can include lightwave transceivers that convert the SNI s electrical signals to light signals the copper wire that connects the SNIs to the lightwave transceivers a full duplex fiber optic cable DS1 converter circuit cards and DS1 facilities if a company does not have rights to lay cable and appropriate connectors switch processing element SPE A complex of ci
134. the upgrade begins Table 3 2 Required Hardware Equipment Description Quantity J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet 1 106647985 TN775B Maintenance circuit pack 1 103281788 TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack Depends on reliability type and number of PNs 103281812 TN573B Switched Node Interface circuit pack Depends on reliability type and number of PNs 407439975 or 20 Foot Multi Mode Fiber Optic Cable 1 to 12 407598325 20 Foot Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable 106455348 or 9823 A Lightwave Transceiver 2 to 12 106455363 or 9823 B Lightwave Transceiver 2 to 12 107731853 300A Lightwave Transceiver 2 to 12 J58890to O L1 Release 8 Removable Media 2 or 4 106689516 TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack 1 or 24 846307817 Lower Rear Cover 15 846307809 Ground Plate 1 H600 248 G1 ICC Cables 26 846408268 Earthquake Front Panel earthquake protection only 1 846408386 Earthquake Ground Plate earthquake protection only 1 846408250 Stiffener earthquake protection only 1 846408243 Earthquake Front Mounting Angle earthquake 1 protection only 106060718 5 dB attenuator single mode fiber only 2 for each fiber connection 106060734 10 dB attenuator single mode fiber only 2 for each fiber connection 106061021 15 dB attenuator single mode fiber only 2 for each fiber connection 1 For each fiber connection 1 lightwave transceiver is installed in 1 port network and a like transceiver in the adjacent port network 4E transceivers cannot be re
135. to compare the version number of the Release 8 software program displayed on the terminal with the version number written on a label on the processor s faceplate If the version numbers are not the same change the version number on the processor label so that they agree 2 Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter Use this screen to enable the G3 V6 option and to assign the customer s other right to use options on the Release 8 upgrade order See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide for details on enabling these options 3 Type change site data and press Enter Use this screen to assign system specific information such as building floor stations and so forth 4 Type status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 5 Type save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation cards A WARNING If the terminal screen displays translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately an error was detected in the translations Call your Lucent Technologies representative Close Upgraded EPN Cabinet and Reconnect Cables 1 At the upgraded EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF gt NOTE Powering down an EPN without powering down the PPN will set off alarms However these alarms should clear after power is restored to ea
136. to 1984 kbps using NFAS E1 interfaces NANP North American Numbering Plan narrowband A circuit switched call at a data rate up to and including 64 kbps All nonwideband switch calls are considered narrowband native terminal support A predefined terminal type exists in switch software eliminating the need to alias the terminal that is manually map call appearances and feature buttons onto some other natively supported terminal type NAU Network access unit NCA TSC Noncall associated temporary signaling connection NCOSS Network Control Operations Support Center NCSO National Customer Support Organization NEC National Engineering Center NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NETCON Network control circuit pack network A series of points nodes or stations connected by communications channels network specific facility NSF An information element in an ISDN PRI message that specifies which public network service is used NSF applies only when Call by Call Service Selection is used to access a public network Service network interface A common boundary between two systems in an interconnected group of systems DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 36 NFAS See Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS NI Network interface NID Network Inward Dialing NM Network manageme
137. to run the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier Fiber Remoted Port Networks For a high reliability system with 1 fiber remoted EPN use 2 fiber optic cables 2 lightwave transceivers and 2 lightguide interface units provided by the PSC For a high reliability system with 2 fiber remoted EPNs use 6 fiber optic cables 6 lightwave transceivers and 6 lightwave interface units provided by the PSC DS1 CONV Remoted Port Networks For a high reliability system with 1 DS1 CONV remoted expansion port network use 2 DS1 CONV circuit packs TN1654 2 DS1 CONV to El cables 846448637 and or 846448645 2 H 600 348 cables from 1 to 4 pairs of channel service units CSUs and from 1 to 4 pairs of wall field cables provided with the CSUs gt NOTE The TN1654 requires a TN573B Switch Node Interface circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 28 For a high reliability system with 2 DS1 Conv remoted expansion port networks this arrangement requires m 6 DS1 Converter circuit packs TN1654 m 6 DS1 Converter to El cables 846448637 and or 846448645 m 6 H 600 348 cables m 3 6 9 0r 12 pairs of CSUs m 3 6 9 or 12 pairs of wall field ca
138. too short to reach from the Release 8r cabinet to the Main Distribution Frame MDF If so the cables must be replaced as part of the upgrade process DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Read This First 4 2 Read This First Service Interruption This upgrade process requires a service interruption that depends on whether the Release 8r cabinet can be installed while the present system is in service In this case the service interruption may only be about 2 hours If however the present system must be removed to allow room for the Release 8r cabinet then the service interruption may be 8 hours or more This upgrade must be closely coordinated with the customer and the local account team Call Management System CMS The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade This causes CMS data to be lost This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just after the last CMS measurement interval All measurement data is lost during the upgrade including BCMS If needed the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the conference dropped off the call before the end of the call Customers experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to r3v4ao e or higher Preventing Translati
139. transfer is initiated to a group of telephones capable of making outgoing calls The system operates in this mode until the failure is repaired and the System automatically returns to normal operation Also called power failure transfer EMI Electromagnetic interference end to end signaling The transmission of touch tone signals generated by dialing from a voice terminal to remote computer equipment These digits are sent over the trunk as DTMF digits whether the trunk signaling type is marked as tone or rotary and whether the originating station is tone or rotary Example a call to a voice mail machine or automated attendant service A connection is first established over an outgoing trunk Then additional digits are dialed to transmit information to be processed by the computer equipment enhanced private switched communications service EPSCS An analog private telecommunications network based on the No 5 crossbar and 1A ESS that provides advanced voice and data telecommunications services to companies with many locations EPN Expansion port network EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory EPSCS Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services ERL Echo return loss Erlang A unit of traffic intensity or load used to express the amount of traffic needed to keep one facility busy for one hour One Erlang is equal to 36 CCS See also CCS or hundred call seconds ESF Extended superframe format ESPA European Standard Pag
140. tray DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 93 For 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A01 Connect the other end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m Atthe top of the cabinet coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable tray 3 Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1B02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3B02 m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the
141. tubing come off the 4 corner pins of the pin field block Otherwise when the new equipment is connected 48 volts could short to ground Remove and retain the 8 ground straps from between the A and B carriers See Figure 5 24 Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps from between the A and D carriers These straps will reconnect to the new A carrier Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps from between the B and C carriers These straps will reconnect to the new B carrier Disconnect the P1 small 9 pin connector and the P2 large 38 pin connector from the A carrier See Figure 5 25 Move the cables into a position where they will not interfere with removing the carrier Slide the latch up and disconnect the P1 small 9 pin connector from the B carrier Move the cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier Disconnect and remove the ICC cables See Figure 5 23 They will not be reused Remove the fan trim plate by pulling it straight off Clean or replace the air filter 403326820 if necessary In front of carrier remove the 4 screws top 2 first holding the B carrier to the cabinet frame Use a long handle screwdriver or 5 16 inch socket with a 10 inch extension Behind the carrier remove the 2 screws holding the B carrier s rear connector panel to the cabinet frame DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1
142. using the console can also manage and monitor some system operations Also called console See also attendant Attention dial ATD A command in the Hayes modem command set for asynchronous modems Audio Information Exchange AUDIX A fully integrated voice mail system Can be used with a variety of communications systems to provide call history data such as subscriber identification and reason for redirection AUDIX See Audio Information Exchange AUDIX auto in trunk group Trunk group for which the CO processes all of the digits for an incoming call When a CO seizes a trunk from an auto in trunk group the switch automatically connects the trunk to the destination typically an ACD split where if no agents are available the call goes into a queue in which callers are answered in the order in which they arrive Auto In Work mode One of four agent work modes the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call as soon as the current call is completed Automatic Alternate Routing AAR A feature that routes calls to other than the first choice route when facilities are unavailable Automatic Callback ACB A feature that enables internal callers upon reaching a busy extension to have the system automatically connect and ring both parties when the called party becomes available Automatic Call Distribution ACD A feature that answers calls and then depending on administered instructions delivers messages appro
143. with a 10 inch extension 6 Behind the carrier remove the 2 screws holding the A carrier s rear connector panel to the cabinet frame 7 Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches Be sure that no cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet carrier framework A CAUTION Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the carrier 8 Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet erdfp12 KLC 101596 Figure Notes 1 Rear of Control Carrier 3 P1 Connector 2 P2 Connector Figure 5 3 Location of P1 and P2 Connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 23 Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier 1 Inspect the new J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier for any damage Also verify that the backplane pins are not bent Place the expansion control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up Install the CFY1 current limiter CURL on the A carrier to the pin field block labeled CURL Install the CURL with the components on the left Atthe rear connector panel determine which connectors will have a cable attached and install a 4B cable retainer on each of these connectors Install New Expansion Control Carrier A 1 Install
144. 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 What s New in Release 8 2r vii What s New in Release 82r This is a short list of what changed from Release 7r For more detailed information refer to DEFINITY ECS Release 8 What s New in Release 8 The categories addressed are as follows m Features m Hardware m Tools m Commands screens and fields m Procedures m Upgrade tips wm Cautions and warnings m Product names Features This list provides categorized features available with Release 8 2 For full descriptions see DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Issue 1 0 Change Description Phone features Networking ISDN Public 64 bridged call appearances ATM circuit emulation service CES Abort transfer Feature plus non DID calling via UDP Automatic exclusion Restricted Presentation Circular station hunting Multiple pubnet calling connect numbers system Coverage of calls redirected off net Pass advice of charge to BRI basic rate interface endpoints Group call pick up BellCore calling name ID Long hold recall warning Networking QSIG DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 What s New in Release 8 2r Reset shift call Issue 1 April 2000 viii Call independent signaling connection CISC enhancements Station self display
145. 1 Type display time and press Enter to verify date and time data Set Core Dump Vector 1 Type set vector f spe maint and press Enterto set the core dump vector to perform a core dump on any system restart Enable TTI gt NOTE Do this step only if the TTI is disabled and you want it enabled 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter to change the TTI field back to its value before the upgrade DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 21 Release MMI H C only 1 Type release board cabinet carrier slot and press Enter to release the circuit packs which were busied out earlier Resolve Alarms 1 Type display alarms and press Enter to examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Compare it with the earlier status 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for each link Enable Scheduled Maintenance 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Type the appropriate time in the Scart field to enable scheduled daily maintenance Make sure the Save Translation field is set to daily Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INAD
146. 1 INTERFACE 10 TN799 B CONTROL LAN indicates circuit pack conflict 3 To correct it go to the entry just above the TN802B that says DSMAPD 4 Type MEDPRO and press Enter Changing the one entry automatically changes the entry above it If it is in IP Trunk mode you get the following error message MedPro type requires TN802 with application Type MEDPRO on circuit packs form 5 To complete the administration refer to the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Network Connectivity book DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunks 6 79 Add TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunks The TN2242 Japan 2Mbit trunk interconnects DEFINITY with other vendor equipment in Japan as well as to interconnect other DEFINITY switches through the Time Division Multiplexor device Installation 1 Determine the port assignment of the trunk from the Trunk Group screen EXAMPLE A 07 01 Cabinet Port Carrier Slot Port Network Number Number 2 Install a TN2242 circuit pack in assigned carrier slot 3 Connect the H600 513 cable from the DEFINITY cabinet to the Time Division Multiplexor device 4 To administer forms see the following sections in the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide m For ISDN applications see the ISDN Service section m For non IS
147. 1 facility with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 T1 or 1984 E1 kbps in multiples of 64 kbps HO H11 H12 and N x DSO calls are wideband wideband access endpoint Access endpoints extended with wideband switching to include wideband access endpoints A wideband access endpoint consists of one or more contiguous DSOs on a line side T1 or E1 facility and has an extension The Administered Connections feature provides call control for calls originating from wideband access endpoints wink start tie trunk A trunk with which after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits for a momentary signal wink before sending the digits of the called number Similarly on an incoming call the system sends the wink signal when ready to receive digits work mode One of four states Auto In Manual In ACW AUX Work that an ACD agent can be in Upon logging in an agent enters AUX Work mode To become available to receive ACD calls the agent enters Auto In or Manual In mode To do work associated with a completed ACD call an agent enters ACW mode work state An ACD agent may be a member of up to three different splits Each ACD agent continuously exhibits a work state for every split of which it is a member Valid work states are Avail Unstaffed AUX Work ACW ACD answering an ACD call Extln ExtOut and OtherSpl An agent s work state for a particular split may change for a variety of reasons example
148. 13 location of grounding jumpers 6 85 6 88 6 101 6 115 locations of grounding jumpers 6 98 6 112 6 135 oo Issue 1 April 2000 IN 2 figures continued locations of grounding jumpers small cabinet 6 134 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability EPN 6 103 6 116 6 139 TDM LAN connections for critical reliability PPN 6 117 6 137 TDM LAN connections for high reliability EPN 6 138 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability EPN 6 138 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability PPN 6 136 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability R5r PPN 6 84 front plate 3 50 G G2 MCC Universal Module to R5si m EPN 5 1 ground plate 3 49 ground strap single carrier 3 47 grounding jumpers locations 6 85 6 88 6 98 6 101 6 112 6 115 6 135 locations small cabinet 6 134 H high reliability TDM LAN connections for EPN 6 138 TDM LAN connections for R5r PPN 6 89 I ICC connections for R7r control carrier 6 91 ICC connections for switch node carrier 6 99 6 113 ICSU 6 142 integrated channel service unit 6 142 integration process connecting ITS components 6 49 6 59 ITS to the network 6 50 6 53 6 60 inter cabinet cable see ICC 6 91 Internet Telephony Server connecting components d 6 59 network services changing 6 71 ISDN Gateway 3 5 ISDN interface links Re installing B 12 isolator 3 4 9 5 o D
149. 2 See Figure 6 16 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 4 easier 3 Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 4 Atthe rear of the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a 9823A 10 11 12 13 14 15 lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 4E02 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 2A01 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 4E20 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa At the rear of the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2
150. 2 and 3 respectively of the form m Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of a circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 1 s duplicate along with Endpoint 2 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B PNC link Board Type Display only field showing the type of circuit pack in Endpoint 1 The circuit pack type in Endpoint 1 A PNC and Endpoint 1 B PNC must be the same a DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 1 s duplicate along with Endpoint 2 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B PNC link DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 12 a DS1CONV Board Type Display only field showing the type of DS1 Converter circuit pack in Endpoint 1 The circuit pack type in Endpoint 1 A PNC and Endpoint 1 B PNC must be the same This field is updated via the Change Circuit packs command m Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of a circuit pack in the second endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 2 s duplicate along with Endpoint 1 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber li
151. 2000 For additional documents refer to the section in About This Docu Write Order ment entitled Related Resources You can be placed on a standing order list for this and other documents you may need Standing order will enable you to automatically receive updated versions of individual documents or document sets billed to account information that you provide For more information on stand ing orders or to be put on a list to receive future issues of this docu ment contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center European Union Declaration of Conformity The CE mark affixed to the DEFINITY equipment described in this book indicates that the equipment conforms to the following Euro pean Union EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC Low Voltage 73 23 EEC Telecommunications Terminal Equipment TTE i CTR3 BRI and i CTR4 PRI For more information on standards compliance contact your local dis tributor Comments To comment on this document return the comment card at the front of the document Acknowledgment This document was prepared by Product Documentation Development Lucent Technologies Denver CO DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Contents Contents Contents What s New in Release 8 2r About This Book Offer Categories Security Issues Antistatic Protection Remove In
152. 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 84 9 Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches then from the back be sure that no cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet carrier framework A CAUTION Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the carrier 10 Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet TDM LAN BUS TERMINATOR ZAHF4 SLOT 21 tay SEE NOTE ay J58890BB C PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L6 SLOT 21 SEE NOTE n ial I i IL J58890BB B PORT CARRIER TDM LAN AE WP91716 L6 SLOT 21 SLOT 01 aj e i J58890AP 1 A CONTROL CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L7 SLOT 21 tay SEE NOTE J58890BB D PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CARLE ae TDM LAN BUS WP91716 L6 TERMINATOR SLOT 21 J SEE NOTE ni T4 ZAHF4 i J58890BB E PORT CARRIER REAR VIEW NOTE ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB 1 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02 ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB 2 AND 3 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CABLES TO SLOT 01 Figure 6 28 TDM LAN Connections for Standard Reliability PPN UU LI N ee REE LL NSSSSSSS LLLI o MUS iii
153. 3A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from the PPN Control Carrier to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the EPN Expansion Control Carrier Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on the PPN transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the EPN transceiver and vice versa Direct Connect New EPN to Existing PPN High or Critical Reliability 1 On the rear of the Duplicated Control Carrier install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to the EPN cabinet easier Route the fiber cable to the J58890BB Port Carrier in position C in the EPN cabinet Onthe rear of the Port Carrier install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from the PPN Duplicated Control Carrier to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the EPN Port Carrier Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on the PPN transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the EPN transceiver and Vice versa DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 25 Direct Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and EPN Standard Reliability For the following connection ex
154. 499 Figure Notes 1 Connect analog line here 3 Connect MODEM connector here 2 DIP switch 5 must be up 4 Connect power connector here Figure 6 25 External Modem Connections for U S Robotics Sporster DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 60 Table 6 7 U S Robotics Modem Dip Switch Settings Dip Switch Setting Description 1 UP Data Terminal Ready normal DOWN Data Terminal Ready override 2 UP Verbal result codes DOWN Numeric result codes 3 UP Suppress result codes DOWN Display result codes 4 UP Echo offline commands DOWN No echo offline commands 5 UP Auto answer on first ring or higher if specified in NVRAM DOWN Auto answer off 6 UP Carrier detect normal DOWN Carrier detect override 7 UP Load NVRAM defaults DOWN Load factory defaults 8 UP Dumb mode DOWN Smart mode Connect the Monitor Keyboard and Mouse gt NOTE Only make these connections if administered locally Not necessary if administered remotely You must connect these before inserting the TN802B IP Interface 1 Attach a VGA monitor to the VGA connector of the TN802B IP Interface external cable assembly 2 Attach the keyboard to the KEYBOARD connector of the external cable assembly 3 Attach the mouse to the MOUSE connector of the external cable assembly
155. 5 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 54 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination 2 When administration is completed log in as craft at the Login prompt init login administration le 2 Log in as init Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade Type change system parameters offer options and press Enter Ifthe Activate Offer field is n set it to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know whether you need to save translations and reboot to make the change permanent Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes Contact the requester when done DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5s
156. 7 4 Module Control Carrier A 10 Duplicated Module Control Carrier Position B Position 5 Port Carrier D Position 11 ICCA Cable Slot 03 6 Port Carrier E Position 12 ICCB Cable Figure 5 22 TDM LAN Connections for Duplicated G2 Universal Module DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 82 H Uu HU Uo UH LT 9 LUU N TEEN E er DEA AX TMU OO Icdf002 KLC 033197 Figure Notes 1 Rear of Cabinet 4 Ground Jumpers 2 Module Control Carrier A Position 5 Port Carrier C Position 3 Expansion Module Control Carrier 6 Port Carrier D Position B Position Figure 5 23 Locations of Ground Jumpers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 83 erdfp12 KLC 101596 Figure Notes 1 Rear of Control Carrier 3 P1 Connector 2 P2 Connector Figure 5 24 Location of P1 and P2 Connectors Prepare the New A and B Position Carriers 1 Inspect the new carriers for any damage Verify that the backplane pins are not bent 2 Place the expa
157. 777D or later suffix The enhanced integrated channel service unit requires a TN474F or TN777E or later suffix Installing the 120A CSU See Figure 6 56 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU Module 6 143 9 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 Q A A R 0t 9 icsupic RBP 032896 SS a 1 Rear of carrier containing DS1 circuit pack 4 DW8A DE 4 pair cord to alarm contacts optional 2 120A CSU 5 To 25 pair connector on rear of carrier containing 3 4 pair cord to network interface H600 383 DS1 circuit pack Figure 6 56 120A Channel Service Unit Module A CAUTION Do not plug the 120A into any circuit pack other than a TN474F or TN777E or later release vintage Do not connect the 120A to any interface other than a network smart jack Be sure the DS1 circuit pack is set for 24 channel operation 1 544 Mbps The 120A does not operate with the 32 channel interface A switch on the circuit pack or administration sets this option Ah CAUTION Always wear an anti static wrist strap when installing a 120A module Do not touch the external alarm cable when it is connected to the 120A Static discharge can damage connector terminals and relays 1 Unplug the DS1 circuit pack from its slot 2 Install a 4C retainer in the 50 pin plug associated
158. 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 15 CSM Centralized System Management CSS See center stage switch CSS CSSO Customer Services Support Organization CSU Channel service unit CTS Clear to Send CWC See call work code D DAC 1 Dial access code or Direct Agent Calling 2 See digital to analog converter DAC data channel A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals data communications equipment DCE The equipment usually a modem data module or packet assembler disassembler on the network side of a communications link that makes the binary serial data from the source or transmitter compatible with the communications channel data link The configuration of physical facilities enabling end terminals to communicate directly with each other data module An interconnection device between a BRI or DCP interface of the switch and data terminal equipment or data communications equipment data path The end to end connection used for a data communications link A data path is the combination of all elements of an interprocessor communication in a DCS data port A point of access to a computer that uses trunks or lines for transmitting or receiving data data rate See bit rate data service unit DSU A device that transmits digital data on transmission facilities data terminal An input output I O device
159. 86 Western Europe Middle East South Africa 44 1252 77 4800 Central Eastern Europe 361 345 4334 Central Latin America Caribbean 1 303 804 3778 Australia 61 2 9352 9090 North America INADS Database Administration 1 800 248 1111 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Trademarks Trademarks XXi This document contains references to the following Lucent Technologies trademarked products ACCUNET AUDIX Callmaster CallVisor CONVERSANT DEFINITY FORUM MEGACOM SYSTIMAX TRANSTALK The following products are trademarked by their appropriate vendor Audichron is a registered trademark of Audichron Company LINX is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works Inc Music Mate is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation PagePac is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation Dracon Division Shockwatch is a registered trademark of Media Recovery Incorporated Styrofoam is a registered trademark of Styrofoam Corporation Tiltwatch is a registered trademark of Media Recovery Incorporated Zone Mate is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Standards Compliance xxii Standards Compliance The equipment presented in this book complies with the following standards
160. 890AF EPN Control A 21 02 10 Install the front trim plate on the A carrier Install the fan trim plate 11 Install the power units removed from G2 universal module into the A carrier Do not interchange the physical locations of the units The 631AR1 631WA1 631DA1 or 6444 install in the left side while the 631BR1 631WB1 631DB1 or 645B install in the right side gt NOTE In most cases the new Release 8 carrier will contain the same power supplies as in the existing system However a Release 8 carrier may contain a 649A Power Unit If so re use the power units from the G2 power module 12 If the expansion control carrier contains a 631BR1 631WB1 or 645B power unit install the previously removed TN736 power unit in port slots 18 and 19 of the carrier adjacent to the 631BR1 631WB1 or 645B If the system is equipped for neon message waiting a TN752 or TN755 power unit must be used gt NOTE The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 or 645B power unit is used in the J58890AF 1 expansion control carrier or the J58890BB 2 or J58890BB 3 port carriers It is required in the J58890BB 1 port carrier regardless of which 631 power unit is provided Use the TN752 or TN755 if the system contains neon message waiting 13 Connect the white power cords to the power units DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Mu
161. A Lightwave Transceiver Connect the remaining end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager 3 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect the remaining end of the cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide in
162. AMES Name IP Address Name IP Address clan al 192 168 1 31 clan bl 192 168 2 31 default O O 30 0 med al 192 1 68 12 91 4 Type change circuit pack and press Enter 5 Check the Code column to see if the slots above the TN802B say DSMAPD or MEDPRO DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly Issue 1 April 2000 6 54 s circuit packs Cabinet 1 CIRCUIT PACKS Slot Code Sf Mode Name 01 TN754 DIGITAL LINE 02 TN758 POOLED MODEM 03 TN2144 ANALOG LINE 04 TN746 B ANALOG LINE 05 06 TN77 C MAINTENANCE TEST 07 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 08 TN2140 E amp M TIE TRUNK 09 TN767 E DS1 INTERFACE 10 TN799 B CONTROL LAN indicates circuit pack conflict ES Carrier Type processor Slot 11 12 13 14 T5 16 Page 1 of Carrier A Code Sf Mode Name MEDPRO RESERVED IP MEDPRO RESERVED IP TN802 B MAPD BOARD A 6 If not type MEDPPO in the slot just above TN802B slot and press Enter Changing the one entry automatically changes the entry above it If it is in IP Trunk mode you get the following error message MedPro type requires TN802 with application Type 7 Type change ip interfaces and press Enter MEDPRO on circuit packs form 8 Type in the information for the TN802B IP Interface 9 Set the Enabled field to y and press E
163. AN Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890BB L1 Port 21 02 J58890BB L2 Port 21 01 J58890BB L3 Port 21 01 J58890AP Control 21 02 10 If a switch node carrier is being installed in the D position of an EPN verify that the ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator is installed at slot 02 of expansion control carrier A See Figure 6 42 If a switch node carrier is being installed in the E position of an EPN verify that the ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator is installed at slot 21 of port carrier D For a PPN install the ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator at slot 01 of switch node carrier E 11 Install the front trim plates on the D carrier 12 Install the new power units into the carrier One 649A is installed on the left and right sides of the carrier 13 Connect the power cords to the power units The power cords are the white cables equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front of each carrier Install Circuit Packs 1 Install the new circuit packs into carrier D Use the decal and the upgrade configuration document provided with the equipment as a guide 2 Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 119 Interc
164. AN Connections for Standard Reliability Module DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 21 Remove Carrier Ground Straps 1 Disconnect the top and bottom ground straps from the A carrier See Figure 5 2 These straps will reconnect to the new A carrier LT o LII E LT LT LO WM tis ofi AME EM CORO M ZA WWW ccc Se L LU SN Idcfoo1 KLC 102996 Figure Notes 1 Rear of Cabinet 4 Module Control Carrier A 2 Port Carrier C Position Position 3 Ground Jumpers 5 Port Carrier D Position Figure 5 2 Location of Ground Jumpers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 22 2 Disconnect the P1 and P2 cables from the A carrier See Figure 5 3 3 Remove the fan trim plate by pulling it straight off 4 Clean or replace the air filter 403326820 if necessary 5 In front of the carrier remove the 4 screws top 2 first holding the A carrier to the cabinet frame Use a long handle screwdriver or 5 16 inch Socket
165. AN connections for critical reliability 6 137 TDM LAN connections for standard reliability 6 136 preventive maintenance 3 12 4 6 protection electromagnetic 3 50 public network 3 46 R relabel wall field 3 48 relocation of port circuit packs single carrier 3 3 required tools 3 10 10 4 4 3 rerecord announcements 3 53 retranslate port circuits single carrier 3 52 RF shielding 3 50 S screws thread forming 3 50 setting date and time procedure 4 13 shielding electromagnetic 3 50 single mode fiber 3 27 3 33 software upgrade process 1 1 2 2 1 4 1 standard reliabilit ity 4 7 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Index stabilizing cabinets for earthquakes 3 49 standard reliability software upgrade 4 7 standard reliability TDM LAN connections for EPN 6 138 TDM LAN connections for PPN 6 136 TDM LAN connections for R5r PPN 6 84 switch node carrier adding 6 94 6 108 ICC connections 6 99 6 113 Switch Node Carrier in the PPN 6 27 6 28 6 31 Issue 1 April 2000 IN 4 thread forming screws 3 50 time set procedure 4 13 TN1656 Tape Drive circuit pack B 3 TN1657 Disk Drive adding 1 9 TN1657 Disk Drive circuit pack B 3 TN2211 Optical Drive circuit pack B 3 TN2400 1 12 2 11 TN574 DS1 converter circuit packs A 12 A 16 TN754 digital line circuit packs A 12 TN1654 DS1 converter circuit packs A 16
166. April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 106 Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 Reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors Power Up System 1 At the cabinet containing the new switch node carrier set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 The system performs the level 4 rebooting process loading the system program and default or current translations from the disk Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes gt NOTE Ignore alarms for now 3 Type reset system 4 and press Enter to copy the translations from removable media to memory 4 Clear any alarms 5 Type save translation and press Enter if translation changes were made in Step 7 above 6 Type restore disk full and press Enter to copy the translations from removable media to disk 7 After the system reboot is finished and all trouble cleared verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal operating mode Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu AA OO Inm Select Restart System from the Reset System menu DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115
167. April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 107 Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar Ifthe Alarm Origination Activated field administration that you previously noted is already set to y be sure to enable Alarm Origination Otherwise you do not need to enable Alarm Origination proceed to the next section Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter The name of the Alarm Origination Activated field was changed to Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers to support more than 1 OSS Type first only in this field to enable Alarm Origination to the first OSS which should be INADS Be sure to type y in both Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields Press Enter Type save translation disk and press Enter If you have lost the previous administration of the A1arm Origination field you may register the system again with the INADS Database Administrator at the TSC The INADS Administrator enables Alarm Origination as part of the registration process Ay WARNING If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the switch will not report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract DEFINITY Enterprise Communicati
168. CCA Figure 3 5 ICC Pinfield Blocks on J58890H Port Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 22 Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic Cabling Standard Reliability Release 8r After all fiber optic equipment is installed refer to Chapter A Fiber Link Administration 1 Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave transceiver Label every cable installed This section provides figures showing typical examples of these connections The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled TX transmit or RX receive while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered either 1 or 2 See Figure 3 7 Collocated Port Networks For a standard reliability system with 1 collocated EPN use 1 fiber optic cable and 2 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks For a standard reliability system with 2 collocated EPNs use 3 fiber optic cables and 6 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks gt NOTE Based on floor plan considerations the length of these cables may vary 20 foot 6 1 m cables are normally adequate for a Release 8r with 2 PNs For collocated cabinets route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to each EPN cabinet Since a Release 8r PPN cabinet is collocated w
169. CMS measurements that are made by the system ACD measurements that are made external to the system via External CMS are referred to as external measurements in use lamp A red light on a multiappearance voice terminal that lights to show which call appearance will be selected when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off hook INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service IO Information outlet ISDN See Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Gateway IG A feature allowing integration of the switch and a host based telemarketing application via a link to a gateway adjunct The gateway adjunct is a 3B based product that notifies the host based telemarketing application of call events ISDN trunk A trunk administered for use with ISDN PRI Also called ISDN facility ISDN PRI terminal adapter An interface between endpoint applications and an ISDN PRI facility ISDN PRI terminal adapters are currently available from other vendors and are primarily designed for video conferencing applications Accordingly currently available terminal adapters adapt the two pairs of video codec data V 35 and dialing RS 366 ports to an ISDN PRI facility IS DTT Integrated Services digital tie trunk ISN Information Systems Network ISO International Standards Organization ISV Independent software vendor ITP Installation test procedure ITU International Telecommunications Union IXC Interexc
170. Cabinet 1 with 1 Duplex Switch 4 Add Links to EPNs in Alternating Order Node 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth 2 Cabinet Stack 2 16 EPN 5 Add Links to EPNs in Alternating Order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth 6 To additional EPNs 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable Figure3 16 Fiber Optic Connections Through Center Stage Switch DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 45 DS1 CONV Remoted Cabinets The distance between the DS1 facilities and associated equipment room hardware and cabling is a maximum of approximately 200 circuit miles 322 km for analog voice and 500 circuit miles 805 km for digital no analog voice stations gt NOTE These limits for DS1 remoting is the maximum distance between any 2 port networks in a Release 8r system with either direct or switched port network connections with a TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit pack Digital public network tie trunk facilities provide the end to end connectivity between the port networks For either type of port network PPN or EPN a TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit pack serves as the port network interface to the DS1 facilities As a PPN interface a TN1654 DS1 CONV can reside in either m Aportcarrier in any port slot m Aswitch node carrier in port slot 1 or 21 As an EPN interface a TN1654 DS1 CON
171. Cable 6 18 If this fiber interface is disconnected remove with the appropriate VO cable Comcode 848029285 Coupling and Adapter Plate from Bulkhead and replace i fe prda0001 RPY 021898 Figure Notes 1 To outside plant fiber Figure 6 9 Cable Disconnect Label 11 Close the rear door A CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm to prevent mechanical stress on the cables Plan the use of cable ties to avoid crimping the cable or creating a fixed stress point where at a later time movement of the cable causes it to exceed the minimum bend radius Ax CAUTION Be careful not to crimp the fiber cable when you are performing the following step 12 Replace the fan cover See Figure 6 10 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 19 Icda5fop EWS 110398 Figure 6 10 Replace the Fan Cover 13 Connect the fiber cable to the angled connector on the front of the circuit pack See Figure 6 11 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding o
172. Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r Ifthe Alarm Origination Activated field administration is already set to y be sure to enable Alarm Origination Otherwise you do not need to enable Alarm Origination proceed to the next section Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter The Alarm Origination Activated field was changed to Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers to support more than 1 OSS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 133 4 Type first only in this field to enable Alarm Origination to the first OSS which should be INADS Be sure to type y in both Cleared Alarm Notificationand Restart Notification fields Press Enter gt NOTE The INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination as part of the registration process A CAUTION If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the switch will not report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability type status spe and press Enter to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in service Type save translation spe a or both disk and press Enter This command instructs the system to take
173. DN applications see the Managing Trunks section DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 80 Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication To upgrade a standard reliability system to a high or critical reliability DEFINITY ECS Release 5 system a second control carrier is added to carrier position B of the existing multicarrier cabinet PPN Service Interruption 1 Since the addition of the second control carrier requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be carried out Verify System Status 1 Before proceeding the system should be examined for alarms and every problem should be corrected The system must be alarm free Disable Alarm Origination 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Make a note of the Alarm Origination Activated field administration If the feature is enabled type n in this field and press Enter to disable Alarm Origination This will be activated again later A WARNING If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the switch the switch may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble tickets is critical for measuring the quality of Lucent services and products gt NOTE For earlier release
174. DRR Call Detail Recording and Reporting CDRU See Call Detail Recording utility CDRU CEM Channel expansion multiplexing center stage switch CSS The central interface between the processor port network and expansion port networks in a CSS connected system central office CO The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling central office CO codes The first three digits of a 7 digit public network telephone number in the United States central office CO trunk A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through the local CO CEPT1 European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Rate 1 channel 1 A circuit switched call 2 A communications path for transmitting voice and data 3 In wideband all of the time slots contiguous or noncontiguous necessary to support a call Example an HO channel uses six 64 kbps time slots 4 A DSO ona T1 or E1 facility not specifically associated with a logical circuit switched call analogous to a single trunk channel negotiation The process by which the channel offered in the Channel Identification Information Element CIIE in the SETUP message is negotiated to be another channel acceptable to the switch that receives the SETUP message and ultimately to the switch that sent the SETUP Negotiation is attempted only if the CIIE is encoded a
175. E18 1E05 and so forth b Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 3 Behind control cabinet A of each single carrier EPN a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot A01 b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and place the coil either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 39 e B LEIS MUMMIWKW Ss LP SS _ Uy MD QOO P SS ie TR KIN la gt LU SS AIRE SN z t w ERE Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Switc
176. EFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Index J J58890AH Control Carrier 6 23 L local port network 3 45 location grounding jumpers 6 85 6 88 6 98 6 101 6 112 6 115 6 135 grounding jumpers small cabinet 6 134 M main distribution frame MDF relabel 3 48 maintenance preventative 3 1 2 8 mass storage system MSS B 5 MCC G2 Universal Module to oe EPN 5 1 memory verify addition 1 17 month names table of English 1 20 2 18 4 14 5 39 5 70 5 109 N network configuration changing network services 6 71 ITS connecting 6 50 6 53 6 60 Network Controller Interface Assembly 1 12 2 11 new EPN cabinet 6 22 O optical drive 1 1 2 1 P parts earthquake front plate 3 50 thread forming screws 3 50 Issue 1 April 2000 IN 3 pass thru kit 6 8 pass thru tool 6 14 PEC codes xvii pin field blocks J58890H 1 port cabinet 3 21 port cabinets J58890H 1 3 21 single carrier 3 15 port carrier adding 6 128 port circuits retranslate single carrier 3 52 port networks collocated single carrier 3 22 DS1 CONV remoted single carrier 3 23 fiber remoted single carrier 3 22 power and grounding single carrier 3 4 power down AUDIX procedure 3 56 4 19 6 141 power up AUDIX procedure 3 56 4 19 6 141 power failure stations 3 4 PPN power down procedure B 10 TDM LAN connections 6 117 TDM L
177. FINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 11 Check the active tone clock H C only 1 Type status port network 1 and verify that the Tone Clock is in the same carrier as the active SPE and that the Service State field shows in gt NOTE This takes 1 minute to complete If the service state is incorrect repeat the command until this condition is met If the active Tone Clock has not migrated to the active carrier after 1 minute then a Tone Clock problem exists Refer to the TDM CLK Maintenance Objects section of the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r book to resolve any problems Power Down the Processor Carrier A CAUTION Do not power down the whole cabinet it is not necessary For standard reliability power down the processor carrier This causes a service interruption For high or critical reliability power down the standby carrier 1 To power down the processor carrier remove the power plug from the eft side of the carrier then remove the power plug from the right side of the carrier Remove the Circuit Packs gt NOTE More detailed information on removing and adding circuit packs is in Chapter 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware 1 Remove the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET slot in the carrier 2
178. Figure Notes 1 Rear of Control Carrier 3 P1 Connector 2 P2 Connector Figure 5 12 Location of P1 and P2 Connectors 6 Remove the fan trim plate by pulling it straight off 7 Clean or replace the air filter 403326820 if necessary 8 In the front of the carrier remove the 4 screws top 2 first holding the A carrier to the cabinet frame Use a long handle screwdriver or 5 16 inch Socket with a 10 inch 25 cm extension 9 Behind the carrier remove the 2 screws holding the A carrier s rear connector panel to the cabinet frame 10 Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches 2 5 to 5 cm Be sure that no cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet carrier framework A CAUTION Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the carrier 11 Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability Sx Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier 1 Inspect the new J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier for any damage Also verify that the backplane pins are not bent Place the expansion control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up Install the CFY1 current limiter CURL on the A carrier to the pin field b
179. High or Critical Reliability 6 111 Remove Port Carrier D gt NOTE Note the position of the TDM LAN cables before disconnecting 1 If a switch node carrier is being installed in the D position of an EPN remove the TDM LAN cable from between the D and A carriers For other EPNs or the PPN disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the D and A carriers from the D carrier 2 Remove the ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator from slot 21 of the D carrier 3 Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps between the D and E carriers from the D carrier See Figure 6 38 These straps will be reconnected to the new D carrier 4 Disconnect the 8 ground straps from the D carrier between the D and A carriers or the D carrier and the enhanced fan unit see Figure 6 38 Reconnect the 8 ground straps to the D carrier 5 Disconnect the P1 small 9 pin connector from the D carrier Move the cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier 6 Remove the 4 screws top 2 first holding the D carrier to the cabinet frame Use a long handle screwdriver or 5 16 inch socket with a 10 inch extension 7 Behind the D carrier in a DEFINITY style cabinet remove the 2 screws holding the D carrier to the cabinet frame 8 Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches then from the back be sure that no cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet carrier
180. INITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 103 cydf032 PDH 111896 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 6 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A01 7 Optical Cross Connect Facility 3 To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 8 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 4 To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B01 9 TX Connector 5 To EPN1 Carrier B Slot 2B02 10 RX Connector Figure 5 33 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 104 cydf032 PDH 111896 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 6 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02 7 Optical Cross Connect Facility 3 To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01 8 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 4 To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02 9 TX Connector 5 To EPN2 Carrier B Slot 3B02 10 RX Connector Figure 5 34 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 105 cydf032 PDH 111896 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 6 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02 7 Optical Cross Connect Facility 3 To EPN2 Carr
181. INITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade New for Release 8 B 4 Troubleshooting details for the Mass Storage System may be found under the R MEDIA maintenance object in Chapter 9 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures of the Release 8 2 Maintenance for R8r manual Additional related maintenance objects associated with the Mass Storage System include STO DATA DISK and H ADAPTR Red Green Yellow TN2211 OPTICAL DRIVE fpdf2211 KLC 010600 Figure B 1 TN2211 faceplate The system is usually booted from the boot image stored on disk The save translation and save announcements commands save to disk the memory resident translation data and TN750 resident announcement data respectively The backup disk command copies data from the disk to the removable media for backup storage The restore disk command copies data from the removable media back to disk All MSS components reside in the SPE or PPN control carrier carrier A for a simplex SPE carriers A and B for a duplicated SPE The removable media circuit pack contains SCSI bus terminators a 48V to 12V power converter an industry standard SCSI based removable media drive and interface circuitry to the private bus to control the LEDs detect the presence of the circuit pack and identify the vintage of the hardware DEFINITY Enterpr
182. Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 GS8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 4 19 DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures Power Down the AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system s power unit notifies technicians to shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system 1 Log into the AUDIX System as craft 2 Type reset system shutdown Press Enter once gt NOTE Do not press Enter again This will force the AUDIX to shutdown immediately dropping all active calls on the AUDIX 3 The SHUTDOWN Completed message appears when the AUDIX is successfully shutdown This takes about 2 minutes 4 The AUDIX System can now be removed for service Power Up the AUDIX System m If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet 1 Re install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors m If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the cabinet 1 Power up the cabinet The AUDIX reboots automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors m If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered down 1 At the AUDIX console hold the crti key and type cc 2 Type 5 at the prompt In about 2 minutes the AUDIX boots up 3 When the system initialization is complete
183. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Comcode 108678335 Issue 1 April 2000 Copyright O 2000 Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Your Responsibility for Your System s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your com pany s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You and your system manager are responsible for the security of your system such as programming and configuring your equipment to pre vent unauthorized use The system manager is also responsible for reading all installation instruction and system administration docu ments provided with this product in order to fully understand the fea tures that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of
184. M LAN cable between the A and C carriers to the pin field block marked TDM on the left side of the A carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 24 eie rui dui b ae xl X TANN LUKUUN NNN le INNY cadf003 KLC 103096 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 6 Port Carrier E Position 2 ZAHF4 TDM LAN Terminator 7 Slot 21 3 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L6 8 Slot 01 4 Module Control Carrier A Position 9 TDM LAN Cable WP91716 L7 5 Port Carrier D Position 10 Control Carrier B Position Figure 5 4 TDM LAN Connections for Standard Reliability Release 8 EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 25 9 On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to Slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TDM cables to Slot 01 Table 5 7 TDM LAN Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890BB 1 Port 21 02 J58890BB 2 Port 21 01 J58890BB 3 Port 21 01 J58
185. Month field Type the current month in English January through December See Table 5 18 for English month names After the month is entered press Tab to move to next field Table 5 18 English Month Names Month Number Month Name 1 January February March April May June July August c o 0o oc1 RI WwW PM September October a4 eo a November k N December 4 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month field Type the day of month 1 through 31 and press Tab to move to the next field 5 The cursor is positioned on the Year field Type the current year and press TAB to move to the next field 6 The cursor is positioned on the Hour field Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock Press Tab to move to the next field 7 The cursor is positioned on the Minute field Type current minute 0 through 59 Seconds cannot be set 8 Type standard or daylight savings in the Type field 9 Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rule field 10 Press Enter when the information is correct 11 Type display time and press Enter to verify date time data DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 110 Set Additional Administration 1 Type list configuration software version long and press Enter
186. N Basic Rate Interface specification DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 9 bridged appearance A call appearance on a voice terminal that matches a call appearance on another voice terminal for the duration of a call BTU British Thermal Unit buffer 1 In hardware a circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another Typically a buffer holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the data 2 In software an area of memory that is used for temporary storage bus A multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations business communications terminal BCT A digital data terminal used for business applications A BCT can function via a data module as a special purpose terminal for services provided by a processor or as a terminal for data entry and retrieval BX 25 A version of the CCITT X 25 protocol for data communications BX 25 adds a fourth level to the standard X 25 interface This uppermost level combines levels 4 5 and 6 of the ISO reference model bypass tie trunks A 1 way outgoing tie trunk from a tandem switch to a main switch in an ETN Bypass tie trunks provided in limited quantities are used as a last choice route when all trunks to another tandem s
187. NOTE If single mode fiber is being installed the beige adapter will be replaced with a blue adapter later in this section dafocoup RPY 062497 Figure Notes 1 Pass thru Tool 2 SC SC Fiber Optic Adapter Figure 6 5 Fiber Optic Adapter and Pass Thru Tool 2 Slide the tool to the rear of the cabinet See Figure 6 6 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 15 Icda2fop RPY 021098 Figure 6 6 Insert the Pass thru Tool A CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm to prevent mechanical stress on the cables A CAUTION During the actual installation of fiber optic components use either all beige or all blue adapters Beige denotes multimode fiber and blue denotes single mode fiber Do not mix beige with blue 3 Attach the supplied fiber optic cable to the adapter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 16 4 Pull the tool with adapter and cable attached out through the front of the cabinet See Figure 6 7
188. Name Connector Pin 103 White Orange TD 27 003 Orange White TD 2 104 White Green RD 28 004 Green White RD 3 Enter Added Translations 1 2 3 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade Call the regional CSA to perform the steps in this section To enable DCS set the Dcs field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen to y Administer the other required translation data using the forms listed under Distributed Communications System DCS in DEFINITY Communications System Administration for Network Connectivity Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability type status spe and press Enter to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in service Enter save translation spe a or both disk and press Enter This command instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the disk s DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 45 Add IP Interface Assembly DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions allows you to send voice and fax from the DEFINITY ECS through an Internet protocol IP network to other DEFINITY ECSs having this feature or to other H 323 V2 compliant endpoints It is implemented using the TN802 B IP Interface which is a Windows NT server residing on the IP Interface Assembl
189. ON 3 The system performs the level 4 rebooting process loading the system program and default or current translations from the disk Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes gt NOTE Ignore alarms for now 4 Type reset system 4 and press Enter to copy the translations from removable media to memory 5 Clear any alarms 6 Type save translation both and press Enter if translation changes were made in Step 8 above 7 Type restore disk both full and press Enter to copy the translations from removable media to disk 8 After the system reboot is finished and all trouble cleared verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal operating mode Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu A OO Im Select Restart System from the Reset System menu DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 122 Enable PNC Duplication All non duplicated SNIs to SNI fiber links are automatically duplicated 1 Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter On screen 2 set the PNC Duplication field to yes Press Enter Type change system parameters duplication and
190. ONV Board Type TN574 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES A B C D Facility Installed yes no no no Passes Far end Clock yes yes yes yes Digital Data Compatible yes yes yes yes Line Coding ami zcs ami zcs ami zcs ami zcs Framing Mode esf esf esf esf DSICONV 1 Line Compensation 1 1 ak 1 DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation 1 I HE L Facility B Circuit ID 01112343 M Screen 6 4 Fiber Link Administration form for TN574 Circuit Pack Duplicated DS1 Converter Complex Administration page 3 of 3 Page 3 appears when the Is one endpoint remoted via a D81 Converter Complex field is yes and duplication is enabled gt NOTE When you administer DS1 Converter TN1654 circuit packs different fields display For field definitions of the fields displayed on page 3 of the Fiber Link Administration form refer back to the previous section DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 17 DS1 Converter Complex Administration for T1 TN1654 Circuit Packs zu fiber link next Page 2 of 3 UN FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION A PNC DS1 CONVERTER DS1CONV ATTRIBUTES DS1CONV Board Location 01B01 DS1CONV Board Location 02B01 DS1CONV Board Type TN1654 DS1CONV Board Type TN1654 DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES A B GC D Facility Installed yes yes no no Bit Rate 1 544 Facility Startup Idle Code
191. Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination 2 When administration is completed log in as craft init login administration 1 B Log in as init Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade Type change system parameters offer options and press Enter Ifthe Activate Offer field is n set it to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know whether you need to save translations and reboot to make the change permanent Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes Contact the requester when done Check SPE status H C only 1 Type status SPE and press Enter Wait until m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to copy upgrad
192. R TO SLOT 02 ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB 2 AND 3 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CA TO SLOT 01 BLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR Figure 6 55 TDM LAN Bus Connections for Critical Reliability EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers Table 6 11 TDM LAN Cable Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890B 1 Port 21 02 J58890B 2 Port 21 01 J58890B 3 Port 21 01 J58890AP PPN Control A or B 20 03 J58890AF AC EPN Control A 21 02 J58890AF DC EPN Control A 21 02 Issue 1 April 2000 6 140 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 6 141 DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures Power Down the AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system s power unit notifies technicians to shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system 1 Log into the AUDIX System as craft 2 Type reset system shutdown Press Enter once gt NOTE Do not press Enter again This will force the AUDIX to shutdown immediately dropping all active calls on the AUDIX 3 The SHUTDOWN Completed message appears when the AUDIX is successfully shutdown This takes about 2 minutes 4 The AUDIX System can now
193. R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 77 Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Write down all enabled links 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for all links 3 Write down which links are in service Disable TTI A CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Make sure the ISDN is in service If not attempt to busy out and release the ISDN D channel link This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service 2 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 3 On the second screen set the Enabled field to n to prevent the TTI feature from activating Power Down G2 System At the power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to OFF Install Power Failure Transfer Ground Wire A CAUTION To avoid contaminating single point ground do not connect the ground wire while the system is powered up 1 Connect 1 end of a 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm wire either to pin 49 of the connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel associated with the power failure transfer panel 2 Route the opposite end of the wire to an approved ground source and connect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 78 Disc
194. R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 11 Icda8fop RPY 021198 Figure Notes 1 Press tab down 2 Pull connector forward Figure 6 2 Remove the I O Cable Connector 7 Using a supplied cable tie secure the removed I O connector to nearby cabling See Figure 6 3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 12 Icda9fop RPY 021398 Figure Notes 1 Tie wrap Figure 6 3 Secure the I O Cable Connector 8 From the front remove the fan cover See Figure 6 4 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 13 Figure 6 4 Remove the Fan Cover DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 14 Install the Pass thru Kit 1 Snap the SC SC fiber optic adapter on the pass thru tool See Figure 6 5 Use the beige adapter even if single mode fiber is being installed The SC SC adapter is better suited for cable routing in the next steps gt
195. Remove the UN332B circuit pack from the carrier and place it in antistatic packing material 3 Remove the tape from the tape drive 4 Remove the TN1656 tape drive and place it in antistatic packing material DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 12 Install the Circuit Packs gt NOTE To properly seat a circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged 1 Insert the TN1650B memory circuit pack in memory slot 3 gt NOTE If a high or critical reliability system install the TN1650B at the same time as the optical drive Note that adding memory to the standby SPE causes an error because the memory number between the standby and active carriers does not match 2 Insert the UN332C circuit pack into the MSSNET slot 3 Replace the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET circuit pack 4 Insert the TN2211 optical drive Figure 1 1 into the right most TAPE DRIVE slot It only takes up 2 slots 5 Place a blank faceplate over the left most TAPE DRIVE slot TN2211 OPTICAL DRIVE fpd 2211 KLC 010600 Figure 1 1 TN2211 Optical Drive DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrade
196. Remove the existing TN1657 Disk Drive circuit pack and place it in antistatic material 3 Insert a new TN1657 circuit pack into the DISK DRIVE slot 4 To properly seat the circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged 5 Type release host adapter a b and press Enter to release the disk from the maintenance busyout condition and put it back into service 6 Type reset host adapter a b and press Enter to allow the disk to spin up 7 Type status spe and press Enter to verify that the disk is now in service gt NOTE If the disk fails to return to service repeat Steps 1 3 4 and 5 For high or critical reliability repeat steps 1 through 7 on the active carrier Restore Disk gt NOTE Until this command finishes the system provides no user feedback on the management terminal screen Do not press Enter while the command executes Doing so causes the terminal screen to clear as the command finishes erasing any success or failure messages the system may provide If standard reliability 1 Type restore disk full and press Enter to copy the information on the removable media to disk which takes about 30 minutes If high or critical reliability 1 Type restore disk full both and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Ap
197. Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 92 Relocate Port Carrier B Refer to Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability to relocate the removed port carrier Connect Management Terminal or PC 1 Behind control carrier A disconnect the management terminal or PC cable from the TERM connector and reconnect the cable to the DOT duplication option terminal connector Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the PPN or an EPN where PPN port carrier B was relocated reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors Power Up System 1 At an EPN where PPN port carrier B was relocated set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 Atthe PPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 3 The system performs a level 4 rebooting process loading the system program and default or current translations from the disk Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes gt NOTE Ignore alarms for now 4 Type the reset system 4 and press Enter to copy the translations from removable media to memory 5 Clear any alarms 6 Type save translation both and press Enter if translation changes were made in Step 8 7 Type restore disk both full and press Enter to copy the translations from removable media to disk 8 Verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch i
198. Risc Processor to R8r ao wy Pp Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN If upgrading from a pre Release 5vs to a DEFINITY ECS Release 8si refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Upgrades and Additions for R8si The following table indicates the processes and their corresponding time allotment Not all processes are required for every upgrade the table shows maximum times and includes high and critical reliability processes Process Minutes Busyout multimedia interface circuit packs 2 Disable enable TTI 2 Disable enable scheduled maintenance 2 Disable enable alarm origination to INADS 2 Save announcements TN750 B Only 40 Save translations 10 Backup disk 25 50 Verify software release 5 Replace disk drives and circuit packs 10 Set tone lock power down power up and unlock 30 active and standby SPE Restore disk full both 30 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Conventions Used in This Book xviii Process Minutes Restore disk install both 12 Upgrade software 15 Configure removable media 2 Set vector f 2 Reset standby 4 5 Status spe 10 Shutdown restart AUDIX and LAN Gateway 20 Miscellaneous 5 Conventions Used in This Book Information you type is shown as save announcements To submit the command you typed press the E
199. S 1 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and customer options 2 When administration is completed log in as craft at the Login prompt DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 22 init login administration 1 Log inas init 2 Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set 3 Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade 4 Type change system parameters offer options and press Enter 5 Ifthe Activate Offer field is n set it to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know whether you need to save translations and reboot to make the change permanent 6 Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes 7 Contact the requester when done Check SPE status H C only 1 Type status SPE and press Enter Wait unt
200. S1C Digital Signal Level 1 protocol C DS1 CONV Digital Signal Level 1 converter DSI Digital signal interface DSU Data service unit DTDM Digital terminal data module DTE Data terminal equipment DTGS Direct Trunk Group Select DTMF Dual tone multifrequency DTS Disk tape system duplicated common control Two processors ensuring continuous operation of a communications system While one processor is online the other functions as a backup The backup processor goes online periodically or when a problem occurs duplication The use of redundant components to improve availability When a duplicated subsystem fails its backup redundant system automatically takes over DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 20 duplication option A system option that duplicates the following control carrier containing the SPE El circuit packs in carriers fiber optic cabling between port networks and center stage switch in a CSS connected System DWBS DEFINITY Wireless Business System DXS Direct extension selection E E1 A digital transmission standard that carries traffic at 2 048 Mbps The E1 facility is divided into 32 channels DSOs of 64 kbps information Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization information A D channel occupies channel 16 E amp M Ear and mouth receive and transmit EA Expans
201. SUs m 3 6 9 or 12 pairs of wall field cables provided with CSUs m 5 10 or 15 dB attenuators single mode fiber only 5dB Attenuator 106060718 10dB Attenuator 106060734 15dB Attenuator 106061021 For 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind port carrier B of the multicarrier PPN See Figure 3 6 and Figure 3 7 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1B02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1B02 c Route the fiber optic cable from the lightwave transceiver to the cabinet s cable tray and down out of the cabinet to the EPN stack d Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 24 2 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01 b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the lightwave transceiver at slot 2A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and place the
202. Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 28 9 9 9 MUMU WSs A SS LP SS I NSW I NS LUU SS ZOU SS Y Gees nmguee I SS P NSSSS LUMI NNW LI SS Iu pe V cad 030 PDH 111196 V Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 3 Cabinet 2 3 and 5 through 16 MCC or SCC EPN 2 Cabinet 4 MCC EPN with One Switch Duo i Node Figure 6 15 Switch Connected Release 8r with SNC in EPN Switch Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and EPN High Reliability For the following connection example the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1 the first EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2 and the EPN cabinet containing the Switch Node Carrier is called Cabinet 4 gt NOTE For the following example add links to PNs in alternating order for example 20 and 2 19 and 3 18 and 4 and so forth DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 29 T At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 1C0
203. T 21 a SEE NOTE amp J58890BB D PORT CARRIER TDM LAN eg TDM LAN BUS WP91716 L6 TERMINATOR ZAHF4 SLOT 21 TY l SEE NOTE i A J58890BB E PORT CARRIER REAR VIEW NOTE ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB 1 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02 ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB 2 AND 3 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CABLES TO SLOT 01 Figure 6 31 TDM LAN Connections for High Reliability PPN 9 Connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and B carriers to the pin field block marked TDM LAN on the left side of the B carrier See Figure 6 31 and Table 6 8 The other end remained connected to the A carrier when the old carrier was removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 90 10 Connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the C and B 11 carriers to the pin field block marked TDM LAN on the right side of the B carrier See Figure 6 31 and Table 6 8 The other end remained connected to the C carrier when the old carrier was removed Connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and B carriers to the pin field block marked TDM LAN on the left side of the B carrier See Figure 6 31 and Table 6 8 The other end remained connected to the A carrier when the old carri
204. TN2182 B Tone Clock Tone Detector and Call Classifier Control TN2183 Analog Line Port TN2184 DIOD Trunk Port TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface Port TN2199 Central Office Trunk Port TN2202 Ring Generator Power TN2211 Optical Drive Control TN2224 B Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Port Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware List of Circuit Packs 6 7 Table 6 1 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN2305 ATM Interface multimode fiber Port TN2306 ATM Interface single mode fiber Port TN2313 DS1 Interface Port UN330B Duplication Interface Control UN331B Processor Control UN332 B C Mass Storage Network Control Control WP 90510 AC Power Supply Compact Single Carrier Cabinet Power WP 91153 AC Power Supply Single Carrier Cabinet Power DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 8 Add the Fiber Optic Cable This chapter details the installation of the fiber optic cable using the DEFINITY fiber optic pass thru kit for Multicarrier Cabinets MCC only This kit comcode 848029278 provides the equipment necessary to install the fiber optic connectors and associated cabling Unpack and In
205. TN787 Multimedia Interface circuit packs will result in unusable TN787 and TN788 Multimedia Voice Conditioner ports 1 Type display system parameters customer options and press Enter If the MMCH option is set to y continue to step 2 If not skip to Save Translations and Announcements 2 Type list configuration all and press Enter Locate all of the TN787 Multimedia Interface circuit packs 3 Type busyout board lt location gt and press Enter for each TN787 This prevents any further multimedia to voice connections and drops all active connections Save Translations and Announcements 1 Log in at the management terminal on the Release 5 6 system 2 f the system is duplex type status system and press Enter to verify the system is in the active standby mode 3 Type save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation cards 4 Check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade If errors are detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the problem Do not continue until the errors are corrected 5 If the system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter 6 If administered recorded announcements are listed type save announcements and press Enter 7 Remove the translation card and install the backup removable media o
206. U S customer Modem comparable to a U S Robotics Sportster Model USR 33 6 EXT Cable from modem to TN802B external cable assembly We recommend that you protect your cabinet with an uninterruptible power system UPS Check your Shipment When your DEFINITY ECS order arrives at your site check the contents see Table 6 4 1 Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it If the box is damaged do not open it Inform the shipping company and ask for instructions on filing a claim If the box is undamaged check the contents against the packing slip Check the condition of each component and note any damage or shortages on the packing slip The carton should contain the following for each IP Interface ordered DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly Issue 1 April 2000 6 47 Table 6 4 Required Hardware Comcode Code Description Quantity 108525528 TN799B C LAN circuit pack One TN799B supports more than one TN802B 1 J58890MA 1 L30 TN802B IP Interface Assembly 1 or more 601939804 H600 512 G1 external cable assembly 1 or more 259A connector 1 CAT5 or better cable 1 407633999 U S Robotics Sportster external modem Model USR 33 6 EXT U S customers only Non U S customers must provide a modem comparable to this model
207. Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Glossary and Abbreviations USOP User service order profile UUCP UNIX to UNIX Communications Protocol UUI User to user information Issue 1 April 2000 GL 50 V VAR Value added reseller VDN See vector directory number VDN vector directory number VDN An extension that provides access to the Vectoring feature on the switch Vectoring allows a customer to specify the treatment of incoming calls based on the dialed number vector controlled split A hunt group or ACD split administered with the vector field enabled Access to such a split is possible only by dialing a VDN extension VIS Voice Information System VLSI Very large scale integration VM Voltmeter VNI Virtual nodepoint identifier voice terminal A single line or multiappearance telephone Ww WATS See Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS WCC World Class Core WCR World Class Routing WCTD World Class Tone Detection DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 51 WFB Wireless fixed base Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS A service in the United States that allows calls to certain areas for a flat rate charge based on expected usage wideband A circuit switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps A circuit switched call on a single T1 or E
208. V can reside in an expansion control carrier in any port slot DS1 Cabling within the Local Port Networks Use the running list that accompanies the upgrade equipment to determine which cable connects where The following paragraphs only provide conceptual information about wiring a DS1 Converter interface either to an expansion interface or to a switch node interface not step by step procedures for wiring a specific Release 8r system gt NOTE It is important to label every cable installed A cable connects each DS1 CONV either to the appropriate TN570 expansion interface for a direct connection to another port network or to the appropriate TN573B SN Interface for a switched connection to another port network gt NOTE These cables usually connect to TN570 expansion interfaces already installed for direct connections between the new PPN and either 1 or 2 EPNs On the DS1 CONV side a 4C retainer binds this shielded cable to the DS1 CONV port connector On the EI SNI side a 4B retainer binds the cable to the EI SNI port connector The DS1 CONV to EI SNI cable also provides a piggy back connector enabling subsequent access to the public network DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 46 Table 3 5 lists the cable numbers and lengths for the possible connections Ta
209. W TOT Q V V cad 009 KLC 112996 O 5 Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Switch Node 4 Add Links to EPNs in Alternating Order 3 19 4 18 5 17 and so forth 2 Cabinet Stack 2 16 EPN 5 To Additional EPNs 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable Figure3 15 Fiber Optic Connections Through Center Stage Switch DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 42 For 1 to 15 Critical Reliability EPNs 1 Behind the PPN cabinet See Figure 3 16 a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E01 b Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E02 c Connect the metallic intracarrier cable to the lightwave transceivers at slots 1E01 and 1E02 d Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1D01 e Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1D02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceivers f Connect the metallic intracarrier cable to the lightwave transceivers at slots 1D01 and 1D02 2 Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1 a For each EPN install 1 lightwa
210. When a link goes down an alarm is raised immediately For EAL INL and PACL link types a MINOR alarm is raised for all other link types a WARNING alarm is raised Other alarming conditions that do not cause the link to go down get a WARNING alarm regardless of the link type Troubleshooting Guidelines Before escalating a problem try the troubleshooting procedures listed in this appendix Also try the general troubleshooting procedures below 1 Check the software compatibility on the Software Release Letter Be sure the software that you are upgrading from is compatible with the software that you are upgrading fo 2 Check the Release 8 software tape removable media for defects Type test removable media UUCSS long and press Enter if you are using R8 software If you are using R7 or prior software type test tape UUCSS long and press Enter If the tape removable media has errors replace it gt NOTE Do not run the test removable media short command or the test tape short command This test cannot find all of the bad sectors that may be present on the tape removable media 3 If upgrading from G3V4 and earlier systems to a Release 8r check the vintage of the disk drive The disk drive mustbe TN1657 Vintage 4 or later 4 Always use the Software Release Letter that accompanies the software tape removable media If the letter is not available use the appropriate chapter in this book DEFINITY Enterprise Communication
211. Without Hardware AWOH A feature that allows administration of ports without associated terminals or other hardware ADU See asynchronous data unit ADU AE See access endpoint after call work ACW mode A mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls Agents enter the ACW mode to perform ACD related activities such as filling out a form after an ACD call AG ASAI Gateway agent A person who receives calls directed to a split A member of an ACD hunt group or ACD split Also called an ACD agent agent report A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured agents AIM Asynchronous interface module AIOD Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 4 ALBO Automatic Line Build Out All trunks busy ATB The state in which no trunks are available for call handling ALM ACK Alarm acknowledge American Standard Code for Information Interchange See ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AMW Automatic Message Waiting AN Analog analog The representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude frequency and phase See also digital analog data Data that is transmitted over a digital facility in analog PCM form The data must pass through a modem either at b
212. a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect a fiber cable to the transceiver just installed c Route the fiber cable down the outside of the rear covers and through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility d Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interface unit provided e Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack f Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager cydf013 CJL102396 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 Fiber Optic Cross Connect Facility 2 To PPN Carrier B Slot 1C02 6 Lightguide Interface Unit LIU 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 7 TX Connector Cabinet Stack 2 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 RX Connector Figure3 11 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 33 Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Cabling Critical Reliability Release 8r 1 Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave transceiver This section provides figures showing typical ways of making these connections The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled TX transmit or RX receive while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered 1 or 2 See Figure 3 13 Collocated Port Networks
213. able connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 1 Install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 on the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 26 Direct Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and EPN High or Critical Reliability For the following connection example the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1 the first EPN cabinet next to the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2 and the last EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 3 1 At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX
214. able to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 4 easier 3 Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 4 Atthe rear of the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 4E02 5 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa 6 Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 2A01 7 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable 8 Atthe rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 4E20 9 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa 10 Connect an H600 278 Metallic Cable from Slot 1 in the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 4 4A01 to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 4E19 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications
215. ade during that interval These records will facilitate the reassignment of any changes on the Release 8r removable media after the upgrade Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance During the upgrade follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the System to be upgraded For information about the procedures and necessary equipment refer to the Preventive Maintenance section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Remove the Present System 4 7 Remove the Present System m Ifthe equipment room is large enough to allow the Release 8r cabinet to be installed while the present system is in service skip to Install the Release 8r Cabinets on page 4 11 Return to this section when finished m Ifthe present system must be removed to make room for the Release 8r cabinet perform the following Save Translations and Announcements 1 Log in at the management terminal on the present system 2 Type save translation and press Enter This command instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation card 3 Check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade If errors are detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the probl
216. all translation information in memory and write it to the disk s If the MCC port network contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack type list configuration software version and press Enter If screen 2 shows that recorded announcements were saved these announcements can be restored using the restore announcements command Type restore announcements and press Enter Type backup disk spe a or both and press Enter This command instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the removable media DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers Update Port Assignment Records 1 Update the customer s port assignment records CABINET FRAME RETAINING PINS Issue 1 April 2000 6 134 Figure 6 49 Blank Carrier Panel Rear View CABINET CONTROL CARRIER A OOM GROUNDING z JUMPER REAR VIEW COVERS REMOVED Figure 6 50 Locations of Grounding Jumpers Small Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers CABINET PORT CARRIER C GROUNDING JUMPERS
217. allow the disk to completely spin down A CAUTION Make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk 1 Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors in the carrier 2 Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway See the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway 3 When the main menu appears select Maintenance 4 Select Heset System from the Maintenance menu 5 Select Shutdown from the Heset System menu DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 130 Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 If a DEFINITY AUDIX resides in the MCC port network to be upgraded shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down Refer to DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures on page 6 141 Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk 2 Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors Power Down MCC Port Network 1 At the MCC port network set the main circuit breaker to OFF Install Port
218. ally required of DTE equipment because T1 circuits require the last span to lose 15 22 5 dB line port Hardware that provides the access point to a communications system for each circuit associated with a telephone or data terminal link A transmitter receiver channel that connects two systems link access procedure on the D channel LAPD A link layer protocol on the ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI data link layer level 2 LAPD provides data transfer between two devices and error and flow control on multiple logical links LAPD is used for signaling and low speed packet data X 25 and mode 3 on the signaling D channel and for mode 3 data communications on a bearer B channel LINL Local indirect neighbor link local area network LAN A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area Generally a LAN is limited in range to a maximum of 6 2 miles and provides high speed carrier service with low error rates Common configurations include daisy chain star including circuit switched ring and bus logical link The communications path between a processor and a BRI terminal loop start trunk A trunk on which after establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits for a signal on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits of the called number LSU Local storage unit LWC Leave Word Calling M MAC Medium access MADU Modular asynchronous data u
219. ample the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1 the first EPN cabinet next to the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2 and the last EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 3 1 At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 3 easier 3 Route the fiber cable to the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 10 11 12 13 14 Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 Be sure the c
220. an extension and whose purpose is to supervise a call An extension can have multiple appearances Also called call appearance line appearance and occurrence See also call appearance application An adjunct that requests and receives ASAI services or capabilities One or more applications can reside on a single adjunct However the switch cannot distinguish among several applications residing on the same adjunct and treats the adjunct and all resident applications as a single application The terms application and adjunct are used interchangeably throughout this document applications processor A micro computer based program controlled computer providing application services for the DEFINITY switch The processor is used with several user controlled applications such as traffic analysis and electronic documentation application service element See capability group architecture The organizational structure of a system including hardware and software ARS See Automatic Route Selection ARS ASAI See Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange The standard code for representing characters in digital form Each character is represented by an 8 bit code including parity bit association A communication channel between adjunct and switch for messaging purposes An active association is one that applies to an existing call on the switch or to an extension on
221. anslations to the spare tape used to make the TRACS report 1 Remove the backup tape and install the spare tape 2 Type rtx and press Enter This command instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the tape 3 Remove the source tape 4 Insert the system tape 5 Mail the source tape next day delivery to STS for use in making the G2 TRACS report System Upgrades There are many configurations of DEFINITY G2 in the field Each system can have a unique configuration However to simplify Release 8 upgrades m The existing common control is always replaced by a multicarrier PPN m Existing traditional modules are replaced by EPNs m Existing universal modules are upgraded to EPNs A new multicarrier cabinet would then always serve as the PPN If a G2 universal module is upgraded to a DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPN hardware changes including carrier replacement are required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Task Tables Task Tables Issue 1 April 2000 5 10 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 and Table 5 5 provide the high level tasks to perform the upgrades detailed in this chapter Refer to the appropriate page for detailed instructions for each step Table 5 3 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r Standard Reliability
222. are components to specific endpoints The hardware components involved on the forward and reverse routes can be different depending upon the configuration and switch administration Various types of links are defined by their endpoints EAL Expansion Archangel Link terminating at an Expansion Interface board This link carries CCMS messages INL Indirect Neighbor Link terminating at a Switch Node Interface board PACL PNC ATM Control Link terminating at a PNC ATM EI board This link carries ATM signaling commands from CaPro to the remote TN2238 ATM EI boards PGC Packet Gateway Call Control Link terminating at a Packet Gateway board PRI ISDN PRI D Channel Link terminating at a Universal DS1 board RSCL Remote Socket Control Link terminating at a C LAN board RSL Remote Socket Link teminating at a C LAN board SAP System Access Port Link terminating at a Packet Data port X 25 BX 25 Link terminating at a Packet Gateway port DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Troubleshooting Guidelines B 7 The system links SYS LINK maintenance object records all errors encountered on the links Most of these events are not extraordinary unless they occur with an alarming frequency The events are logged as they occur leaving a trail to help analyze abnormal behavior exhibited by the endpoints attached to the links or the links themselves
223. arrier by pulling it straight off Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A Remove the CFY1 current limiter CURL from the pin field block marked CURL on the A carrier The CURL will be reused in the Release 8 EPN gt NOTE Verify that the CURL meets the minimum usable vintage requirements Remove Module Control Carrier A gt NOTE Note the position of each TDM LAN cables before disconnecting 1 Disconnect both TDM LAN cables from the A carrier See Figure 5 10 Leave the other end connected to the C carrier A CAUTION When removing the TDM LAN cables from a previously upgraded carrier be careful that none of the short pieces of shrink tubing come off the 4 corner pins of the pin field block Otherwise when the new equipment is connected 48 volts could short to ground DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 48 2 On port carrier J58890BB 1 connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to Slot 02 On port carriers J58890BB 2 and J58890BB 3 connect the TDM cables to Slot 01 Cc Tarak LUU NW FWMMEWEW OQ Dm WOW lo MMMIWKrCE_ W cadf002 KLC 103096 Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position
224. ass Storage System interactions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade New for Release 8 B 6 Control LAN C LAN The TN799 Control LAN C LAN packet port circuit pack provides TCP IP connection to adjuncts applications such as CMS Intuity and DCS Networking The C LAN circuit pack has 1 10baseT Ethernet connection and up to 16 DSO physical interfaces for PPP connections Putting multiple C LAN circuit packs into a system gives additional TCP IP capacity In addition to the TCP IP functionality CLAN extends the ISDN capabilities for csi models by providing Packet bus access A remote socket control link RSCL links the C LAN and the SPE to pass call control and other management information Since one link serves all the ports on the circuit pack maintenance of the RSCL is part of the C LAN circuit pack maintenance The C LAN TN799 circuit pack combines the functions of the PGATE and PI circuit packs into one circuit pack The PGATE or PI can be used with the C LAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connectivity Maintenance objects associated under the Control LAN area include CLAN BD Control LAN Circuit Pack ETH PT Control LAN Ethernet and PPP PT Control LAN Packet Port System Links SYS LINK System Links are packet links that originate at the Packet Interface board and traverse various hardw
225. assembly from its backplane connectors Power Down Port Networks 1 At the PPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF 2 At an EPN where PPN port carrier B will be relocated set the main circuit breaker to OFF Remove Doors and Panels and Disconnect Cables 1 Remove the front door from the PPN cabinet 2 With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible locate the slot that is almost vertical This slot is adjacent to the part number Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a wide blade 1 4 inch recommended into the slot and twist The retainer snap opens easily so that the cable can be removed 3 Atthe cabinet disconnect previously labeled cables associated with the carrier to be removed 4 Remove the back doors from the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 83 Remove Circuit Packs from Port Carrier B 1 To ensure that circuit packs and power units in the B carrier are properly replaced label each component with its slot number 2 Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the B carrier 3 Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier B Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging 4 Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit packs 5 Remove the front trim plate f
226. at 2 Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day Month Date Time and Increment fields for each rule for example 1 00 equals one hour gt NOTE You can change any rule except rule 0 zero You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens 3 When done press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability Set Date and Time Issue 1 April 2000 5 108 1 Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen FK DATE DATE AND TIME TIME Hour 20 Minute 30 Second XX Day of the Week Tuesday Month Day of the Month 8 Year February 2000 Type Standard lt A Daylight Savings Rule 0 Screen 5 3 Typical Date and Time Screen 2 Type the day of the week in English Sunday through Saturday See Table 5 17 for English day of the week names Table 5 17 English Day of the Week Names Day Number Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday N OD oO BR ow Pp Saturday DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 109 3 The cursor is positioned on the
227. at system At a presale site inspection the remediation process checks the vintages of existing circuit packs to be reused in the Release 8 system Replace all unusable vintage circuit packs with current vintages Refer to Technical Quarterly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages Change Notices and to the Software Release Letter for information about usable circuit pack vintages For information about usable vintages of non U S circuit packs refer to the ITAC Tech Alert from your regional distributor DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Read This First 2 3 Software Upgrade Release 8 software and translations are saved to removable media Although the translations automatically update to Release 8 several features require special attention because of screen changes or potential naming conflicts in the process Between customer confirmation and the actual update or upgrade check the screens to ensure the translations meet the customer s needs After rebooting the system enter these translations either locally or remotely If done remotely Contact Field Support Administration Center FSAC for the remote entry For information to make the required changes refer to m DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide Required Tools This upgrade may require the following t
228. ays be 2 translation cards on site with the system Do not send a system or backup translation card to STS 1 Install the spare translation card into the TN777B on the existing system 2 Type save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation card gt NOTE The off site STS translation upgrade does not preserve the content of recorded announcements Therefore during the upgrade any announcements stored on a TN750 B circuit pack must be re recorded 3 Remove the spare translation card and insert the system translation card 4 Mail the spare translation card to STS with next day delivery DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Preliminary Procedures 3 9 Check Software Release Letter 1 Check the Software Release Letter that accompanies the Release 8 removable media This letter contains the recommended upgrade procedures Always use the Software Release Letter when upgrading a system 2 f the letter is not included with the Release 8 removable media perform the following procedures Busyout Multimedia Interface Circuit Packs Perform this step only if the system is high or critical reliability and contains MMCH circuit packs Multimedia to voice station calls are not preserved on an upgrade Failure to busy out the
229. binet 5 Cabinet Clips 3 Port Cabinet Figure 3 18 Location of Cabinet Clips DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 52 Install Cable Clamps 1 Behind the cabinets using screws provided install 2 cable clamps on each ground plate See Figure 3 19 These clamps hold the port cables OK b cadf008 CJL 103096 Figure Notes 1 Port Cabinet 3 Cable Clamps 2 Control Cabinet 4 Ground Plate Figure 3 19 Location of Ground Plate and Cable Clamps Retranslate Port Circuits If port circuit packs in the Release 5 6si control cabinet were relocated in order to m Use a TN748B to replace the tone detector circuits on a TN756 m Puta critical port circuit pack requiring longer nominal battery holdover a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack in a port slot m Puta TN570 El circuit pack in port slot 1 or port slot 2 for a second EPN m Puta TN755B power supply in port slots 16 and 17 1 Verify the port circuit packs were retranslated during the off site software upgrade If not retranslate them now Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upg
230. ble 2 3 English Day of the Week Names Day Number Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday o cic n Saturday 3 Type the current month in English January through December in the Month field See Table 2 4 for English month names When done press Tab to move to next field Table 2 4 English Month Names Number Name Number Name 1 January 7 July 2 February 8 August 3 March 9 September 4 April 10 October 5 May 11 November 6 June 12 December 4 Type the day of month 1 through 31 in the Day of the Month field and press Tab to move to the next field 5 Type the current year in the Year field and press TAB to move to the next field 6 Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock in the Hour field and press Tab to move to the next field 7 Type the current minute 0 through 59 in the Minute field seconds cannot be set When done press Tab to move to next field DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 19 8 Type standard or daylight savings in the Type field according to the current time in the local time zone For example if currently on standard time type standard 9 Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rule field 10 When all the infor
231. ble3 5 Numbers and Lengths of D 1 CONV to EI SNI Cables Connection Type Comcode Number Length Within same carrier 847245750 1 foot 0 305 m Between 2 carriers in 846448768 5 5 feet 1 677 m same port network Between 2carriersin 846448776 and one 1 foot 0 3 5 m used with two adjacent networks 846885259 bracket 9823As amp one 20 foot 6 1 m fiber optic cable DS1 CONV Cabling to the Public Network Use the running list that accompanies the upgrade equipment to determine which cable connects where The following paragraphs only provide conceptual information about wiring a DS1 CONV interface to a wall field block not step by step procedures for wiring a specific Release 8r system If already connected to either an expansion or switch node interface a DS1 CONV circuit pack already resides either in an EPN expansion control carrier or in a PPN port carrier or switch node carrier Depending on the traffic requirements between the 2 port networks a 25 foot 7 625 m H600 348 cable extends from the piggy back connector on each DS1 CONV to EI SNI cable to from 1 to 4 CSUs This cable branches to four 15 pin subminiature D type connectors labeled 01 to 04 to make the CSU connections Then in turn the CSUs connect to the wall field block corresponding to the equipment location of the D81 CONV at port connections 8 7 6 and 5 in descending order Neglecting overhead this
232. bled when upgrading from IR1 Release 8 to GD 91 software it may be necessary to modify the Call Type field on the ARS Analysis screen to unk for all call types except iop or int After the upgrade the Software Associate should check these forms to ensure the upgraded translations are appropriate for the customer s needs Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide for information to make any required changes ISDN Gateway When upgrading to a Release 8r upgrade the ISDN Gateway if installed to the correct software release Call progress messages to the ISDN Gateway may be intermittently lost therefore this upgrade must occur at the same time as the system upgrade Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for the correct software release Single Mode Fiber Attenuators Attenuators may be required when using single mode fiber See the table below 106060718 5 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection 106060734 10 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection 106061021 15 dB attenuator 2 for each fiber connection A different value attenuator may be required even though the fiber span is between the same 2 cabinets local and remote cabinet Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets for detailed fiber attenuator information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and A
233. bles provided with CSUs For 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind port carrier C of the multicarrier PPN See Figure 3 9 and Figure 3 10 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1C02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1C02 c Route the fiber optic cable from the lightwave transceiver to the cabinet s cable tray and down out of the cabinet to the EPN stack d Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control cabinet A EPN stack 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the lightwave transceiver at slot 2A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and place the coil either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8
234. c o 0o oOc1 Cc T9 September eo October November ine December DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 GS8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Install the Release 8r Cabinets 4 15 5 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month field Type the day of month 1 through 31 and press Tab to move to the next field 6 The cursor is positioned on the Year field Type the current year and press TAB to move to the next field 7 The cursor is positioned on the Hour field Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock Press Tab to move to the next field 8 The cursor is positioned on the Minute field Type current minute 0 through 59 Seconds cannot be set 9 Type standard or daylight savings in the Type field 10 Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rule field 11 Press Enter when the information is correct 12 Type display time and press Enter to verify date time data Re Record Announcements TN750 B 1 Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide to record announcements gt NOTE The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in non volatile memory re recording the announcements is not needed Copy Announcements TN750 B 1 If the system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack type display announcement
235. carrier Add each new port carrier to a port network in the B C D E order of carrier positions Before proceeding with the addition of a port carrier ensure that 3 TN1650B Memory Circuit Packs exist in the system Refer to the section entitled Remove the Circuit Packs on page 1 11 for installation instructions Before proceeding with the addition of a port carrier ensure that the TN1657 Disk Drive is of Vintage 4 or higher Refer to Chapter 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory for installation instructions Service Interruption 1 Since the addition of port carriers requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will take place Verify System Status 1 Before proceeding examine the system for alarms Every problem should be corrected The system must be alarm free Disable Alarm Origination 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Makea note of the Alarm Origination Activated field If the feature is enabled type n in this field to disable Alarm Origination You will enable this feature again in 1 of the final processes A WARNING If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the switch the switch may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble tickets is critical for measuring the quality of Lucent services and products gt NOTE F
236. ceiver Be sure to label the cable At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4 install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 3 4D03 Connect the 20 foot 6 m fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier position D in Cabinet 4 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa gt NOTE Continue connecting the fiber cables in this manner until all fiber connections are made Be sure to add links to PNs in alternating order 20 and 2 19 and 3 18 and 4 and so forth Connect an H600 278 Metallic Cable from Slot 1 in the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 4 4A01 to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4 4E19 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 33 LI NS P SS LUU SS MUM S IP SS I SS ZK CE IP SS PUNANNA MUM NN V WO V 7 VA cadf030 PDH 111196 7 Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 3 Cabinet 2 3 and 5 through 16 MCC or SCC 2 Cabinet 4 MCC EPN with One EPNs H600 278 Metallic Cable Duplex Switch Node
237. cements and press Enter 2 If administered recorded announcements are listed type save announcements cabinet carrier slot and press Enter For example 01D03 This takes about 30 minutes gt NOTE For some software loads type save announcements from cabinet carrier slot Type help and press Enter for complete command usage Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk and press Enter to write all information from the disk to the backup tape This takes 30 to 40 minutes DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 7 Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 To prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the update or upgrade type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 If scheduled maintenance has begun setthe Stop Time field to 1 minute after the current time or If scheduled maintenance has not begun set the Start Time field to a time after the upgrade is completed For example if you start the upgrade at 8 00 p m and the upgrade takes 90 minutes set the Start Time field to 21 30 A CAUTION If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 Type neither in the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field and press Enter gt NOTE For some soft
238. ces Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade Type change system parameters offer options and press Enter Setthe Activate Offer field to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know the offer category along with the model to determine the system capacities limits and allowable hardware Press Enter to effect the changes When done contact the field technician Contact the requester when done DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Upgrade Completion 4 18 Save Translations 1 Back Up Disk 1 2 Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto disk If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade the following error message displays when logging in Ah WARNING Translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately gt NOTE The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files Type test stored data long and press Enter This instructs the system to verify the consistency of the MSS files on the disk and removable media Return Replaced Equipment T Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking
239. ch EPN 2 Temporarily disconnect the lightwave transceivers and fiber optic cables from the appropriate carriers 3 Replace the back doors or back panels previously removed 4 Atthe EPN cabinet reconnect the lightwave transceivers fiber optic cables and the connector cables associated with the carrier being replaced 5 Install the front door on the EPN cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 111 Power Up the EPN Cabinets 1 At each EPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON After about 40 seconds EPN power and PPN EPN communications return 2 After power returns to each EPN and all trouble is cleared verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode Retranslate Port Circuits If port circuit packs were relocated in order to put m Acritical port circuit pack requiring longer nominal battery holdover such as a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack in a port slot m ATN736 TN752 or TN755 power supply in port slots 18 and 19 m ATN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface in port slot 1 m A TN776 or TN570 in port slot 2 for a second directly connected EPN of the new expansion control carrier verify that they were retranslated during the off site software upgrade If
240. ch G2 circuit pack reused in the upgrade conforms to the usable vintage requirements for a Release 8 system see Heference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices Remove Power Failure Ground Wire Remove the 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm ground wire from the power failure transfer unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 36 Boot the Release 8 System 1 a fF OO Io Connect the PC to the TERMINAL connector behind PPN control carrier A or install the G3 MA according to the Set Up G3 MA chapter of DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Management Applications Operations Insert the translation card in the TN794 faceplate Atthe EPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON Atthe PPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process loading default system translations from the translation card This takes 8 to 11 minutes Getthe order number of the upgrade and call the regional CSA to request an init login so that the right to use options can be enabled on the upgraded system To use Access Security Gateway ASG see Appendix C Access Security Gateway DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Addition
241. change system parameters customer options and press Enter Use this screen to enable the customer s right to use options on the upgrade order See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide for details Type change site data and press Enter Use this screen to assign system specific information such as building floor stations and so forth Type save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation card A CAUTION If the terminal screen displays translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately an error was detected in the translations Call your Lucent Technologies representative Reconnect Cables to Upgraded EPN Cabinet 1 At the power distribution unit of the upgraded EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF gt NOTE Powering down an EPN without powering down the PPN will set off alarms However these alarms should clear after power is restored to each EPN Temporarily disconnect the lightwave transceivers and fiber optic cables from the appropriate carriers 3 Replace the rear doors or rear panels previously removed At the EPN cabinet reconnect the lightwave transceivers fiber optic cables and the connector cables Install the front door on the EPN cabinet if previously removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrad
242. change system parameters offer options and press Enter Ifthe Activate Offer field is n set it to y and press Tab A warning message lets you know whether you need to save translations and reboot to make the change permanent Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes Contact the requester when done Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto disk If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade the following error message displays when logging in A WARNING Translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately gt NOTE The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 43 Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files 2 Type test stored data long and press Enter This instructs the system to verify the consistency of the MSS files on the disk and removable media Return Replaced Equipment Return unused G2 equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issu
243. connect the power cord to the power unit in the B carrier 8 At the power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to OFF Install Circuit Packs 1 Install the new Release 8 control circuit packs into carriers A and B Use the new decal and the annotated list configuration all provided with the Release 8 translation card as a guide gt NOTE Currently both TN768 Tone Clock circuit packs reside in port slots of the universal module being upgraded As part of this step relocate these circuit packs to the TONE CLOCK slot of carrier A and port slot 1 of carrier B 2 For a directly connected critical reliability Release 8 system with 2 port networks ensure that the PPN and this EPN are both equipped with 2 TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs For a directly connected system with 3 port networks ensure that the PPN and each EPN have 4 TN776s or TN570s DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 91 Interconnect Port Networks Critical Reliability Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823A lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 4 900 feet 1493 m apart Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823B lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 25 000 feet 7620 m apart gt NOTE These distance limits are approximate measurements o
244. connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel on the power failure transfer panel 2 Route the opposite end of the wire to an approved ground and connect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 47 Disconnect Cables 1 With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible 4B or 4C locate the slot that is almost vertical This slot is adjacent to the part number Insert a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and twist The retainer will snap open easily Remove the cable 2 Disconnect the cables associated with the carrier to be removed 3 Remove the rear doors from the cabinet 4 Remove all of the rear panels Two different types of screws hold the panels to the cabinet Remove the 10 screws with a screwdriver or a 1 4 inch socket Remove the 12 screws with a screwdriver or a 5 16 inch Socket Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carrier A 1 To ensure that power units in the A carrier are properly replaced label each power unit with its slot number 2 Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the A carrier 3 Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier A Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging 4 Remove the circuit pack blanks from the empty slots 5 Remove the front trim plate from the A c
245. connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 2 easier 3 Route the fiber cable to the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 4 Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A 10 11 12 13 14 lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Be sure to label the cable Atthe rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expa
246. ctly connects two private switching systems time division multiplex TDM bus A bus that is time shared regularly by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter In a PBX all port circuits are connected to the TDM bus permitting any port to send a signal to any other port time division multiplexing TDM Multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots See also multiplexing time interval The period of time either one hour or one half hour that BCMS measurements are collected for a report time slice See time interval time slot 64 kbps of digital information structured as eight bits every 125 microseconds In the switch a time slot refers to either a DSO on a T1 or E1 facility or a 64 kbps unit on the TDM bus or fiber connection between port networks time slot sequence integrity The situation whereby the N octets of a wideband call that are transmitted in one T1 or E1 frame arrive at the output in the same order that they were introduced to control An application can invoke Third Party Call Control capabilities using either an adjunct control or domain control association to monitor An application can receive event reports on an active notification adjunct control or domain control association TOD Time of day tone ringer A device with a speaker used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user TOP Task oriented protocol trunk A dedicated telecommunications channel bet
247. cuit packs For a directly connected high reliability Release 8 system with 2 port networks ensure the PPN and this EPN are both equipped with a TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack For a directly connected system with 3 port networks ensure that the PPN and each EPN have two TN776 or TN570 circuit packs Interconnect Port Networks High Reliability Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823A lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 4 900 feet 1493 m apart Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823B lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 25 000 feet 7620 m apart A 300A fiber optic lightwave transceiver can interconnect PNs up to 115 000 feet 21 7 miles 35 km apart gt NOTE These distance limits are approximate measurements of the actual fiber right of way not of the shortest linear distance between the 2 endpoints gt NOTE It is important to label every cable that you install gt NOTE Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave transceiver This section provides figures offering the suggested way of making these connections The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled either TX transmit or RX receive while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered either 1 or 2 A viable fiber connection is only made when both fibers in each cable 1 and 2 route from the TX connector of a port network
248. d in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervi sion signaling is in violation of Part 68 Rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network Permissible exceptions are Acallis unanswered A busy tone is received e A reorder tone is received Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Nom rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks See the preface of this document Ordering Information Call Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 International Voice 317 322 6416 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Fax 317 322 6699 Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center 2855 N Franklin Road Indianapolis IN 46219 Document No 555 233 115 Comcode 108678335 Issue 1 April
249. d locations on an ISDN PRI facility Note that this term comes from T1 terminology one fourth of a T1 but there are five quadrants on an E1 ISDN PRI facility 30B D queue An ordered sequence of calls waiting to be processed queuing The process of holding calls in order of their arrival to await connection to an attendant to an answering group or to an idle trunk Calls are automatically connected in first in first out sequence R RAM See random access memory RAM random access memory RAM A storage arrangement whereby information can be retrieved at a speed independent of the location of the stored information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 42 RBS Robbed bit signaling RC Radio controller RCL Restricted call list read only memory ROM A storage arrangement primarily for information retrieval applications recall dial tone Tones signalling that the system has completed a function such as holding a call and is ready to accept dialing redirection criteria Information administered for each voice terminal s coverage path that determines when an incoming call is redirected to coverage Redirection on No Answer An optional feature that redirects an unanswered ringing ACD call after an administered number of rings The call is then redirected back to the agent remote home numbering
250. d on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack logged to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if applicable Manual In work mode One of four agent work modes the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call manually See Auto In Work mode for a contrast MAP Maintenance action process MAPD Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY MA UUI Message Associated User to User Signaling Mbps Megabits per second M Bus Memory bus Mbyte Megabyte MCC Multicarrier cabinet MCS Message Center Service MCT Malicious Call Trace DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Glossary and Abbreviations MCU Multipoint control unit MDF Main distribution frame MDM Modular data module MDR Message detail record MEM Memory memory Issue 1 April 2000 GL 32 A device into which information can be copied and held and from which information can later be obtained memory shadowing link An operating system condition that provides a method for memory resident programs to be more quickly accessed allowing a system to reboot faster message center An answering service that supplies agents to and stores messages for later retrieval message center agent A member of a message center hunt group who takes and retrieves messages for voice terminal Users MET Multibutton electronic t
251. dditions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability SLOT 21 SLOT 21 e TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L6 SLOT 21 TDM LAN BUS TERMINATOR ZAHF4 Issue 1 April 2000 6 117 J SEE AN ul PORT CARRIER J58890BB C POSITION TDM LAN CABLE 7 7 WP91716 L6 ICCD Z ICCC u CONTROL CARRIER J58890AP 1 B POSITION pee Lo INTERCARRIER CABLES C AND D LM H600 182 AND WP 91954 gt j J58890AP 1 l A POSITION CONTROL ICCD ccc CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L7 J58890SA 1 D POSITION Z SLOT 01 SWITCH NODE CARRIER TDM LAN BUS TDM LAN CABLE TERMINATOR WP91716 L6 ZAHF4 SLOT 01 TAAL serosa E POSITION SWITCH NODE CARRIER REAR VIEW NOTE ON PORT CARRIER J68890BB 1 CONNECT TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02 ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB 2 AND 3 CONNECT THE TDM LAN CABLE OR TDM LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 1 Figure 6 42 TDM LAN Connections for Critical Reliability R8r PPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 118 Table 6 10 TDM L
252. dditions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Task Tables 3 6 Task Tables Table 3 1 provides the high level tasks to perform the upgrades in this chapter Table 3 1 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r System Y Task Description Page Make Spare Translation Card and Mail to STS for Upgrade 3 8 Busyout Multimedia Interface Circuit Packs 3 9 Save Translations and Announcements 3 9 Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance 3 12 Label Cables 3 12 Check Link Status 3 12 Disable TTI 3 12 Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 3 13 Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 3 13 Power Down Existing System 3 13 Disconnect Power and Ground 3 14 Install Emergency Transfer Ground Wire 3 14 Disconnect Equipment and Cables 3 14 Remove Circuit Packs 3 14 Disconnect TDM LAN Cables and ICC Cables 3 15 Remove the Existing Control Cabinet 3 15 Unpack and Install Expansion Control Cabinet 3 15 Install Port Cabinets 3 15 Install Circuit Packs 3 16 Change Cabinet Address Plugs 3 16 Install TDM LAN Bus Terminators 3 18 Connect TDM LAN Cables and ICC Cables 3 20 Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic Cabling Standard 3 22 Reliability Release 8r Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic Cabling High Reliability 3 27 Release 8r Continued on next page
253. de of the rear covers to the other EPN stack d Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 30 4 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 3 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 3A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the lightwave transceiver at slot 3A02 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it with a cable tie to a leg of an EPN cable clamp 9 II NW gu MMs Wit LEL MUMU W W P SS PI AR NM RA NSW lw Iw U U cadfo21 PDH 101596 U Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 3 Cabinet Stack 3 EPN 2 2 Cabinet Stack 2 EPN 1 Figure 3 9 High Reliability Release 8r with 2 or 3 Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Addi
254. dentifier split See ACD work mode split condition A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with an attendant A split condition automatically occurs when the attendant active on a call presses the start button split number The split s identity to the switch and BCMS split report A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits split agent status report A report that provides real time status and measurement data for internally measured agents and the split to which they are assigned SSI Standard serial interface SSM Single site management SSV Station service ST3 Stratum 3 clock board staffed Indicates that an agent position is logged in A staffed agent functions in one of four work modes Auto In Manual In ACW or AUX Work STARLAN Star Based Local Area Network Station Message Detail Recording SMDR An obsolete term now called CDR a switch feature that uses software and hardware to record call data See Call Detail Recording CDR standard serial interface SSI A communications protocol developed for use with 500 type business communications terminals BCTs and 400 series printers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 46 status lamp A green light that shows the status of a call appearance or a feature button by
255. der Facility A To activate the desired Bit Rate the toggle switch on the circuit pack must be set and it must correspond to the Bit Rate a Idle Code MSB 1 LSB 8 Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654 Enter 8 digits each digit must be 0 or 1 The second digit must be 1 Default is 11101000 You can administer this field on a per circuit pack basis DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 19 a CRC Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654 and the Bit Rate is 2 048 Mbps Enter yes to receive a yellow 2 alarm for E1 operation Default is no You can administer this field on a per circuit pack basis a Line Termination A display only field for DS1 Converter circuit packs that are TN1654 and have a Bit Rate of 2 048 Mbps It identifies facility connections as CEPT 75 ohm coaxial or 120 ohm CEPT twisted pair Duplicated DS1 Converter Complex Administration for E1 TN1654 Circuit Packs See the previous sections for screen layout and field definitions A fiber link next Page 3 of 3 N FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION B PNC DS1 CONVERTER DS1CONV ATTRIBUTES DS1CONV Board Location 01C01 DS1CONV Board Location 02C01 DS1CONV Board Type TN1654 DS1CONV Board Type TN1654 DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES A B o D Facility Installed yes yes yes no Bit Rate 2 048 Faci
256. dministered on Page 2 of this form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 11 Duplicated Fiber Link Administration Ju fiber link next Page 1 of 3 N FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION Fiber Link Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex yes ENDPOINT ENDPOINT 2 A PNC A PNC Board Location 01E01 Board Location 02A01 Board Type ei Board Type ei DS1CONV Board Location 01B01 DS1CONV Board Location 02B01 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 ENDPOINT ENDPOINT 2 B PNC B PNC Board Location 01D01 Board Location 02A02 Board Type ei Board Type ei DS1CONV Board Location 01C01 DS1CONV Board Location 02C01 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 s P Screen 6 2 Fiber Link Administration form page 1 of 3 The following fields appear when Administration of PNC Duplication is enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form m Fiber Link Display only field From the command line enter a 1 to 3 digit number to uniquely identify a switch connection in the system and its duplicate if appropriate Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex Enter yes to specify that a DS1 converter complex is used to remote one endpoint If yes is entered A PNC and B PNC DS1 Converter DS1CONYV Attributes must be administered on Pages
257. ds to indicate a conflict For Release 8r the number of slot fields displayed represents administrable slots for the given carrier type DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 3 Administer Fiber Links on Simplex Systems Administer the TN570 Expansion Interface and the TN574 or TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit packs 1 Type change circuit packs and press Enter Scroll through the pages on the form until the carrier containing the new circuit packs displays on the Screen 3 Enter the circuit packs into the appropriate slot locations on the form Press Enter when finished Type list fiber and press Enter All administered fiber connections display 4 If a previously used fiber link is to be reused enter add fiber lt number gt and press Enter If this is a new fiber link type add fiber next and press Enter The Fiber Link Administration screen appears Each fiber link is identified by a fiber number a Type y or nin the field Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter complex and press Enter Enter the location of the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit packs for both ENDPOINT 1 and ENDPOINT 2 Scroll to page 2 of the form Enter y as applicable in each Facility Installed field A B C and D Inthe Bit Rate field type either 1 544 T1 or 2 048 E1 Ente
258. e 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 44 High Reliability Required Hardware The equipment in Table 5 10 must be on site before the upgrade begins To place a claim for missing equipment as part of the Streamlined Implementation process call 1 800 772 5409 or the number provided by your Lucent Technologies representative Table 5 10 Required Hardware Equipment Description Quantity J58890A Processor Port Network 1 PEC 6300 05X J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier 1 106647985 TN775B Maintenance 1 103557294 TN776 Expansion Interface 20r6 103281 788 TN570 Expansion Interface 2or6 1 J58890TO 1 L1 Removable Media 4 407439975 20 Foot Multi mode Fiber Optic Cable 10r 3 106455348 9823 A Lightwave Transceiver 20r6 106455363 9823 B Lightwave Transceiver 20r6 1 Use 2 for a high reliability system with 2 port networks 6 with 3 port networks Either 1 or 4 Expansion Interfaces Els ship loose with the EPN equipment The factory has installed either 1 or 2 Els in the new PPN 2 Required port network interfaces in a Release 8 system with the optional packet bus 3 Use 2 or 6 if the PPN and EPN s are remotely located The fiber that previously connected an upgraded G2 universal module not a traditional module to the G2 TMS has the correct transceiver connectors and therefore can be reused 4 One pair for each
259. e 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Task Tables 2 6 Table 2 2 Upgrade tasks Continued Task Description Page Save Translations 2 15 Save Announcements if necessary 2 15 Restore Disk 2 15 Upgrade Software 2 15 Reset SPE status H C only 2 16 Set Daylight Savings Rules 2 16 Set Date and Time 2 17 Set Core Dump Vector 2 19 Enable TTI 2 19 Release MMI H C only 2 19 Resolve Alarms 2 19 Check Link Status 2 19 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 2 19 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 2 20 Check SPE status H C only 2 20 Save Translations 2 20 Save Announcements if necessary 2 21 Back Up Disk 2 21 Return Replaced Equipment 2 21 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 7 Upgrade the software and hardware Check SPE 1 Type status spe and press Enter to check the health of the SPE For high or critical reliability systems m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to write all translation information from memory to the disk which takes about 2 minutes Save Announcements if necessary gt NOTE The TN750C Annou
260. e DS1 Converter Facilities heading for each DS1 facility connected to ENDPOINT 2 see Table 6 15 The DS1 line signal is pre equalized at the transmitter so that DS1 line pulses are the correct amplitude and shape when they reach the Network Interface The amount of equalization necessary is determined by the distance to the Network Interface when the endpoint supplies a DSX 1 interface and also by the type of wiring used to connect to the Network Interface The types of wiring allowed are 22 gauge ABAM shielded twisted pair cable 24 gauge Premises Distribution System PDS wiring and 26 gauge PDS wiring Facility A Circuit ID Displays when the value in Facility Installed for Facility A is yes Enter up to 40 characters to identify the cabinet carrier and slot of the DS1 Converter circuit pack s physical location Similarly Facility B Circuit ID Facility C Circuit ID and Facility D Circuit ID fields display for each of the DS1 Converter Facilities when yes is entered in the corresponding Facility Installed field DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 16 Duplicated DS1C Converter Complex Administration for TN574 Circuit Packs m fiber link next Page 3 of 3 N FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION B PNC DS1 CONVERTER DS1CONV ATTRIBUTES DS1CONV Board Location 01C01 DS1CONV Board Location 02C01 DS1C
261. e DS1 facility because a 1 is arbitrarily written into the second position of each byte Thus if no measures are taken to prevent it ami zcs line coding results in data corruption The DS1CONV circuit pack protects the packet facility one of up to four facilities dynamically allocated by the DS1 CONV circuit pack from corruption through a special escape mechanism When b8zs line coding is used it maintains DS1 facility s ones density requirements by encoding a zero data byte into a specific unique pattern of bipolar violations on the DS1 line The opposite end recognizes this pattern and replaces it with a zero data byte when the data is recovered at the receiving end gt NOTE Note that although the esf framing mode and b8zs line coding are the preferable modes of operation you should confirm that the DS1 facilities support them before selecting this line coding Framing Mode Enter the framing format esf default or d4 in the A B C and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading for each DS1 facility gt NOTE The D4 format is supported by the Converter circuit packs but because of problems inherent with this format specifically inability to frame on a bit stream that contains data that emulates the D4 framing pattern its use is discouraged DS1CONV 1 Line Compensation Enter the line compensation 1 to 5 in the A B C and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading for each DS1 facility co
262. e Onboard LAN Connections To test the onboard LAN connections ping the IP Interface server and the processor on the TN802B IP Interface 1 Click Start Programs Command Prompt 2 Type ping 7192 11 13 9 which is the IP address of the internal IP Interface server If everything is configured correctly the system responds with the following message Reply from 192 11 13 9 bytes 32 time lt ms TTL If no response verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 73 3 Atthe command prompt type ping 192 11 13 8 which is the IP address of the internal processor m If you have connectivity the system responds with the following message Reply from 192 11 13 8 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL m f no response verify the IP settings for Adapter 1 4 Type exit and press Enter The TN802B IP Interface is now installed in the DEFINITY carrier and connected to the IP network You can now use the Configuration Manager software preinstalled on the TN802B hard disk and DEFINITY ECS switch administration to administer connections to other IP Trunk and ITS E equipment Upgrading a TN802 V3 or later to a TN802B MedPro mode If you have a TN802 V3 or later IP Interface you must either replace it
263. e PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A01 Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager 3 Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1 Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1B02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3B02 Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceive
264. e TN802 Press the recessed reset button on the faceplate see Figure 6 26 until the LCD shows a flashing MSHUT When the flashing stops and the asterisk disappears about 2 min reseat the circuit pack to restart the system or on the SAT a Type busyout board UUCSS and press Enter b Type reset board UUCSS and press Enter c Type release board UUCSS and press Enter Once the system is completely initialized the LCD reads MEDPRO A WARNING When connected remotely via DCANYWHERE only use the pcANYWHERE Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to restart Windows NT 11 Affix the new TN802B label to the circuit pack 12 Disconnect the monitor keyboard and mouse DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 78 Circuit Pack Verification 1 Type change circuit pack and press Enter 2 Check the Code column to see if it says DSMAPD or MedPro change circuit packs Page 1 of 5N CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier A Carrier Type processor Slot Code Sf Mode Name Slot Code Sf Mode Name Tig MEDPRO RESERVED IP 01 TN754 DIGITAL LINE 123 MEDPRO RESERVED IP 02 TN758 POOLED MODEM 133 TN802 B MAPD BOARD 03 TN2144 ANALOG LINE 14 04 TN746 B ANALOG LINE 153 05 16 06 TN77 C MAINTENANCE TEST 07 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 08 TN2140 E amp M TIE TRUNK 09 TN767 E DS
265. e channels on the same physical interface FAS Facility associated signaling FAT Facility access trunk FAX Facsimile FCC Federal Communications Commission FEAC Forced Entry of Account Codes feature A specifically defined function or service provided by the system feature button A labeled button on a telephone or attendant console used to access a specific feature FEP Front end processor FIC Facility interface codes fiber optics A technology using materials that transmit ultrawideband electromagnetic light frequency ranges for high capacity carrier systems fixed A trunk allocation term In the fixed allocation scheme the time slots necessary to support a wideband call are contiguous and the first time slot is constrained to certain starting points flexible A trunk allocation term In the flexible allocation scheme the time slots of a wideband call can occupy noncontiguous positions within a single T1 or E1 facility floating A trunk allocation term In the floating allocation scheme the time slots of a wideband call are contiguous but the position of the first time slot is not fixed FNPA Foreign Numbering Plan Area foreign exchange FX A CO other than the one providing local access to the public telephone network foreign exchange trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects the system to a CO other than its local CO foreign numbering plan area code FNPAC An area code other than
266. e current announcements by typing save announcements disk and pressing Enter Type backup disk and press Enter This instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the system tape s Update backup tape s if required Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down A CAUTION Make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system A WARNING a A W I Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway See the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 96 Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 Shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down Ref
267. e manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 84 3 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet throug
268. e or data terminal Primary Rate Interface PRI A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems PRI runs at 1 544 Mbps and as used in North America provides 23 64 kbps B channels voice or data and one 64 kbps D channel signaling The D channel is the 24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels PRI endpoint PE The wideband switching capability introduces PRI endpoints on switch line side interfaces A PRI endpoint consists of one or more contiguous B channels on a line side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility and has an extension Endpoint applications have call control capabilities over PRI endpoints principal A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals principal user A person to whom a telephone is assigned and who has message center coverage private network A network used exclusively for the telecommunications needs of a particular customer private network office code RNX The first three digits of a 7 digit private network number PROCR Processor processor carrier See control carrier processor data module PDM A device that provides an RS 232C DCE interface for connecting to data terminals applications processors APs and host computers and provides a DCP interface for connection to a communications system See also modular processor data module MPDM proce
269. e other carriers because it comes with 16 new grounding jumpers and 8 mounting screws 2 Place the control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up 3 Verify that the 2 AHF111 processor bus PX terminators are installed on the B carrier to the pin field blocks marked PX top portion of slots 4 and 10 The PX terminators are attached with the components on the left side as viewed from the rear Install New Control Carrier B Install the J58890AP control carrier in position B by lining up the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips will support the carrier while the screws are being replaced Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self tapping screws saved from the removal of the old carrier A CAUTION Carefully realign the threads on the self tapping screws by turning them clockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the threads out of the framework Behind the carrier replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old carrier These are frame ground screws Connect the P1 small connector to the B carrier To get enough slack in the cables cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable from the upright in the area being installed Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connectio
270. e save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory to the translation card Ay WARNING If the terminal screen displays translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately an error was detected in the translations Reconnect Cables 1 At the power distribution unit of the upgraded EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF gt NOTE Powering down an EPN without powering down the PPN will set off alarms However these alarms should clear after power is restored to each EPN 2 Temporarily disconnect the lightwave transceivers and fiber optic cables already labeled from the appropriate carriers 3 Replace the back doors or back panels 4 Atthe EPN cabinet reconnect the lightwave transceivers fiber optic cables and the connector cables associated with the carrier being replaced 5 Install the front door on the EPN cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 72 Power Up the EPN Cabinets 1 At each EPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON After about 40 seconds EPN power and PPN EPN communications return 2 After power returns to each EPN and all trouble is cleared verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to
271. e tone clock H C only through Verify Interchange H C only Affix position label s 1 Place the new strip label s over the old carrier label s DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 16 Verify software version gt NOTE The Tape Resident field shows the software load number Write it down for use later If standard reliability 1 Type list configuration software version and press Enter to verify that the removable media contains the Release 8 software This takes about 2 minutes If high or critical reliability 1 Type list configuration software version long and press Enter to verify that the removable media contains the Release 8 software Save Translations 1 Type save translations tape and press Enter to save translations to the new removable media which takes about 2 minutes Save Announcements if necessary 1 Type save announce tape and press Enter to save announcements to the new removable media Restore Disk If standard reliability 1 Type restore disk full and press Enter to write the new software to disk Release 8 system software is now resident on the disk If high or critical reliability 2 Type restore disk full both and press Enter to write the new software to disk gt NOTE This command may take up to 25
272. ease 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 67 Microsoft TCP IP Properties 1 Digital Semiconductor 21041 based Ethernet Controller 192 41 13 3 255 255 255 0 5 Verify that the Adapter drop down menu lists 2 DEC Ethernet adapters A CAUTION Do not change any settings on the adapter labeled 1 for any reason 6 Select the DEC Ethernet adapter labeled 2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 68 10 Microsoft TCP IP Properties 2 Digital Semiconductor 21143 based 10 100 mpbs Ethernet M 255 255 255 0 Type a valid IP address for the IP Interface server in the IP Address field Type the appropriate subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field gt NOTE Not all networks require steps 9 through 18 Check with the local network administrator to determine which are required If you use gateways type the IP address of the default gateway for the IP Interface server in the Default Gateway field Click on the DNS tab and verify that the domain DNS server is correct DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Asse
273. ect Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu Select Restart System from the Reset System menu Label Main Distribution Frame 1 Label the MDF with the new PN number of the Release 8r EPN The STS software upgrade assigns the next PN number after the highest numbered PN in the Release 5 6si system to the upgraded EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 49 Reconnect Cables Behind each EPN cabinet power supply set the circuit breaker to OFF gt NOTE Powering down an EPN cabinet without powering down the PPN will set off alarms However these alarms should clear after power is restored to the EPN Replace all cables that were labeled and removed Install the top and bottom rear covers Be sure the correct rear covers are installed on the new J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet Do not use these rear covers on the port cabinets gt NOTE The rear covers for Release 8r control carriers may need 2 detents 1 for the TDM LAN cable and another for the ICC cables If the Release 5 6si was upgraded to a critical reliability Release 8r and the EPN was originally an R1V3 replace the lower rear cover of port cabinet B with a new cover 846307817 so the ICC cables and the new ground plate can be installed between cabinets A and B
274. ed as a serial stream of pulses digital trunk A circuit that carries digital voice and or digital data in a telecommunications channel DIOD Direct Inward and Outward Dialing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 18 direct agent A feature accessed only via ASAI that allows a call to be placed in a split queue but routed only to a specific agent in that split The call receives normal ACD call treatment for example announcements and is measured as an ACD call while ensuring that a particular agent answers Direct Extension Selection DXS A feature on an attendant console that allows an attendant direct access to voice terminals by pressing a group select button and a DXS button Direct Inward Dialing DID A feature that allows an incoming call from the public network not FX or WATS to reach a specific telephone without attendant assistance Direct Inward Dialing DID trunk An incoming trunk used for dialing directly from the public network into a communications system without help from the attendant disk drive An electromechanical device that stores data on and retrieves data from one or more disks distributed communications system DCS A network configuration linking two or more communications systems in such a way that selected features appear to operate as if the network were one system DIVA Data In Voice
275. ed daylight savings time rules If you have switches in several different time zones you can set up rules for each A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight savings time It also specifies the increment at which to transition gt NOTE The default daylight savings rule is 0 no daylight savings 1 Type change daylight savings rules and press Enter d S Stop DAYLIGHT Rule Change Day 0 No Daylight Savings 1 Start first Sunday om or Stop first Sunday on or 2 Start first on or Stop first on or 33 Start first on or Stop first on or 4 Start first on or Stop first on or 53 Start first on or Stop first on or 6 Start first on or Stop first on or T3 Start first on or first on or SAVINGS RULES Es Month Date Time Increment after April 1 at 2 00 01 00 after October 25 at 2 00 after at after at after at after at after at after at after at after at after at after at after at after at DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G 3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Install the Release 8r Cabinets 4 13 2 Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day Month Date Time and Increment for example 1 00 equals one hour fields for each rule gt NOTE You can change any r
276. ed installation technicians and provides procedures for upgrading existing systems to a DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 This book is intended to cover software and hardware upgrades and additions to existing systems only Other hardware installation procedures are in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets To add adjuncts and peripheral devices refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 7 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals Offer Categories Features are limited depending on the category purchased by the customer Offer Category A allows access to all DEFINITY features Offer Category B allows access to a subset of DEFINITY features Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Security Issues xvi Security Issues To ensure the greatest security possible for customers Lucent Technologies offers services that can reduce toll fraud liabilities Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more security information Login security is an attribute of the DEFINITY ECS software Existing passwords expire 24 hours after installation Access Security Gateway Feature Login security for the System Parameters Customer Options forms use the access security gateway inter
277. ed remotely through pcANYWHERE 21 Click on the pcANYWHERE Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to restart the computer If administered locally on a monitor keyboard and mouse 21 Click Yes in the dialog box to restart the computer Ax WARNING When connected remotely via pCcCANYWHERE only use the pc ANYWHERE Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to restart Windows NT Check Network Services When the server restarts make sure that the required network services have started correctly If you see an error dialog box then the network services did not start correctly Also check the NT Event Log 1 Click on My Computer Control Panel Network Services Make sure that the following services are listed m Computer Browser m Microsoft Internet Information Server 2 0 m NetBIOS Interface m RPC Configuration m Server m Workstation 2 Click the Protocols tab and examine the Network Protocols TCP IP protocol should be the only one listed 3 Click OK Test the External Connection to the LAN To test the external IP connections ping the IP Interface server and ping a known computer connected to your network 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Command Prompt 2 Type ping nnn nnn nnn nnn which is your IP address m f everything is configured correctly the system responds with the following message Reply from nnn nnn nnn nnn bytes 32 time lt ms TIL m f no respon
278. ed translations to the system disk which takes about 2 minutes DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 21 Save Announcements if necessary 1 Type save announcements and press Enter to copy announcements to the system disk Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk and press Enter to back up all changed files to the removable media This takes about 15 minutes 2 Type test stored data and press Enter to verify the consistency of the MSS files on the disk and removable media If standard reliability 3 Type list configuration software version and press Enter to verify all the files one last time If high or critical reliability 3 Type list configuration software version long and press Enter to verify all the files one last time Return Replaced Equipment 1 Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in the following books BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory 3 1 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade a Sin
279. eing upgraded to Release 8r cabinets were originally R1V3 port cabinets use the following steps to route a cable between an R1V3 upper cabinet and cabinet beneath it Do not run a new cable through the existing slot in the rear shelf of the upper cabinet a Loosen the 2 left connector panel screws then remove the other 2 connector panel screws b Attach the TDM LAN cable to the backplane and slide the cable between the connector panel and the rear shelf not through the existing slot in the shelf Route the cable along the bottom of the cabinet c Replace and tighten the connector panel screws 2 Fora critical reliability system connect the ICC cables as shown in Table 3 4 Figure 3 4 and Figure 3 5 gt NOTE For a duplicated cabinet do not use the ICC cables H600 259 G1 removed from the duplicated Release 5 6si PPN Use the new ICC cables H600 248 G1 supplied with the upgrade Table 3 4 Intercabinet Cable Connections Connect ICC Cables From To Carrier Pin Field Block Carrier Pin Field Block EPN J58890N ICCA J58890H ICCA ICCB ICCB 3 On the A carrier verify the CFY1 current limiter CURL connects to pinfield block 00 see Figure 3 4 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 21 o ICCB ICCA TERM 20 19 25 12
280. elease 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 28 For Either 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 see Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 and Figure 5 7 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 1A01 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 2A01 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m Atthe top of the cabinet coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable tray DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 29 For Two Col
281. elease 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 99 For Either 1 or 2 Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 see Figure 5 33 through Figure 5 35 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01 Connect the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver slot 2A01 Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager 3 Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1B01 Connect a fiber
282. eleases of software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification field before submitting the form CAUTION If Alarm Origination is not disabled the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System Ah WARNING Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet can damage the LAN Gateway disk 1 Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway for the procedure to log on When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu Select Shutdown from the Heset System menu a A O DY Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Remove the Present System 4 9 Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk 1 If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the system to be upgraded shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down Refer to DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures on page 4 19 2 Unseat the AUDIX assembly from
283. elephone MF Multifrequency MFB Multifunction board MFC Multifrequency code MHz Megahertz MIM Management information message minor alarm An indication of a failure that could affect customer service Minor alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack sent to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if applicable MIPS Million instructions per second MIS Management information system MISCID Miscellaneous identification DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 33 MMCS Multimedia Call Server MMCH Multimedia call handling MMI Multimedia interface MMS Material Management Services MO Maintenance object modem A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone circuits The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the circuit modem pooling A capability that provides shared conversion resources modems and data modules for cost effective access to analog facilities by data terminals When needed modem pooling inserts a conversion resource into the path of a data call Modem pooling serves both outgoing and incoming calls modular processor data module MPDM A processor data module PDM that can
284. eliminary Procedures 3 8 Preliminary Procedures During an upgrade STS must convert the Release 5 6si translations and write them to a Release 7r or later tape The tape is sent to STS for conversion During this time the customer should put a freeze on any new translations while the spare tape is being converted If not be sure the customer s switch administrator keeps detailed records of any translation changes made during that interval These records will facilitate the reassignment of any changes after the upgrade The new Release 8r removable media 1 with the converted translations 2 if duplicated must be on site before the upgrade begins Since a new Release 8r PPN is installed during the upgrade STS changes the PN number of the Release 5 6si PPN to be converted to a Release 8r EPN To minimize the renumbering of PNs and to minimize the rewiring and relabeling of the MDF the tape conversion assigns the next PN number after the highest numbered PN in the system to the Release 5 6si PPN to become a Release 8r EPN For example if a Release 5 6si system with 2 PNs a PPN and an EPN were upgraded to a Release 8r the tape conversion software assigns PN 1 to the new PPN and PN 3 to the additional EPN derived from the old Release 5 6si PPN Make Spare Translation Card and Mail to STS for Upgrade A spare translation card must be acquired from the remediation before upgrading the system For each processor there must alw
285. em 1 Reseat the AUDIX assembly into its backplane connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 132 Power Up MCC Port Network 1 2 At the MCC port network set the main circuit breaker to ON The system performs a level 4 rebooting process loading the system program and default translations from the disk Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes Refer to Initialization and Recovery and LED Interpretation chapters in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rr for circuit pack LED indications and management terminal displays that occur during system reboot After the system reboot is finished and all trouble cleared verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal operating mode Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System AA OO m Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu Select Restart System from the Reset System menu Enter Added Translations dy Enter added translation data as applicable using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise
286. em Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors are corrected 4 fthe system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter gt NOTE The TN750C Announcement circuit pack contains non volatile memory and does not require backup 5 If administered recorded announcements are listed type save announcements and press Enter 6 Remove the translation card and install the backup translation card Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Write down all enabled links 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for all links 3 Write down which links are in service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Remove the Present System 4 8 Disable TTI CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Make sure the ISDN is in service If not attempt to busy out and release the ISDN D channel link This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service 2 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 3 On the second screen set the Enabled field to n to de activate the TTI feature Disable Alarm Origination to INADS 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Type neither in the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field 3 For some r
287. emises station OPX Off premises extension OQT Oldest queued time OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act OSI Open Systems Interconnect OSS Operations Support System OSSI Operational Support System Interface OTDR Optical time domain reflectometer othersplit The work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split s call or in ACW for another split OTQ Outgoing trunk queuing outgoing gateway A PBxX that routes an incoming call on a trunk administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B P PACCON Packet control packet A group of bits including a message element which is the data and a control information element IE which is the header used in packet switching and transmitted as a discrete unit In each packet the message element and control IE are arranged in a specified format See also packet bus and packet switching DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 38 packet bus A wide bandwidth bus that transmits packets packet switching A data transmission technique whereby user information is segmented and routed in discrete data envelopes called packets each with its own appended control information for routing sequencing and error checking Packet switching allows a channel to be occupied only during t
288. emote cabinet Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets for detailed fiber attenuator information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add Circuit Packs 6 2 Add Circuit Packs When installing additional features or equipment it may be necessary to install additional circuit packs This is a general procedure to use when adding features or equipment that require adding circuit packs 1 Log onto the system and answer y to the Suppress Alarm Origination question during login 2 Install the circuit pack into the carrier 3 Log off the system after the addition and any required administration is complete For information about administering circuit packs and other equipment refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware List of Circuit Packs List of Circuit Packs Issue 1 April 2000 6 3 Table 6 1 lists the circuit packs sorted by apparatus code including circuit packs used in non United States installations Table 6 1 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Apparatus Code Name Type 631DA1 AC Power Unit Power
289. entration Highway SCSI See small computer system interface SCSI SDDN Software Defined Data Network SDI Switched Digital International SDLC Synchronous data link control SDN Software defined network SFRL Single frequency return loss SID Station identification number simplex system A system that has no redundant hardware simulated bridged appearance The same as a temporary bridged appearance allows the terminal user usually the principal to bridge onto a call that had been answered by another party on his or her behalf single carrier cabinet A combined cabinet and carrier unit that contains one carrier See also Multicarrier cabinet single line voice terminal A voice terminal served by a single line tip and ring circuit models 500 2500 7101A 7103A SIT Special information tones small computer system interface SCSI An ANSI bus standard that provides a high level command interface between host computers and peripheral devices SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SN Switch Node SNA Systems Network Architecture DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 45 SNC Switch Node Clock SNI Switch Node Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol software A set of computer programs that perform one or more tasks SPE Switch Processing Element SPID Service Profile I
290. eparate AC receptacle to support the new cabinet This AC receptacle must not be shared with any other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch For the convenience and safety of equipment room personnel the receptacle should not be located under the MDF gt NOTE The new AC powered PPN for a Release 8 upgrade has different power requirements than the G2 system Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 System Description Pocket Reference for information DC Isolator Each device connected to a DC powered cabinet from the asynchronous EIA RS 232 interface requires a 116A isolator Insert the isolator at the RS 232 interface between the device and the interface connector to isolate ground between the system and external adjuncts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 5 Power Failure Stations Software During routine system operation the ground for the power failure stations is derived from the system s auxiliary cable This ground is disconnected during the upgrade thus disabling the power failure stations Therefore a ground strap must be run to the power failure transfer panel Connect this strap shortly after removing power and disconnect it just before restoring power to the system To minimize downtime power failure transfer equipment should be t
291. er Complex Administration page 2 of 3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 13 The following DS1 Converter Complex fields appear on Page 2 when the Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex field is y gt NOTE When you administer DS1 Converter TN1654 circuit packs different fields display a DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of the converter circuit pack connected to the first endpoint of the fiber link This is entered on Page 1 and displays on Page 2 a DS1CONV Board Type Display only field showing the type of DS1 Converter circuit pack for the first endpoint a DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of the converter circuit pack connected to the second endpoint of the fiber link DS1CONV Board Type Display only field showing the type of DS1 Converter circuit pack for the second endpoint This field is updated via the Change Circuit packs command m Facility Installed Enter yes in the B C and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading to indicate that this DS1 facility is physically installed At least facility A must be installed within the converter complex Default is yes for Facility A m Passes Far end Clock Enter yes
292. er to DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures on page 6 141 Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk 2 Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors Power Down Cabinet 1 At the cabinet that is receiving the new switch node carrier set the main circuit breaker to OFF Remove Doors 1 Remove the front and rear doors from the cabinet where the switch node carrier will be installed Disconnect Ground Cables Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier position 1 Label the ground cables associated with the port carrier to be removed 2 Disconnect the ground cables from the top of the port carrier to be removed Allow the cables to hang down for now Remove Circuit Packs from Port Carrier D Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier position 1 To ensure that circuit packs and power units in the D carrier are properly replaced label each component with its slot number 2 Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the D carrier 3 Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier D Store the circuit packs in static proof packaging 4 Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit packs 5 Remove the front trim plate from the D carrier by pulling it straight off DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Serve
293. er to OFF Remove Doors and Panels and Disconnect Cables 1 Remove the front door from the multicarrier cabinet where the switch node carrier will be installed 2 With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible locate the slot that is almost vertical This slot is adjacent to the part number Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a wide blade 1 4 inch recommended into the slot and twist the screwdriver The retainer will snap open easily so that the cable can be removed 3 Atthe cabinet disconnect the previously labeled cables associated with the carrier to be removed 4 Remove the rear doors from the cabinet Remove Circuit Packs from Port Carrier D gt NOTE Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier position 1 To ensure that circuit packs and power units in the D carrier are properly replaced label each component with its slot number 2 Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the D carrier 3 Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier D Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging 4 Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit packs 5 Remove the front trim plate from the D carrier by pulling it straight off DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier
294. er was removed Table 6 8 TDM LAN Connections J Number Carrier Type LHS Slot RHS Slot J58890BB L1 Port 21 02 J58890BB L2 Port 21 01 J58890BB L3 Port 21 01 J58890AP Control 21 02 12 Install the alarm duplication cable H600 198 G1 between carriers B 13 14 and A Connect the cable to the ICCA pin field block to the right of the pin field block for slot 00 of both carriers See Figure 6 32 Connect the UAK upper connector to carrier B and connect the LAK lower connector to carrier A A CAUTION While installing the ICC cable connectors be careful not to bend any backplane pins Double check each connection to verify that the pins are straight gt NOTE With a connector in each hand flex the wires within the cable s sheath to form a usable C shaped cable Install the ICCC cable H600 182 G1 between carriers B and A Connect the cable to the ICCC pin field block behind slot 01 of both carriers See Figure 6 32 Install the duplication cable WP91954 L1 between carriers B and A Connect the cable to the ICCD pin field block behind slot 02 of both carriers See Figure 6 32 gt NOTE The duplication cable s connectors are keyed to ensure proper positioning on the pin field block DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or
295. ergency Transfer Stations During routine operation the ground for the emergency transfer stations is derived from the system s auxiliary cable Disconnect this ground during the upgrade to disable the stations A ground strap is run to the emergency transfer panel Connect this strap shortly after removing power and disconnect it just before restoring power to the upgraded system Converting the Translations The translations in the Release 5 6si system must be copied to a spare translation card and sent to Software Technical Support STS to be converted and written to a Release 8r removable media This process takes 2 weeks The Release 8r media including 1 with translations must be on site before the upgrade begins For each Release 8r processor 2 media 1 system disk and 1 backup removable media must always be retained on site with the system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Read This First 3 5 Software Upgrades After a software upgrade several features require special attention because of screen changes or potential naming conflicts in the upgrade process Most of these changes and conflicts relate either to a software upgrade from standard ACD to Call Vectoring or to changes in the ARS AAR features to compensate for increasing uncertainty in the North American numbering plan Also if ARS is ena
296. erver Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Task Tables 2 5 Task Tables Table 2 2 lists the high level tasks to perform the upgrades Refer to the appropriate page for instructions for each step The upgrade procedure is similar for both the standard and high or critical reliability system with a few exceptions These exceptions are noted as you go through the steps Table 2 2 Upgrade tasks Task Description Page Check SPE 2 7 Save Translations 2 7 Save Announcements if necessary 2 7 Back Up Disk 2 7 Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm Origination to INADS 2 8 Check Link Status 2 8 Disable TTI 2 9 Check TTI Status 2 9 Busyout MMI Circuit Packs H C only 2 8 Lock the active SPE H C only 2 10 Check the Active Tone Clock H C only 2 10 Power Down the Processor Carrier 2 10 Remove the Circuit Packs 2 11 Install the Circuit Packs 2 11 Power Up the Processor Carrier 2 13 Unlock the Active SPE H C only 2 13 Verify Interchange H C only 2 14 Upgrade Other Carrier H C only 2 14 Affix position label s 2 14 Verify software version 2 14 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issu
297. ervice A service in the United States that allows incoming calls from certain areas to an assigned number for a flat rate charge based on usage A AA Archangel See angel AAC ATM access concentrator AAR See Automatic Alternate Routing AAR abandoned call An incoming call in which the caller hangs up before the call is answered Abbreviated Dialing AD A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits AC 1 Alternating current 2 See Administered Connection AC AAR Automatic Alternate Routing ACA See Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA ACB See Automatic Callback ACB ACD See Automatic Call Distribution ACD ACD agent See agent ACU See Automatic calling unit ACU ACW See after call work ACW mode access code A 1 2 or 3 digit dial code used to activate or cancel a feature or access an outgoing trunk DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 2 access endpoint Either a nonsignaling channel on a DS1 interface or a nonsignaling port on an analog tie trunk circuit pack that is assigned a unique extension access tie trunk A trunk that connects a main communications system with a tandem communications system in an electronic tandem network ETN An access tie trunk can also be used to connect a system or tandem to a serving office
298. es about fiber routing If a DEFINITY style PPN cabinet is collocated with either a small cabinet medium cabinet or single carrier cabinet stack the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level Fiber Remoted Port Networks For a high reliability system with 1 fiber remoted expansion port network 2 fiber optic cables 2 lightwave transceivers and 2 lightguide interconnect units provided by the PSC are required For a high reliability system with 2 fiber remoted expansion port networks 6 fiber optic cables 6 lightwave transceivers and 6 lightguide interconnect units provided by the PSC are required For fiber remoted cabinets route the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the cabinet to the cross connect field where the lightguide interconnect units are located In either case use cable ties to secure the cable against the walls of the cable tray at the cable tie positions built into the trays DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 57 For Either 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 see Figure 5 15 through Figure 5 18 a Install a lightwave transceiver on
299. es and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 41 Power Up the EPN Cabinets 1 At each EPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON After about 40 seconds EPN power and PPN EPN communications return 2 After power returns to each EPN and all trouble is cleared verify the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode Retranslate Port Circuits If port circuit packs in the G2 module control carrier were relocated in order to place m Acritical port circuit pack requiring longer nominal battery holdover such as a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack in a port slot m A TN736 TN752 or TN755 power supply in port slots 18 and 19 m ATN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface in port slot 1 m A TN776 or TN570 in port slot 2 for a second directly connected EPN of the new expansion control carrier verify that they were retranslated during the off site software upgrade If not they must be retranslated now Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide for instructions on performing the retranslations Enable TTI Type change system parameters features and press Enter Use this screen to change the TTI field back to its previous value before the upgrade Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Compare
300. essary trouble lickets gt NOTE For some releases of the system software you may also need to disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields before submitting the form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 109 Save Translations Log in at the management terminal If the system is high or critical reliability type status spe and press Enter to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in service Type save translation spe a or both disk and press Enter This command instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the disk s If the system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter Ilf administered recorded announcements are listed type list configuration software version and press Enter Check screen 2 to find out when the announcements were last saved Save the current announcements by typing save announcements disk and pressing Enter Type backup disk spe a or both and press Enter This instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the system tape s Update backup tape s if required Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in
301. ested and if need be repaired before the hardware upgrade begins If the customer plans to emulate existing G2 translations in the upgraded Release 8 then these translations must be copied to a spare tape and sent to Software Technical Support STS so that reports of the current G2 translations and a G3 MA diskette with basic station translations can be generated This process may take several days STS must return the G2 reports and the diskette to the Project Manager before the upgrade can begin For each G2 processor retain 2 tapes 1 system tape and 1 backup tape on site with the G2 system After the reports arrive many features require special attention because of feature differences screen changes and potential naming conflicts in the upgrade process During the upgrade the Software Specialist should implement DEFINITY ECS Release 8 translations that are appropriate for the customer s needs For information to make the required changes refer to m DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 6 Alarm Connection The D6 connector on G2 systems had 31 alarm monitor appearances Unit 1 to Unit 31 for external equipment The AUXILIARY connector on an R8 PPN only has appearances for 1M major alarm and 1m minor alarm
302. et Hardware Add Center Stage Switch 6 127 Figure 6 48 shows 3 SNs used as a CSS for up to 43 EPNs Use this configuration when low inter SN traffic is expected cydfpbx4 RPY 081897 Figure Notes 1 Switch Node SN 1 7 Inter SN Connections 1 fiber 2 Switch Node 2 8 EPN Cabinet 14 3 Switch Node 3 9 EPN Cabinet 28 4 PPN Cabinet 10 EPN Cabinet 29 5 EPN Cabinet 1 11 EPN Cabinet 43 6 EPN Cabinet 13 Figure 6 48 3 SN CSS with Low Inter SN Traffic Fiber Engineering for 3 SNs Switches with 3 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient switching fabric at the CSS The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not require engineering Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to another SN and vice versa must be engineered The traffic that links across these fibers is simply the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 128 Add MCC Port Carriers A new port carrier can be installed when additional features or equipment exceed the capacity of the present system Port carriers are identified as B C D and E except for a PPN cabinet with the duplication option The B carrier is the second control carrier PEC 63155 provides the necessary equipment for adding the
303. f the actual fiber right of way not of the shortest linear distance between the 2 endpoints gt NOTE It is important to label every cable that you install gt NOTE Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave transceiver This section provides figures offering the suggested way of making these connections The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled either TX transmit or RX receive while the fibers attached to each connector are numbered either 1 or 2 A viable fiber connection is only made when both fibers in each cable 1 and 2 route from the TX connector of a port network to the RX connector of its adjacent port network For an example refer to Figure 5 29 on page 5 96 gt NOTE When finished refer to Appendix A Fiber Link Administration to administer the fiber links Collocated Port Networks For a critical reliability system with 1 collocated EPN use 2 fiber optic cables and 4 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks For a critical reliability system with 2 collocated EPNs use 6 fiber optic cables and 12 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks gt NOTE Based on floor plan considerations the length of these cables may vary Twenty foot 6 1 m cables are normally adequate for a Release 8 with 2 port networks For collocated cabinets the fiber optic cables should be routed directly
304. face Assembly 6 64 Administration Steps 1 Log in as craft 2 Type change circuit pack and press Enter 3 Check the Code column to see if the slots above the TN802B say DSMAPD or MEDPRO change circuit packs Page 1 of SN Slot Code Sf Mode Name Slot Code Sf Mode Name 1s DSMAPD RESERVED IP 01 TN754 DIGITAL LINE l2 DSMAPD RESERVED IP 02 TN758 POOLED MODEM L338 TN802 B MAPD BOARD 03 TN2144 ANALOG LINE 14 04 TN746 B ANALOG LINE l5 05 16 06 TN77 C MAINTENANCE TEST 07 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 08 TN2140 E amp M TIE TRUNK 09 TN767 E DS1 INTERFACE 10 TN799 B CONTROL LAN indicates circuit pack conflict CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier A Carrier Type processor 4 5 If MEDPRO go to the entry just above the TN802B that says MEDPRO Type DSMAPD and press Enter Changing the one entry automatically changes the entry above it If it is in IP Trunk mode you get the following error message MedPro type requires TN802 with application Type MEDPRO on circuit packs form Log onto the TN802B Interface Server If administered remotely through pcANYWHERE J Dial in to the server through pcANYWHERE using the dialup number supplied Click on the pcANYWHERE Remote Host Computer button on the toolbar to send CTRL ALT DEL to the host 3 Type administrator in the User Name field 4 Type iptrunk in the Password field and click OK 5 After logging on for the first time
305. face for the init login This feature is active for dial up access only It is not active when accessing the DEFINITY via the SAT Access security gateway is automatically imposed during the upgrade Antistatic Protection A CAUTION When handling circuit packs or any components of a DEFINITY System always wear a wrist ground strap Connect the strap to an approved ground such as the ground jack on the DEFINITY System Remove Install Circuit Packs CAUTION The control circuit packs with white labels cannot be removed or installed when the power is on The port circuit packs with gray labels older version circuit packs had purple labels can be removed or installed when the power is on DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Upgrade Paths xvii Upgrade Paths The upgrade paths described in this book assume the system being upgraded is at the level of at least a G3V4 To upgrade prior systems to this starting point refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3r Upgrades and Additions Table 1 correlates each upgrade to an associated chapter number Table 1 Software and Hardware Upgrade Chapters Description Chapter Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory k Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory G3vs with Intel 386 or
306. fiber optic cabling information and comcode numbers refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets The fiber connections installed in this section are later administered using the fiber link administration instructions in Appendix A Fiber Link Administration gt NOTE Use multi mode fiber transceivers and fiber optic cables between cabinets unless single mode is required for distance restrictions Direct Connect New EPN to Existing PPN Standard Reliability P2 f DUPLICATION 3 CLOCK AUX ROCESSOR COMMUNICATION o 2 1 p Cano OPTION 3 T T INTERFACE EQUIPMENT TERMINAL TERMINAL S S t3 S o o o o 9 8 7 6 5 4 Q Q Q Q Q Q 6 o p o O 6 Figure 6 14 Rear of J58890AH Control Carrier PPN 0063 0 RBP 071096 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 24 1 Install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 on the rear of the PPN Control Carrier See Figure 6 14 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver Label the cable to make the connections to the EPN cabinet easier Route the fiber cable to the J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier in the EPN cabinet On the rear of the EPN Expansion Control Carrier install a 982
307. framework A CAUTION Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the carrier 9 Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 112 9 J U UUU N Y s ross ic mt CD SA V y TMU OiCOEO 7 MUI AS Z G A AUU N ESA Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 4 Switch Node Carrier D Position 2 Ground Jumpers 5 Switch Node Carrier E Position 3 Control Carrier A Position 6 Cabinet with standard fan unit and carrier 7 Cabinet with enhanced fan unit and enhanced carrier Figure 6 38 Locations of Ground Jumpers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability
308. g Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 22 Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System Figure 6 13 shows a typical multicarrier EPN cabinet Each EPN cabinet is normally positioned adjacent to the PPN cabinet but may be located remotely in a different room or a different building Port Carrier C Port Carrier B Control Carrier A Fans Port Carrier D Port Carrier E Power Distribution 0075 0 RBP 080196 Figure 6 13 Typical Multicarrier EPN Cabinet 1 Uncrate and position the cabinet as instructed at the beginning of this chapter 2 Install earthquake protection as instructed on page 1 9 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 23 Connect Power and Ground 1 For an AC or DC powered system connect power and ground to the cabinet as instructed in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets 2 Connect the approved ground to the new cabinet as instructed in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets gt NOTE Do not power up the system until all power and ground connections are completed Interconnect Cabling Release 8r For
309. ge Notices for current information about usable vintages in a Release 8r system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Read This First 3 4 Site Inspections For the purposes of a Release 8r upgrade most Release 5 6si systems are already equipped with the correct lightwave transceivers Any older versions of these components must be replaced The earlier versions of lightwave transceivers included the 4 series transceivers 4A through 4F These transceivers supported fiber connections up to 7 000 feet 2133 m Order the correct transceivers according to a separate PEC Power and Ground The new multicarrier PPN cabinet or any EPN cabinet added for the upgrade can be either AC or DC powered If an added cabinet is powered differently from the existing cabinets the existing cabinets do not have to be converted since mixed power configurations are allowed However the system s power and ground must be modified so the AC powered cabinets are grounded to the same single point ground bar as the DC powered cabinets DC Isolator Each management terminal connected to a DC powered cabinet by the asynchronous EIA RS 232 interface requires a 116A isolator The isolator is inserted at the RS 232 interface between the terminal and the interface connector to isolate ground between the system and external adjuncts Em
310. ght Savings Rule 0 X E Screen 5 2 Typical Date and Time Screen 2 Type the day of the week in English Sunday through Saturday See Table 5 12 for English day of the week names Table 5 12 English Day of the Week Names Day Number Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday N OD oO BR ow Pp Saturday DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 70 3 The cursor is positioned on the Month field Type the current month in English January through December See Table 5 13 for English month names After the month is entered press Tab to move to next field Table 5 13 English Month Names Month Number Month Name 1 January February March April May June July August c o 0o oc1 RI WwW PM September October a4 eo a November k N December 4 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month field Type the day of month 1 through 31 and press Tab to move to the next field 5 The cursor is positioned on the Year field Type the current year and press TAB to move to the next field 6 The cursor is positioned on the Hour field Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock Press Tab to move to the next field 7 The cursor
311. gle Carrier Cabinet SCC Release 5si Release 5si memory Release 6si system with a TN790 RISC processor to a Release 8 EPN The existing SCC PPN is always upgraded to an EPN The new multicarrier cabinet always serves as the PPN Upgrading to an EPN for a Release 8r requires changing and often restructuring the expansion interface circuit packs Hardware changes including carrier replacement in the SCC cabinet is required This upgrade assumes that the Release 8r cabinet has already been installed If not refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets to install the Release 8r system Return to this chapter when finished In this chapter all occurrences of Release 5si and Release 5si memory are called Release 5si unless a specific configuration is required to differentiate between product offerings DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide lists Release 8 features and functions and provides the commands procedures and forms to initialize and administer the Release 8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Read This First 3 2 Read This First Service Interruption The upgrade process requires a service interruption of about 2 hours and must be closely coordinated with the customer and the local account
312. h Node 4 Add Links to EPNs in Alternating 2 Cabinet Stack 2 16 EPN Order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth 3 Metallic Cable H600 278 9c Ie aecmone EFNS Figure 3 14 Fiber Optic Connections Through Center Stage Switch DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 40 For 1 to 15 High Reliability EPNs 1 Behind the PPN cabinet See Figure 3 15 a b C Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E02 Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1C02 Connect 1 end of the metallic intercarrier cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1E02 Route the intercarrier cable from the lightwave transceiver to the cabinet s cable tray and upward to carrier C Connect the other end of the intercarrier cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1C02 Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1 E20 g Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1D02 h Connect 1 end of the metallic intercarrier cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1E20 Route the intercarrier cable from the lightwave transceiver to the cabinet s cable tray and upward to carrier D Connect the other end of the intercarrier cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1D02 Attach the intercarrier cables wit
313. h cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1 See Figure 3 15 a For each EPN install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector with the following order of slots 1E03 1E19 1E04 1E18 1E05 1E17 and so forth Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Behind control cabinet A of each single carrier EPN Install the same kind of lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot A01 Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot A01 Coil the surplus length of fiber optic cable and place the coil either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet Issue 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 April 2000 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 41 LCS RU i 1 t j LC A mm NCC r TU ele Em bun Uf 9 sm LUU NNN V I 8 i MUMS Ni 1 MUMMUW
314. h the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 35 cydf013 CJL102396 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 Optical Cross Connect Facility 2 To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A02 6 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 3 To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A02 7 TX Connector 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 RX Connector Figure 5 9 Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages Verify that ea
315. hange carrier code DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Glossary and Abbreviations Issue 1 April 2000 GL 29 K kHz Kilohertz kbps Kilobits per second kbyte Kilobyte kg Kilogram L LAN Local area network LAP D Link Access Procedure on the D channel LAPD Link Access Procedure data LATA Local access and transport area Ib Pound LBO Line buildout LDN Listed directory number LDS Long distance service LEC Local exchange carrier LED See light emitting diode LED light emitting diode LED A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied LEDs provide a visual indication of the operational status of hardware components the results of maintenance tests the alarm status of circuit packs and the activation of telephone features lightwave transceiver Hardware that provides an interface to fiber optic cable from port circuit packs and DS1 converter circuit packs Lightwave transceivers convert electrical signals to light signals and vice versa DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 30 line A transmission path between a communications system or CO switching system and a voice terminal or other terminal line appearance See appearance line buildout A selectable output attenuation is gener
316. hanged to Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers to support more than 1 OSS 4 Type first only in this field to enable Alarm Origination to the first OSS which should be INADS Be sure to enter y in both Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields Press Enter 5 Type save translation spe a disk and press Enter gt NOTE The INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination as part of the registration process Ay WARNING If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the switch will not report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 94 Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability To upgrade to a standard reliability R8r with Center Stage Switch CSS a switch node carrier is added either to an empty E carrier position of an existing multicarrier port network or to the D carrier position gt NOTE To avoid moving a port carrier the preferred practice is to place the new switch node carrier in an empty carrier position Service Interruption 1 Since the addition of the switch node carrier requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will
317. have up to 43 EPNs PNC duplication architecture utilizes an active standby duplication scheme in which one complete set of PNC components supports call processing while the duplicate PNC is held in reserve All calls on the active PNC are simultaneously set up or shadowed on the standby PNC in order for it to be capable of instantly assuming active status when necessary allowing for interchanges without service disruption in the case of single faults PNC duplication does not introduce any additional types of hardware or hardware faults and there are no tests associated with the PNC DUP MO Instead its error log entries contain useful information about the occurrence and causes of interchanges in order to facilitate diagnosis of problems which can then be addressed by using the documentation for the individual maintenance object involved DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade New for Release 8 B 3 The following PNC duplication related commands and their output screens are fully described in Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands of the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Maintenance for Release R8r book The associated PNC DUP maintenance object is found in Chapter 9 of the same reference status pnc Displays information about the operational status of both PNCs including state of health alarms busyouts and locks and so on reset pnc Used t
318. he capability group to be performed over this type of association Also referred to as administration groups or application service elements ASEs CA TSC Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connection cause value A value is returned in response to requests or in event reports when a denial or unexpected condition occurs ASAI cause values fall into two coding standards Coding Standard 0 includes any cause values that are part of AT amp T and CCITT ISDN specifications Coding standard 3 includes any other ASAI cause values This document uses a notation for cause value where the coding standard for the cause is given first then a slash then the cause value Example CS0 100 is coding standard 0 cause value 100 CBC Call by call or coupled bonding conductor CC Country code CCIS Common Channel Interoffice Signaling CCITT CCITT Comitte Consultatif International Telephonique et Telegraphique now called nternational Telecommunications Union ITU See International Telecommunications Union ITU CCMS Control Channel Message Set CCS See CCS or hundred call seconds CCSA Common Control Switching Arrangement CDM Channel division multiplexing CDOS Customer dialed and operator serviced CDR See Call Detail Recording CDR DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 12 CDRP Call Detail Record Poller C
319. he fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 2B03 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 8 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3B03 m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 3B03 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m Atthe top of the cabinet coil the surplus fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray Critical Reliability DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN 9 9 9 AULAS DOOM SSSS TTT TK TN ar Zona SS KN an ns SSN LZ SIE Gee SS KALAA Kg I NW LUMI NS MUM NS MMM LUU NSSSSSS LI SS Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN 2 Cabinet 2 EPN 1 3 Cabinet 3 EPN 2 Figure 5 28 Critical Reliability Release 8 with 2 or 3 Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1
320. he pin field block for slot 00 Change the location of each port cabinet address plug to reflect the cabinet s current position See Figure 3 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 17 add plug CJL 050906 Figure Notes 1 Address Plug Shown Set to Carrier D 5 Right Edge of Cabinet 2 Carrier B Jumper Location Default 6 Backplane Slot 00 3 Carrier C Jumper Location 7 To Connector Panel 4 Right Edge of Backplane Figure3 1 Cabinet Address Plug Location DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 18 Install TDM LAN Bus Terminators 1 If the Release 5 6si PPN has only 1 cabinet install the 2 AHF110 TDM LAN bus terminators per Figure 3 2 PM PENES OPEN E Ge amp ZEN STW ie E scdfexp KLC 102596 LI Figure Notes 1 Control Cabinet A Position 3 AHF110 TDM LAN Bus Terminator 2 AHF110 TDM LAN Bus Terminator Slot 01 Slot 18 Figure 3 2 TDM LAN Bus Terminators for Single Carrier Cabinet EPN 2 If the Release 5 6si PPN has more than 1 cabinet a Install the AHF110 TDM LAN bus terminator in Slot 03 on the
321. he transmission of a packet On completion of the transmission the channel is made available for the transfer of other packets See also BX 25and packet PAD Packet assembly disassembly paging trunk A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging party extension active on call A party is on the call if he or she is actually connected to the call in active talk or in held state An originator of a call is always a party on the call Alerting parties busy parties and tones are not parties on the call PBX Private branch exchange PC See personal computer PC PCM See pulse code modulation PCM PCOL Personal central office line PCOLG Personal central office line group PCS Permanent switched calls PDM See processor data module PDM PDS Premises Distribution System PE Processing element PEC Price element code PEI Processor element interchange personal computer PC A personally controllable microcomputer PGATE Packet gateway DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 39 PGN Partitioned group number PI Processor interface PIB Processor interface board pickup group A group of individuals authorized to answer any call directed to an extension within the group PIDB Product image database PKTINT Packet interface PL Private line PLS Premi
322. he wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m At the top of the cabinet coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable tray 3 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m At the top of the cabinet coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable t
323. her Carrier H C only To upgrade the other carrier lock the SPE switches on the DUPINT to the other carrier gt NOTE The new active carrier resets reset 1 Wait until the login prompt appears then log in Repeat the steps from Check the Active Tone Clock H C only through Verify Interchange H C only Affix position label s 1 Place the new strip label s over the old carrier label s Verify software version gt NOTE The Tape Resident field shows the software load number Write it down for use later If standard reliability 1 Type list configuration software version and press Enter to verify that the removable media contains the Release 8 software If high or critical reliability 1 Type list configuration software version long and press Enter to verify that the removable media contains the Release 8 software DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 15 Save Translations 1 Type save translations tape and press Enter to save translations to the new removable media which takes about 2 minutes Save Announcements if necessary 1 Type save announce tape and press Enter to save announcements to the new removable media Restore Disk If standard reliability 1 Type restore disk full and press Enter to write the new software t
324. i R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 55 Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto disk If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade the following error message displays when logging in Ah WARNING Translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately gt NOTE The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears Return Replaced Equipment 1 Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 3 56 DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures Power Down the AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system s power unit notifies technicians to shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system 1 Log into the AUDIX System as craft 2 Type reset system shutdown and press Enter Press Enter once gt NOTE Do not press Enter again This will force the AUDIX to shutdown immediately dropping all active calls on the AUDIX 3 The SHUTDOWN Completed message appears when the AUDIX is successfully shutdown Thi
325. iber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 10 Form instructions Page 1 of the form g Page 1 of 1 N FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION Fiber Link 1 Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex ENDPOINT 1 ENDPOINT 2 A PNC A PNC Board Location Board Location Board Type xxx Board Type xxx Ne P Screen 6 1 Fiber Link Administration form Basic Fiber Link Administration The following fields appear m Fiber Link Display only field From the command line enter a 1 to 3 digit number to uniquely identify a switch connection in the system and its duplicate if appropriate Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of an SNI or El board that is the first endpoint of the fiber link m Board Type Display only field showing the type of circuit pack in Endpoint 1 Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of an SNI or El board that is the second endpoint of the fiber link Board Type Display only field showing the type of circuit pack in Endpoint 2 Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex Enter y to specify that a DS1 Converter complex is used to remote one endpoint If a y is entered A PNC DS1 Converter circuit pack Location must be administered on Page 1 A PNC DS1 Converter circuit pack Type displays A PNC DS1 Converter DS1CONV Attributes must be a
326. ier A Slot 3A01 8 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 4 To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02 9 TX Connector 5 To EPN2 Carrier B Slot 3B02 10 RX Connector Figure 5 35 Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages Verify that each circuit pack reused in the upgrade conforms to the usable vintage requirements for a DEFINITY ECS Release 8 system see Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 106 Remove Power Failure Ground Strap Remove the ground strap from the power failure transfer unit Boot the Release 8 System 1 a A Oo I Connect the management terminal to the TERMINAL connector behind PPN control carrier A or install the G3 MA according to the Set Up G3 MA chapter of DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Management Applications Operations 585 229 202 Insert the translation cards in the TN794 faceplates At each EPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON At the PPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process loading the default system translations from the translation cards This takes 8 to 11 minutes Get the order number of the upgrade and call the regional CSA to
327. ight Install the power units removed from G2 universal module into the A carrier There are 4 different pairs of power units available They are the 631AR1 and 631BR1 the 631WA1 and 631WB1 the 631DA1 and 631DB1 and the 644A and 645B Do not interchange the physical locations of the units Install the 631AR1 631WA1 631DA1 or 644A in the left side Install the 631BR1 631WB1 631DB1 or 645B in the right side If the expansion control carrier contains a 631BR1 631WB1 or 645B power unit install the previously removed TN736 power unit in port slots 18 and 19 of the carrier adjacent to the 631BR1 631WB1 or 645B If the system contains neon message waiting a TN752 or TN755 power unit must be used gt NOTE The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 or 645B power unit is used in the J58890AH control carrier or the J58890BB 2 or J58890BB 3 port carriers It is required in the J58890BB 1 port carrier regardless of which 631 power unit is provided Use the TN752 or TN755 if the system is equipped with neon message waiting Connect the power cords to the power units The power cords are the white cables equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front of each carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 88 Table 5 16 Intercarrier Cable Connections
328. ight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens 3 When done press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 38 Set Date and Time 1 Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen a DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week Tuesday Month February Day of the Month 8 Year 2000 TIME Hour 20 Minute 30 Second XX Type standard Daylight Savings Rule 0 X E Screen 5 1 Typical Date and Time Screen 2 Type the day of the week in English Sunday through Saturday See Table 5 8 for English day of the week names Table 5 8 English Day of the Week Names Day Number Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday N OD oO BR ow Pp Saturday DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 39 3 The cursor is positioned on the Month field Type the current month in English January through December See Table 5 9 for English month names After the month is entered press Tab to move to next field Table 5 9 English Month Names Month Number Month Name 1 January February March April
329. il m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to copy upgraded translations to the system disk which takes about 2 minutes Save Announcements if necessary 1 Type save announcements and press Enter to copy announcements to the system disk DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 23 Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk and press Enter to back up all changed files to the removable media This takes about 15 minutes 2 Type test stored data and press Enter to verify the consistency of the MSS files on the disk and removable media If standard reliability 3 Type list configuration software version and press Enter to verify all the files one last time If high or critical reliability 3 Type list configuration software version long and press Enter to verify all the files one last time Return Replaced Equipment 1 Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in the following books BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555
330. ile the system is powered up 1 Connect a 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm wire either to pin 49 of the connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel associated with the emergency transfer panel 2 Route the other end of the wire to an approved ground and connect Disconnect Equipment and Cables 1 Disconnect all of the connector cables attaching to the PPN Disconnect the PC from the TERM connector Remove the ground plate s from between all of the PPN cabinets B 0 m Remove the top and bottom rear covers from all of the PPN cabinets Remove Circuit Packs 1 Label each port circuit pack in the control cabinet with its slot number 2 Remove all circuit packs and power units from the control cabinet Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging NOTE If a TN756 tone detector generator was removed from the Release 5 6si a new Release 8r tone clock TN2182B replaces this circuit pack The TN2182B Tone Clock replaces the tone detector circuits on the TN756 A TN2182B eliminates the need for a TN748B DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 15 Disconnect TDM LAN Cables and ICC Cables 1 Remove and retain all of the TDM LAN cables 2 If the Release 5 6si system is standard reliability remove and retain the ICC cables 3 If the Release 5 6
331. ill notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 248 1234 If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved It is recommended that repairs be performed by Lucent Technologies certified technicians The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information This equipment if it uses a telephone receiver is hearing aid compatible DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2
332. ing Access ETA Extended Trunk Access also Enhanced Terminal Administration ETN Electronic tandem network ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 22 expansion archangel EAA A network control microprocessor located on an expansion interface El port circuit pack in an expansion port network The EA provides an interface between the EPN and its controlling switch processing element expansion archangel link EAL A link access function on the D channel LAPD logical link that exists between a switch processing element and an expansion archangel EA The EAL carries control messages from the SPE to the EA and to port circuit packs in an expansion port network expansion control cabinet See expansion control carrier expansion control carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains extra port circuit packs and a maintenance interface Also called expansion control cabinet in a single carrier cabinet expansion interface EI A port circuit pack in a port network that provides the interface between a PN s TDM bus packet bus and a fiber optic link The El carries circuit switched data packet switched data network control timing control and DS1 control In addition an El in an expansion port network communicates with the master maintenance circuit pack
333. ing a problem m Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades provides specific troubleshooting procedures for common upgrade problems DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade New for Release 8 B 2 New for Release 8 m ATM PNC Duplication ATM PNC DUP m ATM Expansion Interface ATM EI m Mass Storage System m Control LAN C LAN m Control LAN C LAN m System Links SYS LINK ATM PNC Duplication ATM PNC DUP The PNC DUP maintenance object tracks the health of the active and standby PNCs controls planned and spontaneous interchanges and manages related functions such as double call refresh and unrefresh antithrashing and so on The main responsibility of PNC DUP is to recover the system to full service in the event of a fault In the event of multiple faults PNC DUP does its best to maximize service continuity In systems with the Critical Reliability option the following components which together comprise the Port Network Connectivity PNC are duplicated m ATM Expansion Interface ATM EI circuit packs in the port networks PNs m Fiber optic cables connecting the above circuit packs to the ATM Switch Interface Modules m ATM Switch Although not part of the PNC Tone Clock circuit packs are also duplicated in each PN All systems have one Processor Port Network PPN ATM PNC systems can
334. intermediate SCls host computer A computer connected to a network that processes data from data entry devices hunt group A group of extensions that are assigned the Station Hunting feature so that a call to a busy extension reroutes to an idle extension in the group See also ACD work mode Hz See hertz Hz I1 The first information channel of DCP I2 The second information channel of DCP I2 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the radio controller circuit packs Each interface provides communication between the radio controller circuit pack and up to two wireless fixed bases I3 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the cell antenna units Each wireless fixed base can communicate to up to four cell antenna units DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 26 IAS Inter PBX Attendant Service ICC Intercabinet cable or intercarrier cable ICD Inbound Call Director ICDOS International Customer Dialed Operator Service ICHT Incoming call handling table ICI Incoming call identifier ICM Inbound Call Management IDDD International Direct Distance Dialing IDF Intermediate distribution frame IE Information element immediate start tie trunk A trunk on which after making a connection with a distant sw
335. ion Administer Fiber Links A 18 Duplicated DS1 Converter Complex Administration for T1 TN1654 Circuit Packs a fiber link next Page 2 of 3 N FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION A PNC DS1 CONVERTER DS1CONV ATTRIBUTES DS1CONV Board Location 01B01 DS1CONV Board Location 02B01 DS1CONV Board Type TN1654 DS1CONV Board Type TN1654 DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES A B C D Facility Installed yes yes yes no Bit Rate 2 048 Facility Startup Idle Code 11101000 Line Coding hdb3 hdb3 hdb3 hdb3 CRC yes Line Termination Facility A Circuit ID 09876543 Facility B Circuit ID 234567889 Facility C Circuit ID 434566335 Ne d Screen 6 6 Fiber Link Administration form for E1 TN1654 Circuit Pack DS1 Converter Complex Administration page 2 of 3 The following unique fields display when administering a TN1654 DS1 Converter m Bit Rate A display only field for TN1654 entered on page 3 of the form See previous section 1 544 indicates domestic T1 operation and 2 048 indicates international E1 operation DS1 Converter Complex Administration for E1 TN1654 Circuit Packs The following unique fields display when administering a E1 TN1654 DS1 Converter a Bit Rate Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654 Enter either 1 544 for domestic T1 operation or 2 048 for international E1 operation gt NOTE Since one bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1 Converter complex Bit Rate displays only un
336. ion archangel EAL Expansion archangel link ear and mouth E amp M signaling Trunk supervisory signaling used between two communications systems whereby signaling information is transferred through 2 state voltage conditions on the E and M leads for analog applications and through a single bit for digital applications EEBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interexchange Code ECC Error Correct Code ECMA European Computer Manufacturers Association EFP Electronic power feed EI Expansion interface EIA Electronic Industries Association EIA 232 A physical interface specified by the EIA EIA 232 transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet EIA 232 replaces RS 232 protocol in some DEFINITY applications DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 21 electronic tandem network ETN A tandem tie trunk network that has automatic call routing capabilities based on the number dialed and the most preferred route available Each switch in the network is assigned a unique private network office code RNX and each voice terminal is assigned a unique extension Electronics Industries Association EIA A trade association of the electronics industry that establishes electrical and functional standards emergency transfer If a major system failure occurs automatic
337. is clears the message waiting lamp for the specified extension 2 Repeat the command for each extension with a lit message waiting lamp Tone Clock Does Not Function in New EPN 1 If the existing system is pre G3V4 and contains TN768 Tone Clock circuit packs remove the NETCON PI and tone translations before starting the upgrade The active tone clock in Ox1c cannot be properly inserted while PI translations exist from the old carrier 2 Add the translations again after the upgrade Translation Corruption Detected This usually means that the translations were not successfully backed up to the translation card or that the current software version may not be compatible with the new software version gt NOTE The Terminal Translation Initialization TTI should be disabled before you save translations prior to an upgrade 1 Repeat the upgrade with the TTI disabled Unsuccessful Translation Read on System Restart If Upgrading From Pre R7 1 1 Set the PPN circuit breaker to OFF 2 Install all old circuit packs TN790 TN777B TN765 s and TN778 3 Insert the original translation card or backup translation card into the TN777B 4 Setthe PPN circuit breaker to ON This should correct the translation corruption problem 5 Contect your Lucent Technologies representative for help in repeating the upgrade DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Ap
338. ise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade New for Release 8 Issue 1 April 2000 B 5 A 48V to 12V converter circuit on the TN2211 Optical Drive circuit pack provides power for both the Optical Drive and the Disk Drive The presence of 12V on these circuit packs is monitored separately by maintenance software so that a failure of the 12V converter on the Removable Media circuit pack can be identified or ruled out as the source of the problem when the Disk Drive loses 12V power The Host Adapter circuit pack Removable Media Drive circuit pack and Disk circuit pack are treated as separate but related maintenance objects H ADAPTR R MEDIA and DISK Since the Disk circuit pack is controlled by SCSI commands which are generated by the Host Adapter problems with the Host Adapter can prevent communications with the Disk Whenever the Host Adapter is taken out of service by the busy out host adapter command or due to failure of a critical Host Adapter test the Removable Media R MEDIA and Disk DISK maintenance objects are also placed in a maintenance busyout state Switch processor SPE System bus SCSI bus MSSNET Host circuit adapter pack p Private bus Mass storage system Disk circuit Tape circuit pack pack Optical drive Optical disk cydfmass LJK 092999 Figure B 2 M
339. isk Install or Restore Disk Full Fails This problem assumes that an MSS error was encountered a restore disk full failed or a restore disk install failed 1 2 This usually indicates that a bad removable media was used To verify a Insert the suspect removable media into the removable media drive b Type test tape UUCSS long and press Enter gt NOTE Do not run the test tape short command The short test cannot find all of the bad sectors that may be present on the removable media c If the removable media has errors replace it Insert a good Release 8 software removable media into the removable media drive Test the removable media before starting the upgrade Type test removable media UUCSS long and press Enter if you are using R8 software If you are using R7 or earlier software type test tape UUCSS long and press Enter gt NOTE Do not run the test removable media short command or the test tape short command The short test cannot find all of the bad sectors that may be present on the tape removable media DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades B 11 Message Waiting Lamps On After Removing an EPN All affected port related translations were not unadministered before removing an EPN cabinet 1 Type clear amw all extension and press Enter Th
340. it with the earlier status 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for each link Enable Scheduled Maintenance Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Enable the scheduled daily maintenance Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rr DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 42 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination 2 When administration is completed log in as craft at the Login prompt init login administration 1 e Log in as init Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade Type
341. itching system for an outgoing call the system waits a nominal 65 ms before sending the digits of the called number This allows time for the distant system to prepare to receive digits On an incoming call the system has less than 65 ms to prepare to receive the digits IMT Intermachine trunk in Inch INADS Initialization and Administration System incoming gateway A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B information exchange The exchange of data between users of two different systems such as the switch and a host computer over a LAN Information Systems Network ISN A WAN and LAN with an open architecture combining host computers minicomputers word processors storage devices PCs high speed printers and nonintelligent terminals into a single packet switching system INS ISDN Network Service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 27 inside call A call placed from one telephone to another within the local communications system Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A public or private network that provides end to end digital communications for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user network interfaces defined by the CCITT Through inter
342. ith a Single Carrier Cabinet stack the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level Fiber Remoted Port Networks For a standard reliability system with 1 fiber remoted EPN use 2 fiber optic cables 2 lightwave transceivers and 2 lightguide interface units provided by the PSC For a standard reliability system with 2 fiber remoted EPNs use 6 fiber optic cables 6 lightwave transceivers and 6 lightguide interface units provided by the PSC DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 23 DS1 CONV Remoted Port Networks For a standard reliability system with 1 DS1 CONV remoted EPN use 2 DS1 CONV circuit packs TN1654 2 DS1 Conv to El cables 846448637 and or 846448645 two H 600 348 cables from 1 to 4 pairs of Channel Service Units CSUs and from 1 to 4 pairs of MDF cables provided with the CSUs gt NOTE The TN1654 requires the use of a TN573B Switched Node Interface circuit pack For a standard reliability system with 2 DS1 CONV remoted EPNs this arrangement requires a 6DS1 CONV circuit packs TN1654 m 6 DS1 CONV to El cables 846448637 and or 846448645 m 6 H 600 348 cables m 3 6 9 0r 12 pairs of C
343. ition B by lining up the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips support the carrier while the screws are being replaced Ensure the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self tapping screws saved from the removal of the old carrier Connect the P2 and P1 large and small connectors to the A carrier Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made See Figure 5 25 Connect the P1 small connector to the B carrier To get enough slack in the cables cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cables from the upright in the area of the carrier being installed Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made Connect the 8 ground straps from the D carrier to the new A carrier See Figure 5 24 These straps were left connected to the D carrier Connect the 8 ground straps from the C carrier to the new B carrier These straps were left connected to the C carrier Install the 8 ground straps between the new A and B carriers These straps were removed from the old carriers For an AC powered expansion control carrier install the 2 new carrier ground straps One strap connects ground point 1 to the A carrier frame on the right side and the other connects ground point 8 to the A carrier
344. ity Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 33 m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager For Two Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connecta fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cabl
345. ity 6 100 Install New Switch Node Carrier 1 Install the switch node carrier into position D by lining up the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips support the carrier while the screws are being replaced Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier 2 Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self tapping screws A CAUTION Carefully realign the threads on the self tapping screws by turning them clockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the threads out of the framework 3 Behind the carrier replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old carrier 4 Connect the P1 small connector to the D carrier If necessary to get enough slack in the cables cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable from the upright in the area being installed Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made 5 Connect the 8 ground straps from either the A carrier or the enhanced fan unit to the new D carrier See Figure 6 33 These straps were left connected when the old D carrier was removed 6 Connect the 8 ground straps from the E carrier if installed to the new D carrier See Figure 6 33 These straps were left connected to the E carrier when the old D carrier was removed 7 Fora standard AC powered control carrier install the 4 carrier grou
346. kes 1 minute to complete If the service state is incorrect repeat the command until this condition is met If the active Tone Clock has not migrated to the active carrier after 1 minute then a Tone Clock problem exists Refer to the TDM CLK Maintenance Objects section of the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r book to resolve any problems Power Down the Processor Carrier Ax CAUTION Do not power down the whole cabinet it is not necessary For standard reliability power down the processor carrier This causes a service interruption For high or critical reliability power down the standby carrier 1 To power down the processor carrier remove the power plug from the left side of the carrier then remove the power plug from the right side of the carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 11 Remove the Circuit Packs gt NOTE More detailed information on removing and adding circuit packs is in Chapter 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware 1 Remove the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET slot in the carrier 2 Remove the UN332B circuit pack from the carrier and place it in antistatic packing material 3 Remove the TN1656 tape drive and place it in antistatic packing material Install the Circuit Packs
347. l 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 74 Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto disk If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade the following error message displays when logging in Ah WARNING Translation corruption detected call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately gt NOTE The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files 2 Type test stored data long and press Enter This instructs the system to verify the consistency of the MSS files on the disk and removable media Return Replaced Equipment Return unused G2 equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 75 Critical Reliability Upgrade Cabinets An existing universal module cabinet is always upgraded to an EPN Required Hardware The equipment in Table 5 14 must be on site before the upgrade begins To place a claim for missing equipment as part of the Streamlined Implementation process call 1 800 772 5409
348. l security numbers or phone numbers on ACD calls CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting carrier An enclosed shelf containing vertical slots that hold circuit packs carried load The amount of traffic served by traffic sensitive facilities during a given interval CARR POW Carrier Port and Power Unit for AC Powered Systems CAS Centralized Attendant Service or Call Accounting System DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 11 CCS or hundred call seconds A unit of call traffic Call traffic for a facility is scanned every 100 seconds If the facility is busy it is assumed to have been busy for the entire scan interval There are 3600 seconds per hour The Roman numeral for 100 is the capital letter C The abbreviation for call seconds is CS Therefore 100 call seconds is abbreviated CCS If a facility is busy for an entire hour then it is said to have been busy for 36 CCS See also Erlang capability A request or indication of an operation For example Third Party Make Call is a request for setting up a call event report is an indication that an event has occurred capability group Set of capabilities determined by switch administration that can be requested by an application Capability groups denote association types For example Call Control is a type of association that allows certain functions the ones in t
349. lay communication interface links and press Enter Compare it with the earlier status 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for each link Enable Scheduled Maintenance Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Use this screen to enable scheduled daily maintenance Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Upgrade Completion 4 17 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 2 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination When administration is completed log in as craft at the Login prompt Administration Log in as init at the Login prompt Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter to verify that the customer options are properly set Go to screen 6 QSIG Optional Features and set the Basic Call Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Servi
350. lexed interface DMT An interface that provides connectivity between a communications system and a host computer or between two communications systems using DS1 24th channel signaling DMI provides 23 64 kbps data channels and 1 common signaling channel over a twisted pair connection DMI is offered through two capabilities bit oriented signaling DMI BOS and message oriented signaling DMI MOS digital signal level 0 DSO A single 64 kbps voice channel A DSO is a single 64 kbps channel in a T1 or E1 facility and consists of eight bits in a T1 or E1 frame every 125 microseconds digital signal level 1 DS1 A single 1 544 Mbps United States or 2 048 Mbps outside the United States digital signal carried on a T1 transmission facility A D81 converter complex consists of a pair one at each end of DS1 converter circuit packs and the associated T1 E1 facilities digital terminal data module DTDM An integrated or adjunct data module that shares with a digital telephone the same physical port for connection to a communications system The function of a DTDM is similar to that of a PDM and MPDM in that it converts RS 232C signals to DCP signals digital to analog converter DAC A device that converts data in digital form to the corresponding analog signals See also analog to digital converter ADC digital transmission A mode of transmission in which information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then transmitt
351. light IP Trunk Service then click on Start gt NOTE Do not select Startup After service has started go to the SAT 1 Release the trunk group associated with the IP trunk by typing release board UUCSS and pressing Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 66 Assign Server and Domain Names The Windows NT server identifies servers using a server name plus a domain name that locates the named server in a particular part of the network The TN802B IP Interface is shipped with generic server and domain names Assign replacement names that are meaningful within your network 1 gt A OO Im Click on My Computer gt Control Panel gt Network Select the Identification tab then click Change Type the new server name in the Computer Name field Type the new domain name in the Domain field and click OK gt OK gt Close When prompted to reboot the computer select one of the following options No if you have not assigned IP addresses then go to Assign an IP Address m Yes if you have assigned IP addresses Assign an IP Address 1 Click the Protocols tab BOO Click on My Computer Control Panel Network Select TCP IP Protocol from the list Click the Properties option in the Network window DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Rel
352. lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager 7 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2B03 m Connecta fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 8 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3B03 Connect the fiber cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2
353. lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 3B02 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m Atthe top of the cabinet coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray 5 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A02 m Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 2A02 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 94 6 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A02 m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 3A02 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m Atthe top of the cabinet coil the surplus fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray 7 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2B03 m Connect 1 end of t
354. lity Startup Idle Code 11101000 Line Coding hdb3 hdb3 hdb3 hdb3 CRC yes Line Termination Facility A Circuit ID OAABBO1 Facility B Circuit ID OCCDD02 Facility C Circuit ID OEEFF03 M y Screen 6 7 Fiber Line Administration form for B PNC DS1 Converter DS1CONV Attributes DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade B 1 Troubleshooting an Upgrade This appendix provides information to correct some problems when upgrading a system The information in this appendix is a compilation of the most commonly reported troubles received by Tier 4 Support at Lucent Technologies For general information on troubleshooting associated with maintenance procedures see one of the following references m Chapter 5 Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting of the Release 8 2 Maintenance for R8r manual This appendix may be updated with new information at each product document release If you have troubleshooting or error recovery information that you think would be valuable to other technicians please FAX your comments to us at 1 303 538 1741 United States This appendix is organized into three main sections as described below m New for Release 8 provides information on introductions for Release 8 that might result in upgrade problems m Troubleshooting Guidelines provides general procedures to try before escalat
355. located Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 1A02 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 3A01 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m Atthe top of the cabinet coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable tray 3 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 2A02 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable
356. located cabinets route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to the EPN cabinet If a DEFINITY style PPN cabinet is collocated with another DEFINITY style EPN cabinet the preferred routing is to run the cables up the cable tray and out the top of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the other cabinet through the top of the cabinet and down the cable tray to the desired carrier level If a DEFINITY style PPN cabinet is collocated with either a small cabinet medium cabinet or single carrier cabinet stack the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level Fiber Remoted Port Networks For a standard reliability system with 1 fiber remoted EPN use 2 fiber optic cables 2 lightwave transceivers and 2 lightguide interconnect units provided by the PSC For a standard reliability system with 2 fiber remoted EPNs use 6 fiber optic cables 6 lightwave transceivers and 6 lightguide interconnect units provided by the PSC For fiber remoted cabinets route the cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the cabinet to the MDF where the lightguide interconnect units are located In either case use cable ties to secure the cable against the walls of the cable tray at the cable tie positions built into the trays DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server R
357. lock marked CURL Install the CURL with the components on the left Atthe rear connector panel determine which connectors will have a cable attached and install a 4B cable retainer on each of these connectors Install New Expansion Control Carrier A 1 Install the carrier in position A by aligning the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips support the carrier while installing the screws Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier Fasten the carrier into position with the 4 self tapping screws saved from the removal of the old carrier Ay CAUTION Carefully realign the threads on the self tapping screws by turning them counterclockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the threads out of the framework Behind the carrier replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old carrier Connect the P2 and P1 cables to the A carrier See Figure 5 12 Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made Connect the P1 cable to the C carrier Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made Connect the 8 ground straps from the D carrier to the new A carrier See Figure 5 11 These straps were left connected to the D carrier Connect the 8 ground straps from the C carrier to the new A carrier These
358. lticarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 26 Install Circuit Packs 1 Install the new Release 8 control circuit packs into carrier A Use the new label and the annotated list configuration all provided with the Release 8 removable media as a guide gt NOTE Currently the TN768 Tone Clock circuit pack resides in a port slot of the universal module being upgraded Relocate this circuit pack to the TONE CLOCK slot of carrier A Lucent Technologies recommends upgrading to the TN2182 Tone Clock Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs For a directly connected standard reliability Release 8 system with 2 port networks ensure the PPN and this EPN are both equipped with a TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack For a directly connected system with 3 port networks ensure the PPN and each EPN have two TN776 or TN570 circuit packs Interconnect Port Networks Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823A lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 4 900 feet 1493 m apart Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823B lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 25 000 feet 7620 m apart The 300A fiber optic lightwave transceiver can interconnect PNs up to 115 000 feet 21 7 miles 35 km apart gt NOTE These distance limits are approximate measurements of the actual fiber right of way not of the shortest linear distance between the 2 end
359. m Origination to INADS 5 42 Save Translations 5 42 Back Up Disk 5 43 Return Replaced Equipment 5 43 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Task Tables 5 12 Table 5 4 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r High Reliability Y Task Description Page Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance 5 45 Label Cables 5 45 Check Link Status 5 46 Disable TTI 5 46 Power Down G2 System 5 46 Install Power Failure Transfer Ground Wire 5 46 Disconnect Cables 5 47 Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carrier A 5 47 Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A 5 47 Remove Module Control Carrier A 5 47 Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier 5 51 Install New Expansion Control Carrier A 5 51 Install Circuit Packs 5 55 Interconnect Port Networks High Reliability 5 55 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages 5 66 Remove Power Failure Ground Wire 5 66 Boot the Release 8 System 5 67 Set Daylight Savings Rules 5 67 Set Date and Time 5 69 Set Additional Administration 5 71 Reconnect Cables 5 71 Power Up the EPN Cabinets 5 72 Retranslate Port Circuits 5 72 Enable TTI 5 72 Check Link Status 5 72 Enable TTI 5 72 Resolve Alarms 5 73 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 5
360. mation is correct press Enter 11 Type display time and press Enter to verify date and time data Set Core Dump Vector 1 Type set vector f spe maint and press Enterto set the core dump vector to perform a core dump on any system restart Enable TTI gt NOTE Do this step only if the TTI is disabled and you want it enabled 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter to change the TTI field back to its value before the upgrade Release MMI H C only 1 Type release board cabinet carrier slot and press Enter to release the circuit packs which were busied out earlier Resolve Alarms 1 Type display alarms and press Enter to examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Compare it with the earlier status 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for each link Enable Scheduled Maintenance 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Type the appropriate time in the Scart field to enable scheduled daily maintenance Make sure the Save Translation field is set to daily DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r Rer R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 20 Enable Customer
361. mber and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company gt NOTE REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Federal Communications Commission Statement Xxvi Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following table SOC REN Manufacturer s Port Identifier FIC Code A S Code Network Jacks Off On Premises Station OL13C 9 0F RJ2GX RJ21X RJ11C DID Trunk 02RV2 T 0 0B RJ2GX RJ21X CO Trunk 02GS2 0 3A RJ21X CO Trunk 02LS2 0 3A RJ21X Tie Trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX 1 544 Digital Interface 04DU9 B C 6 0P RJ48C RJ48M 1 544 Digital Interface 04DU9 BN KN 6 0P RJ48C RJ48M 120A2 Channel Service Unit 04DU9 DN 6 0P RJ48C If the terminal equipment DEFINITY System causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company w
362. mbly 6 69 Microsoft TCP IP Properties 22 22 22 22 33 33 33 33 11 Type domain name in the Domain field 12 If using DNS click Add underthe DNS Service Search Order field and type its IP address 13 Click on the WINS Address tab DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 70 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Microsoft TCP IP Properties 2 DEC PCI Ethemet DC21143 H Make sure the 2 DEC shows in the Adapter field If WINS server is available type its IP address in the Primary WINS Server field If DNS is available select Enable DNS for Windows Resolution If the network uses an imported LMHOSTS file select Enable LMHOSTS Lookup and Import LMHOSTS and click OK If the following dialog box opens click Yes At least one of the adapter cards has an empty primary WINS address Do you want to continue Click the Bindings tab to effect the changes NetBIOS Interface Server and Workstation should now be enabled If any are disabled a red circle with a line through it review the previous network configuration steps for omissions or errors Click Close DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 71 If administer
363. minutes to complete Until this command finishes the system provides no user feedback on the System access screen Do not press Enter while the command executes Doing so clears the terminal screen as the command finishes erasing any success or failure messages the system may provide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 17 Upgrade Software This command copies the software from the removable media to the system disk and takes about 15 minutes to complete For standard reliability A CAUTION All calls are dropped this is a service interruption 1 Type upgrade software G3V8r xx x xxx x entire alphanumeric string of new software version and press Enter At the prompt press Enter to save translations For high or critical reliability 1 Type upgrade software G3V8r xx x xxx x no calls entire alphanumeric string of new software version and press Enter At the prompt press Enter to save translations and attempt to preserve calls across the interchange For all reliabilities 2 After the system resets log in as craft 3 Checkforthe Translation Corruption Detected message before proceeding with the upgrade If corruption is detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the problem A CAUTION
364. mments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 1 April 2000 Comcode 108678335 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas Excellent Ease of Finding Information Clarity Completeness Accuracy Organization Appearance Examples Illustrations Overall Satisfaction 2 Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document Make it more concise Add more step by step procedures tutorials Add more troubleshooting information Make it less technical Add more better quick reference aids Improve the index Improve the overview introduction Improve the table of contents Improve the organization Add more figures Add more examples g g g g g Add more detail g anaua Please add details about your concern 3 What did you like most about this document 4 Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet If we may contact you concerning your comments please complete the following Name Telephone Number Company Organization Date Address When you have completed this form please fax to 303 538 1741 Thank you
365. moved from a series connected cabinet the ground plane becomes open with respect to all subsequent cabinets b If any cabinet ground wires connect in parallelto other cabinets or connect directly to the AC power panel ground or other approved ground remove the wire from each end of the ground span Carefully remove the EPN cabinet The cabinet may weigh as much as 800 pounds Use caution DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 40 9 Type change system parameters features and press Enter Use this screen to change the TTI field back to its previous value before the upgrade 10 When finished place dust covers over all exposed fiber couplings that remain after the fiber optic cables are removed 11 If any fiber optic cables were removed from Lightguide Interconnect Units LIUs or Fiber Patch Panels remove the associated cable labeling This will prevent confusion if existing fiber is later moved 12 Return all unused equipment not owned by the customer to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns Troubleshooting Message Waiting Lamps On This usually means that all affected port related translations were not unadministered 1 Type
366. mp T System 75 85 Network and Data Services Reference Manual m System 75 Application Notes Network Services m DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Administration for Network Connectivity Add Circuit Packs A TN464F TN767E or TN760E DS 1 circuit pack is required for PPP connections A TN799 Control LAN circuit pack is also required 1 Determine the port assignments of the circuit packs to be added If there are no available port slots in the processor cabinet for the Control LAN circuit pack place it in a R8 EPN cabinet port slot You do not need to power down the cabinet to install the circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add DCS Interface 6 43 Install Cables 1 Install cable from the cabinet to a hub or 110 purple wall field as required Connect the 259A connector to the port slot containing the Control LAN circuit pack See Figure 6 19 For a pinout of TN799 see Table 6 3 cydflan2 EWS 101398 lt 3 Figure Notes 1 259A Connector 3 Hub or 110 Purple Wall Field 2 DW8A Cable Figure 6 19 Cable Connection for Control LAN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add DCS Interface 6 44 Table 6 3 TN799 Pinout Peripheral Backplane Pin 25 Pair Wire Color Lead
367. mponents such that when a signal is transmitted from a switch another signal acknowledging the transmitted signal is received by the switch R2 designates signaling used in the United States and in countries outside the United States multiplexer A device used to combine a number of individual channels into a single common bit stream for transmission multiplexing A process whereby a transmission facility is divided into two or more channels either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the transmission channel into successive time slots See also time division multiplexing TDM multirate The new N x DSO service see N x DSO MWL Message waiting lamp DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 35 N N41 Method of determining redundant backup requirements Example if four rectifier modules are required for a DC powered single carrier cabinet a fifth rectifier module is installed for backup NxDSO N x DSO equivalently referred to as N x 64 kbps is an emerging standard for wideband calls separate from HO H11 and H12 ISDN channels The emerging N x DSO ISDN multirate circuit mode bearer service will provide circuit switched calls with data rate multiples of 64 kbps up to 1536 kbps on a T1 facility or up to 1920 kbps on an E1 facility In the switch N x DSO channels will range up
368. n is properly made Connect the 8 ground straps from the C carrier to the new B carrier See Figure 6 29 These straps were left connected to the C carrier when the old B carrier was removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 87 6 Connect the 8 ground straps from the A carrier to the new B carrier See Figure 6 29 These straps were left connected to the A carrier when the old B carrier was removed 7 Fora standard AC powered control carrier install the 4 carrier ground straps The straps connect ground points G1 and G8 from the top of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel bracket and ground points G9 and G16 from the bottom of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel bracket For an enhanced carrier install the 16 carrier ground straps The straps connect ground points G1 through G8 from the top of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel and ground points G9 through G16 from the bottom of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel Use the 8 screws to connect the ground straps to the connector panel see Figure 6 30 gt NOTE An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses either AC power U S or Global power gt NOTE DC powered cabinets DO NOT use an
369. n the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down Refer to the DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures at the end of this chapter Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors Power Down Existing System 1 2 At each PPN cabinet power supply set the main circuit breaker to OFF A CAUTION Powering down the PPN will cause important system data such as BCMS data records of queued ACD calls Automatic Wakeup requests and Do Not Disturb requests to be lost Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R amp r for information about preparing the system for a power down At each EPN cabinet power supply set the main circuit breaker to OFF DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 14 Disconnect Power and Ground 1 Disconnect the cabinet power cords from the rear of each cabinet 2 Disconnect the 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm coupled bonding conductor wire 3 Disconnect the 6 AWG 40 4 1 mm cabinet ground wire from the ground bar in the cabinet Install Emergency Transfer Ground Wire A CAUTION To avoid contaminating single point ground do not connect the ground strap wh
370. nationally accepted standard interfaces ISDN provides digital circuit switched or packet switched communications within the network and links to other ISDNs to provide national and international digital communications See also Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI and Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI The interface between a communications system and terminal that includes two 64 kbps B channels for transmitting voice or data and one 16 kbps D channel for transmitting associated B channel call control and out of band signaling information ISDN BRI also includes 48 kbps for transmitting framing and D channel contention information for a total interface speed of 192 kbps ISDN BRI serves ISDN terminals and digital terminals fitted with ISDN terminal adapters See also Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN andIntegrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI The interface between multiple communications systems that in North America includes 24 64 kbps channels corresponding to the North American digital signal level 1 DS1 standard rate of 1 544 Mbps The most common arrangement of channels in ISDN PRI is 23 64 kbps B channels for transmitting voice and data and 1 64 kbps D channel for transmitting associated
371. ncement circuit pack stores announcements in nonvolatile memory saving the announcements is optional 1 Ifthe PPN contains a TN750B Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter 2 If administered recorded announcements are listed type save announcements cabinet carrier slot and press Enter For example 01D03 This takes about 30 minutes gt NOTE For some software loads type save announcements from cabinet carrier slot Type help and press Enter for complete command usage Back Up Disk 1 Type backup disk and press Enter to write all information from the disk to the backup tape This takes 30 to 40 minutes 2 Remove the tape s from the tape drive s DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 8 Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm Origination to INADS gt NOTE 1 2 Make sure scheduled daily maintenance does not interfere with the upgrade Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter If scheduled maintenance has begun setthe Stop Time field to 1 minute after the current time or If scheduled maintenance has not begun set the Start Time field to a time after the upgrade is completed For example if you start the upgrade at 8 00 p m and the upgrade takes 90 minutes set the Start Time field to 21
372. nd straps The straps connect ground points G1 and G8 from the top of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel bracket and ground points G9 and G16 from the bottom of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel bracket For an enhanced carrier install the 16 carrier ground straps The straps connect ground points G1 through G8 from the top of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel and ground points G9 through G16 from the bottom of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel Use the 8 screws to connect the ground straps to the connector panel see Figure 6 35 gt NOTE An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses either AC power U S or Global power gt NOTE DC powered cabinets DO NOT use any of the above carrier ground straps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 101 lcd grn2 KLC 022100 Figure Notes 1 Standard AC powered Carrier 3 Top Ground Straps 2 Enhanced Carrier in R8r PPNs using 4 Bottom Ground Straps either AC power U S or Global power Figure 6 35 Locations of Top and Bottom Ground Straps on Standard and Enhanced Carriers 8 If the switch node carrier was installed in the D position of the PPN install the TDM LAN cable between the
373. nit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 31 main distribution frame MDF A device that mounts to the wall inside the system equipment room The MDF provides a connection point from outside telephone lines to the PBX switch and to the inside telephone stations main satellite tributary A private network configuration that can either stand alone or access an ETN A main switch provides interconnection via tie trunks with one or more subtending switches called satellites all attendant positions for the main satellite configuration and access to and from the public network To a user outside the complex a main satellite configuration appears as one switch with one listed directory number LDN A tributary switch is connected to the main switch via tie trunks but has its own attendant positions and LDN maintenance Activities involved in keeping a telecommunications system in proper working condition the detection and isolation of software and hardware faults and automatic and manual recovery from these faults management terminal The terminal that is used by the system administrator to administer the switch The terminal may also be used to access the BCMS feature major alarm An indication of a failure that has caused critical degradation of service and requires immediate attention Major alarms are automatically displaye
374. nk called the B PNC link m Board Type Display only field showing the type of circuit pack in Endpoint 2 The circuit pack type in Endpoint 2 A PNC and Endpoint 2 B PNC must be the same a DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the second endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 2 s duplicate along with Endpoint 1 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B PNC link a DS1CONV Board Type Display only field showing the type of DS1 Converter circuit pack in Endpoint 2 The circuit pack type in Endpoint 2 A PNC and Endpoint 2 B PNC must be the same This field is updated via the Change Circuit packs command DS1C Converter Complex Administration for TN574 Circuit Packs am fiber link next Page 2 of 3 UN FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION A PNC DS1 CONVERTER DS1CONV ATTRIBUTES DSICONV Board Location 01B01 DS1CONV Board Location 02B01 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 DS1CONV Board Type TN574 DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES A B C D Facility Installed yes no no no Passes Far end Clock yes yes yes yes Digital Data Compatible yes yes yes yes Line Coding ami zcs ami zcs ami zcs ami zcs Framing Mode esf esf esf esf DSICONV 1 Line Compensation 1 1 1 1 DSICONV 2 Line Compensation 1 1 1 1 Facility A Circuit ID 09876543 Xe Pi Screen 6 3 Fiber Link Administration form for TN574 Circuit Pack DS1 Convert
375. nnected to ENDPOINT 1 see Table 6 15 The DS1 line signal is pre equalized at the transmitter so that DS1 line pulses are the correct amplitude and shape when they reach the Network Interface The amount of equalization necessary is determined by the distance to the Network Interface when the endpoint supplies a DSX 1 interface and also by the type of wiring used to connect to the Network Interface The types of wiring allowed are 22 gauge ABAM shielded twisted pair cable 24 gauge Premises Distribution System PDS wiring and 26 gauge PDS wiring DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 15 Table 6 15 Distance to DSX 1 Interface feet Equalizer Setting 22 AWG ABAM amp 24 AWG PDS 26 AWG PDS 1 1 to 133 0 to 90 2 133 to 266 90 to 180 3 266 to 399 180 to 270 4 399 to 533 270 to 360 5 533 to 655 360 to 450 gt NOTE The line equalization setting defaults to 2 and remains in effect until changed by administration Because incorrect equalizer settings cause a potentially higher error rate on the DS1 facility it is necessary to provide the correct settings based on the distance to the Network interface If itis a TN574 circuit pack the default for all facilities is 1 DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation Enter the line compensation 1 to 5 in the A B C and D columns under th
376. not they must be retranslated now Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide Enable TTI 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 2 On the second screen set the Enabled field to y to activate the TTI feature Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Compare it with the earlier status 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for each link Enable Scheduled Maintenance Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Enable the scheduled daily maintenance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 112 Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8si or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rr Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination 1 Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps in the shaded box See Where to Call for Technical Support on page xx for telephone numbers gt NOTE As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination 2 When administration
377. nsion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3 Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1 At the rear of the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 Connect the 20 foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 3 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System 6 27 Interconnect Cabling Release 8r For more fiber optic cabling information refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets Switch Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and EPN Standard Reliability For the following connection example the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1 the first EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2 and the EPN cabinet containing the Switch Node Carrier is called Cabinet 4 gt NOTE For the following example add links to PNs in alternating order for example 20 and 2 19 and 3 18 and 4 and so forth 1 Atthe rear of the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 1 install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 1B02 See Figure 6 15 2 Connect a 20 foot fiber optic c
378. nsion control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up 3 Install the CFY1 current limiter CURL on the A carrier to the pin field block marked CURL The CURL is inserted with the components on the left side as viewed from the rear 4 Atthe rear connector panel determine which connectors will have a cable attached and install a 4B cable retainer on each of these connectors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 84 Install the New A and B Position Carriers T 10 11 Install the J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier in position A by lining up the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet These alignment tips will support the carrier while the screws are being replaced Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self tapping screws saved from the removal of the old carrier A CAUTION Carefully realign the threads on the self tapping screws by turning them counterclockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the threads out of the framework Behind the carrier in a DEFINITY style cabinet replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old carrier Install the J58890BB 3 port carrier in pos
379. nsure that the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier 2 Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self tapping screws saved from the removal of the old carrier CAUTION Carefully realign the threads on the self tapping screws by turning them clockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the threads out of the framework 3 Behind the carrier in a DEFINITY style cabinet replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old carrier 4 Connect the P1 small connector to the D carrier If necessary to get enough slack in the cables cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable from the upright in the area being installed Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made 5 Connect the 8 ground straps from either the A carrier or the enhanced fan unit to the new D carrier See Figure 6 38 These straps were left connected when the old D carrier was removed 6 Connect the 8 ground straps from the E carrier if installed to the new D carrier See Figure 6 38 These straps were left connected to the E carrier when the old D carrier was removed 7 Fora standard AC powered control carrier install the 4 carrier ground straps The straps connect ground points G1 and G8 from the top of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel bracket and ground points G9 and G16 from the bottom of the B carrier backplane to the B ca
380. nt NN National number node A switching or control point for a network Nodes are either tandem they receive signals and pass them on or terminal they originate or terminate a transmission path Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS A method that allows multiple T1 and or E1 facilities to share a single D channel to form an ISDN PRI If D channel backup is not used one facility is configured with a D channel and the other facilities that share the D channel are configured without D channels If D channel backup is used two facilities are configured to have D channels one D channel on each facility and the other facilities that share the D channels are configured without D channels NPA Numbering plan area NPE Network processing element NQC Number of queued calls NSE Night service extension NSU Network sharing unit null modem cable Special wiring of an RS 232 C cable such that a computer can talk to another computer or to a printer without a modem NXX Public network office code O OA Operator assisted occurrence See appearance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 37 OCM Outbound Call Management offered load The traffic that would be generated by all the requests for service occurring within a monitored interval usually one hour ONS On premises station OPS Off pr
381. nter gt NOTE The customer provides the IP address subnet mask and gateway address At this time the TN802B LCD reads PC BOOT and about 3 to 4 minutes later reads MEDPRO with the asterisk flashing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 55 change ip interfaces Page 1 of m Network regions are interconnected n En Net abled Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Bcast Gway Addr Rgn n C LAN 01A09 TN799 clan al 2554 2554 255 0 192 168 1 100 1 y MEDPRO 01A13 TN802 B med al 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 21 1 n 255 255 255 0 n 209 29902955 0 n 2595 25954 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 209 299 299 40 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 2 55 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 2002295425540 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 E Test the External Connection to the LAN To test the external IP connections ping the IP Interface server and ping a known computer connected to your network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads pass If it reads abort verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling 1 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the TN802B IP Interface and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and sl
382. nter key in the numbers section of the keyboard not the Enter Return key in the letters section Information displayed on the screen is shown as login Keyboard keys are shown as Enter Circuit pack codes for example TN792 or TN754B are shown with the minimum acceptable alphabetic suffix like the B in the code TN754B Generally an alphabetic suffix higher than the 1 shown is also acceptable However not every vintage of either the minimum suffix or a higher suffix code is necessarily acceptable gt NOTE Refer to Technical Monthly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices for current information about the usable vintages of specific circuit pack codes including the suffix in a Release 8 system The following conventions describe the systems referred to in this book The word system is a general term encompassing Release 8 and includes references to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server DEFINITY Systems in this book are called G3V2 G3v3 G3V4 Release 5 Release 5si memory Release 5r Release 6 Release 6si Release 6r Release 8r Release 8 and Release 8si Information in this book is applicable for Release 5 through Release 8 unless otherwise specified DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server is abbreviated DEFINITY ECS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Related Books xix
383. ntinued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Task Tables 5 14 Table 5 5 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r Critical Reliability Continued v Task Description Page Resolve Alarms F112 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination 5 112 Save Translations 5 113 Back Up Disk 5 113 Return Replaced Equipment 5 113 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability Standard Reliability Required Hardware Issue 1 April 2000 5 15 The equipment in Table 5 6 must be on site before the upgrade begins To place a claim for missing equipment as part of the Streamlined Implementation process call 1 800 772 5409 or the number provided by your Lucent Technologies representative Table 5 6 Required Hardware Equipment Description Quantity PEC 6300 05X Processor Port Network 1 J58890AF 1 Expansion Control Carrier 1 106647985 TN775B Maintenance 1 103557294 TN776 Expansion Interface 20r6 or 103281788 TN570 Expansion Interface 2or6 1 407439975 20 Foot Multi mode Fiber Optic Cable 1or33 106455348 9823A Lightwave Transceiver 20r6 or 106455363 9823B Lightwave Transceiver 20r6 1 Depending on the number of Release 8 EPN
384. o disk Release 8 system software is now resident on the disk If high or critical reliability 2 Type restore disk full both and press Enter to write the new software to disk gt NOTE This command may take up to 25 minutes to complete Until this command finishes the system provides no user feedback on the System access screen Do not press Enter while the command executes Doing so clears the terminal screen as the command finishes erasing any success or failure messages the system may provide Upgrade Software This command copies the software from the removable media to the system disk and takes about 15 minutes to complete For standard reliability CAUTION All calls are dropped this is a service interruption 1 Type upgrade software G3V8r xx x xxx x entire alohanumeric string of new software version and press Enter At the prompt press Enter to save translations DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 16 For high or critical reliability 1 Type upgrade software G3V8r xx x xxx x no calls entire alohanumeric string of new software version and press Enter At the prompt press Enter to save translations and attempt to preserve calls across the interchange For all reliabilities 2 After the system resets log in as craft 3 Checkfo
385. o initiate a demand PNC interchange If the standby interchange is healthy state of health indexes all zero there is no effect on service Otherwise calls may be dropped set pnc Used to lock or unlock the active PNC preventing interchanges It does not interfere with double call setup busyout pnc Removes the standby PNC from service ATM Expansion Interface ATM EI The ATM EI maintenance object covers the ATM circuit pack administered as an ATM Port Network Connectivity PNC Expansion Interface ATM EI The ATM EI provides PNC between a DEFINTY PPN and all the EPNs through the ATM switch The circuit packs listed below are ATM EI boards f they are administered to serve the ATM Port Network Connectivity ATM PNC for DEFINITY Echo Circuit pack Fiber cancellation TN2305B Multi mode Y TN2306B Single mode Y Mass Storage System The Mass Storage System MSS provides non volatile storage for system software translation data announcement data and program update data As shown in the figure below the MSS consists of a Host Adapter circuit on the UN332C MSS Network Control circuit pack MSSNET a Small Computer System Interface SCSI bus a TN2211 Optical Drive circuit pack or a TN1656 Tape Drive circuit pack and the TN1657 Disk Drive circuit pack The Disk Drive acts as the primary storage device The TN2211 Optical Drive or TN1656 Tape Drive serves as a backup device and as a removable medium for system data DEF
386. o make sure the active side is ready for interchange When it is ready m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up m Both SPEs show functional Because of the memory mismatch between the standby and active SPEs typing the status spe command yields two different scenarios Upgrade other carrier H C only To upgrade the other carrier lock the SPE switches on the DUPINT to the other carrier The new active carrier resets cold 2 restart Wait until the login prompt appears then log in Upgrade Software This command copies the software from the removable media to the system disk and takes about 15 minutes to complete All calls are dropped this is a service interruption DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 What s New in Release 8 2r xiii Upgrade tips The following upgrade tips were generated from problems identified in the laboratory or during early introduction a Adding a third memory circuit pack and an optical drive requires a second non call preserving service interruption See Chapter 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory a When upgrading a DEFINITY ECS Rer to a duplicated system B carrier or adding a switch node carrier D carrier you may receive a carrier that looks different than the ones c
387. o the following appears after the procedure is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 36 All Installations 1 When the system reset is finished type status port network 2 and press Enter The Port Network Status screen appears Verify that PNC Active is up and that the Service State is in A Span LED on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack must be off for each inactive facility administered For example if Facility A and Facility B are unadministered then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be off If the yellow LEDs are on then problems were encountered during the unadministration of hardware Span LEDs associated with administered facilities C and D in this example should be on Removing the Hardware 1 8 Be sure that you have unadministered the trunks attendant consoles voice terminals and data modules associated with the port circuit packs in the EPN cabinet Remove the fiber optic cables from the fiber transceivers at both ends of the fiber span Carefully coil the fiber optic cables Avoid bending cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Remove the fiber transceivers from the DS1 and or DS1 converter circuit
388. o the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager For 2 Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 63 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300
389. ocedures and necessary equipment refer to the Preventive Maintenance section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar Label Cables To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable label both ends of the connector cables associated with the carrier to be removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 46 Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Write down all enabled links 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for all links 3 Write down which links are in service Disable TTI A CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Make sure the ISDN is in service If not attempt to busy out and release the ISDN D channel link This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service 2 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 3 On the second screen set the Enabled field to n to prevent the TTI feature from activating Power Down G2 System At the power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to OFF Install Power Failure Transfer Ground Wire A CAUTION To avoid contaminating single point ground do not connect the ground wire while the system is powered up 1 Connect a 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm wire to pin 49 of the
390. om the G2 power module 14 If the expansion control carrier contains a 631BR1 631WB1 or 645B power unit install the previously removed TN736 power unit in port slots 18 and 19 of the carrier adjacent to the 631BR1 631WB1 or 645B If the system is equipped for neon message waiting a TN752 or TN755 power unit must be used gt NOTE The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 or 645B power unit is used in the J58890AH control carrier or the J58890BB 2 or J58890BB 3 port carriers It is required in the J58890BB 1 port carrier regardless of which 631 power unit is provided Use the TN752 or TN755 if the system is equipped with neon message waiting 15 Connect the white power cords to the power units DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 55 Install Circuit Packs 1 Install the new Release 8 control circuit packs into carrier A Use the new label and the annotated list configuration all provided with the Release 8 removable media as a guide gt NOTE Currently the TN768 Tone Clock circuit pack resides in a port slot of the universal module being upgraded Relocate this circuit pack to the TONE CLOCK slot of carrier A Lucent Technologies recommends that you upgrade to the TN2182 Tone Clock Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with cir
391. ommunications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 27 Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic Cabling High Reliability Release 8r 1 Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave transceiver This section provides figures showing typical ways of making these connections The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled TX transmit or RX receive while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered 1 or 2 See Figure 3 10 Collocated Port Networks For a high reliability system with 1 collocated EPN use 1 fiber optic cable and 2 lightwave transceivers or 1 single mode fiber optic cable and 2 single mode lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks For a high reliability system with 2 collocated EPN use 3 fiber optic cables and 6 lightwave transceivers or 3 single mode fiber optic cables and 6 single mode lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks gt NOTE Based on floor plan considerations the length of these cables may vary 20 foot 6 1 m cables are normally adequate for a Release 8r with 2 port networks For collocated cabinets route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to each EPN cabinet Since a Release 8r PPN cabinet is collocated with a Single Carrier Cabinet stack the preferred routing is
392. ommunications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 99 Prepare New Switch Node Carrier D 1 Visually inspect the new J58890SA Switch Node Carrier for any damage Verify that the backplane pins are not bent gt NOTE The enhanced R8r PPN AC carrier may look different than the other carriers because it comes with 16 new grounding jumpers and 8 mounting screws Place the switch node carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up Verify that the four AHF105 switch node SN bus terminators are installed on the D carrier to the pin field blocks marked SNTRM top and bottom portions of slots 02 and 20 See Figure 6 34 The SN bus terminators attach with the components on the left side as viewed from the rear Atthe rear connector panel determine which connectors will have a cable attached and install a 4C cable retainer on each of these connectors ROW 49 a MMC ROW 35 ROW 25 gt SLOT gt 04 03 02 01 00 ROW 24 SNITRMI TDM LAN TDM LAN SNITRM2 Figure 6 34 ICC Connections for Switch Node Carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliabil
393. on Errors When instructed in this chapter perform the save translation command Afterward check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade gt NOTE Be sure that the translations get saved without errors before continuing with any upgrade If errors are detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the problem Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors are corrected Communication Between Equipment Rooms For an upgrade where some of the equipment resides at a remote location the upgrade activity is much easier if temporary communication is established between the equipment rooms DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Read This First 4 3 Usable Circuit Packs Every circuit pack used in the Release 8 system must conform to the minimum usable vintage requirements for that system At a presale site inspection the remediation process checks the vintages of existing circuit packs to be reused in the Release 8 system Circuit packs with unusable vintages must be replaced Refer to Technical Quarterly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages Change Notices and to the Software Release Letter for information about usable circuit pack vintages For information about usable vintages of non United States circuit packs
394. onnect Cables 1 With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible 4B or 4C locate the slot that is almost vertical This slot is adjacent to the part number Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a 1 4 inch blade into the slot and twist The retainer will snap open easily Remove the cable 2 Disconnect previously labeled cables associated with the carrier to be removed 3 Behind a DEFINITY style cabinet remove the back doors from the cabinet 4 Behind a previously upgraded cabinet remove all of the back panels Two different types of screws hold the back panels to the cabinet The 10 screws can be removed with a screwdriver or a 1 4 inch socket The 12 screws can be removed with a screwdriver or a 5 16 inch socket Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carriers A and B 1 To ensure that power units in the A and B carriers are properly replaced label each power unit with its slot number 2 Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the A and B carriers 3 Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier A Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging 4 Remove all circuit packs from carrier B Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging 5 Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit packs 6 Remove the front trim plate from the B carrier by pulling it straight off Then remove the front trim plate from the A car
395. onnect Port Networks 1 Behind the PPN cabinet See Figure 6 37 a Connect the metallic intracarrier cable between slots 1E01 and 1E02 b Connect the metallic intracarrier cable between slots 1D01 and 1D02 2 Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1 See Figure 6 37 a For each EPN install one 9823 type lightwave transceiver on the following order of slots 1E20 1E03 1E19 1E04 1E18 1E05 and so forth b Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 3 Behind control carrier A of each EPN cabinet a Install a lightwave transceiver on slot A01 b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions d Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray 4 Behind switch node carrier D of PPN cabinet 1 See Figure 6 37 a For each EPN install a lightwave transceiver on the following order of slots 1E20 1E03 1E19 1E04 1E18 1E05 and so forth b Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the
396. ons Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 108 Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability To upgrade to a high or critical reliability R8r a second switch node carrier is added either to an empty E carrier position of an existing multicarrier port network or to the D carrier position as the duplicate switch node carrier of an existing multicarrier cabinet gt NOTE To avoid moving a port carrier the preferred practice is to place the new switch node carrier in an empty carrier position Service Interruption 1 Since the addition of the second switch node carrier requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be carried out Verify System Status 1 Before proceeding the system should be examined for alarms and every problem should be corrected The system must be alarm free Disable Alarm Origination 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Make a note of the Alarm Origination Activated field administration If the feature is enabled type n in this field and press Enter to disable Alarm Origination A WARNING If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the switch the switch may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets Reducing redundant and unnec
397. ons for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 13 hidfdsk1 KLC 091799 Figure 2 3 Do not touch the disk inside the cartridge Power Up the Processor Carrier 1 To restore power to the processor carrier insert the power plug on the right side of the carrier then insert the power plug on the eft side of the carrier If high or critical reliability 2 Monitor the SPE as it reboots by observing the LEDs and the terminal It is powered up when the YELLOW LED on the Processor circuit pack blinks in a steady state which takes about 10 minutes Unlock the Active SPE H C only 1 Move the SPE SELECT switches to the AUTO position one at a time 2 Wait 10 minutes A CAUTION Allow 10 minutes after unlocking to make sure the standby SPE has fully returned to service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 14 Verify Interchange H C only 1 Type status spe and press Enter to make sure the standby side is ready for interchange m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up If the standby SPE does not fully return to service refer to the STBY SPE Maintenance Object section in the Maintenance book Upgrade Ot
398. ools and other items m Wrist ground strap m Static proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit packs m One copy of each of the following books DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide Antistatic Protection CAUTION When handling circuit packs or any components of a DEFINITY ECS system always wear an antistatic wrist ground strap Connect the strap to an approved ground such as ground jack on the DEFINITY ECS system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Read This First 2 4 Required Hardware The equipment in Table 2 1 must be on site before the upgrade begins To place a claim for missing equipment as part of the Streamlined Implementation process call 1 800 772 5409 or the number provided by your Lucent Technologies representative Table2 1 Required Hardware Quantity Equipment Description Standard High Critical 108566381 UN332C MSSNET circuit pack 1 2 107849754 TN2211 optical drive 1 2 106590953 Z100A1 apparatus blank 1 2 J58890TO 1 L1 Formatted removable media with 2 4 or Release 8 software J58890TF 1 L1 848445086 Carrier A strip label 1 NA 848445094 Carrier B strip label NA 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications S
399. or Network Connectivity If you have existing TN802 IP Interface circuit packs you can upgrade them either by replacing the circuit pack with a TN802B or by downloading the TN802B firmware onto the circuit packs see Upgrade to TN802B R8 on page 6 76 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 46 Prepare for Installation Have the following equipment on site before your shipment arrives AC power outlets for the modem and monitor Three unoccupied and adjoining port slots in the DEFINITY ECS for the TN802B IP Interface if needed The TN802B occupies only one slot but it needs the two slots to its left for clearance An additional unoccupied port slot for the TN799B if needed If you have an existing TN799 circuit pack replace it with the TN799B A 10 BaseT or 10 100 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area network for the TN802B A 10 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area network for the TN799B Two or more valid unused IP addresses on your network one for MedPro and one for C LAN that can be assigned to the IP Interface server You also need the subnet mask and default gateway An analog telephone line reserved DID is okay for the IP Interface diagnostic modem A valid telephone number reserved for the IP Interface diagnostic modem In addition if non
400. or example if Facility A and Facility B are unadministered then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be off If the yellow LEDs are on then problems were encountered during the unadministration of hardware Span LEDs associated with administered facilities C and D in this example should be on Removing the Hardware 1 8 Be sure that you have unadministered the trunks attendant consoles voice terminals and data modules associated with the port circuit packs in the EPN cabinet Remove the fiber optic cables from the fiber transceivers at both ends of the fiber span Carefully coil the fiber optic cables Avoid bending cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Remove the fiber transceivers from the DS1 and or DS1 converter circuit packs at both ends of each fiber span Remove the 25 pair cables from the connector panel on each carrier of the EPN Type remove cabinet number and press Enter This removes the EPN cabinet administration Remove the power cords from the power units in each carrier in the EPN and remove the AC power cord or DC power wires Check the grounding scheme for the cabinets Perform the following a If any cabinet ground wires connect in series between the EPN cabinet and any other cabinet remove the wires from the EPN cabinet and connect them to the next cabinet in the ground plane A CAUTION Never leave cabinets ungrounded When a ground wire is re
401. or some releases of the software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields before submitting the form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add MCC Port Carriers 6 129 Save Translations 1 Log in at the management terminal 2 Ifthe system is high or critical reliability type status spe and press Enter to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in service 3 Type save translation spe a or both disk and press Enter This command instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the disk s 4 If the MCC port network contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed type list configuration software version and press Enter Check screen 2 to find out when the announcements were last saved Save the current announcements by typing save announcements and pressing Enter 5 Type backup disk spe a or both and press Enter This command instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the system tape s 6 Update backup tape s if required Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and
402. orresponding to the TN799B slot 3 If adding a new TN799B connect one end of the DW8 cable to the 259A connector Connect the other end to the customer s network 4 Connect the amphenol connector on the external cable assembly to the backplane connector corresponding to the TN802B slot the highest numbered connector of the 3 slots required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 49 Connect the Modem gt NOTE These instructions are for connecting the U S Robotics modem supplied to U S customers only If using a different modem follow the manufacturer s instructions on connecting the modem 1 Connect the RS232 port of the modem to the MODEM connector of the TN802B external cable assembly gt NOTE Check the labels near the connectors the MODEM and COM2 connectors look the same 2 Connect an analog telephone line to the left most analog line port on the modem as shown in Figure 6 21 3 Make sure that the modem s DIP switches are set as shown in Figure 6 21 and Table 6 5 4 Plug the modem into an AC power outlet 5 Turn on the modem using the switch on the front of the modem modfrobo KLC 030499 Figure Notes 1 Connect analog line here 3 Connect MODEM connector here 2 DIP switch 5
403. ot of the TN802B IP Interface ping ip address 192 168 10 21 PING RESULTS End pt IP Port Port Type Result Time ms Error Code 192 168 10 21 01A13 MEDPRO PASS 10 1124 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the customer s gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN802B IP Interface DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 56 3 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of another computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN802B IP Interface The TN802B IP Interface is now installed in the DEFINITY carrier and connected to the IP network Installing in IP Trunk Mode gt NOTE IP Trunk mode should only be used to maintain compatibility with existing Release 7 IP Trunk or ITS E installations We strongly recommend that MedPro mode be used whenever possible Prepare for Installation Have the following equipment on site before your shipment arrives m A mouse keyboard and VGA monitor for use during the installation of the server You also need AC power outlets for the modem and monitor m Three adjoining unoccupied port slots in the DEFINITY ECS The TN802B IP Interface slide
404. oth ends or at a modem pool at the distant end analog telephone A telephone that receives acoustic voice signals and sends analog electrical signals along the telephone line Analog telephones are usually served by a single wire pair tip and ring The model 2500 telephone set is a typical example of an analog telephone analog to digital converter ADC A device that converts an analog signal to digital form See also digital to analog converter DAC angel A microprocessor located on each port card in a processor port network PPN The angel uses the control channel message set CCMS to manage communications between the port card and the archangel on the controlling switch processing element SPE The angel also monitors the status of other microprocessors on a port card and maintains error counters and thresholds ANI See Automatic Number Identification ANI ANSI American National Standards Institute A United States professional technical association supporting a variety of standards answerback code A number used to respond to a page from a code calling or loudspeaker paging system or to retrieve a parked call AOL Attendant offered load AP Applications processor APLT Advanced Private Line Termination DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 5 appearance A software process that is associated with
405. ou plug in the TN802B IP Interface Assembly the circuit pack starts to boot and the LCD reads PC Boot The circuit pack reboots automatically and after about 3 to 4 minutes the LCD changes to IPTRK the default mode or MEDPRO If the TN802B is pre administered at the factory it reboots several times to initialize to MedPro mode If the TN802B is not pre administered go to Administration Steps on page 6 53 gt NOTE For an initial installation the TN802B IP Interface needs to be administered first see Administer the IP Interface on page 6 53 indfmapd KLC 031299 Figure 6 23 J58890MA 1 L30 IP Interface Assembly DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 53 Administer the TN799B C LAN Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Administration for Network Connectivity Administer the IP Interface Administration is usually done remotely call your service representative to start the process Administration Steps gt NOTE Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Administration for Network Connectivity for Release 8 for specific information 1 Log in as craft 2 Type change node names and press Enter 3 On screen 2 type in the node name and IP address for the TN802B CUR node names Page 2 of NS NODE N
406. own the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down A CAUTION Before using this procedure to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system A WARNING 1 Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway for the procedure to log in 2 When the main menu appears select Maintenance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 82 3 Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu 4 Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu 5 Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 If a DEFINITY AUDIX resides in the PPN or an EPN where PPN Port Carrier B will be relocated shut down the AUDIX and allow the disk to completely spin down Refer to DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures on page 6 141 Ay WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk 2 Unseat the AUDIX
407. packs at both ends of each fiber span Remove the 25 pair cables from the connector panel on each carrier of the EPN Type remove cabinet number and press Enter This removes the EPN cabinet administration Remove the power cords from the power units in each carrier in the EPN and remove the AC power cord or DC power wires Check the grounding scheme for the cabinets Perform the following a If any cabinet ground wires connect in series between the EPN cabinet and any other cabinet remove the wires from the EPN cabinet and connect them to the next cabinet in the ground plane A CAUTION Never leave cabinets ungrounded When a ground wire is removed from a series connected cabinet the ground plane becomes open with respect to all subsequent cabinets b If any cabinet ground wires connect in parallelto other cabinets or connect directly to the AC power panel ground or other approved ground remove the wire from each end of the ground span Carefully remove the EPN cabinet The cabinet may weigh as much as 800 pounds Use caution DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System 6 37 9 Type change system parameters features and press Enter Use this screen to change the TTI field back to its previous setting before the upgrade 10 When finished place du
408. pgrade it is possible that network access trunk facilities will be busied out at the far end Communication Between Equipment Rooms For an upgrade where some of the equipment resides at a remote location the upgrade activity is much easier if temporary communication is established between the equipment rooms DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This First 5 3 Relocation of Port Circuit Packs An upgrade to Release 8 does not cause G2 port circuit packs to be moved and manually retranslated This is because a G2 universal module is always upgraded to an EPN So during the upgrade a Release 8 expansion control carrier with 18 available port slots always replaces the G2 module control carrier with no port slots providing a net gain of 18 port slots Usable Circuit Packs Each circuit pack used in the upgraded Release 8 system must conform to the minimum usable vintage requirements for Release 8 Those circuit packs shipped in the new Release 8 PPN or shipped loose with the new EPN equipment should always meet the usable vintage specifications In addition at a presale site inspection the remediation process must check the vintages of every G2 circuit pack including any CFY1 current limiters that will be reused in the upgraded Release 8 and replace those circuit packs that have unusable vintages Refe
409. pgrade 4 6 Save Translations and Announcements 4 7 Check Link Status 4 7 Disable TTI 4 8 Disable Alarm Origination to INADS 4 8 Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 4 8 Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 4 9 Power Down Present System 4 9 Install Emergency Transfer Ground Wire 4 9 Remove the Present System 4 10 Unpack and Install the Release 8r Cabinet 4 11 Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire 4 11 Power Up the Release 8r 4 11 List Configuration Software Long 4 11 Restore Disk Full 4 12 Set Daylight Savings Rules 4 12 Set Date and Time 4 13 Re Record Announcements TN750 B 4 15 Copy Announcements TN750 B 4 15 Install Remaining Hardware and Administer the System 4 16 Enable TTI 4 16 Check Link Status 4 16 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 4 16 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Task Tables 4 5 Table 4 1 Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r Continued V Task Description Page Resolve Alarms 4 16 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 4 17 Save Translations 4 18 Back Up Disk 4 18 Return Replaced Equipment 4 18 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Preliminary Procedures 4 6 Preliminary Procedures
410. pins Static proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit packs Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the rear of cabinets Twelve spare 12 and 10 self tapping screws Four spare carrier ground straps Wrist ground strap Repair kit for backplane pins KS 22876 L2 or equivalent One copy of each of the following manuals DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8si or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance During the upgrade follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the system to be upgraded For information about the procedures and necessary equipment refer to the Preventive Maintenance section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for H r Label Cables To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable label both ends of the connector cables associated with the carrier to be removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 17 Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Write down all enabled links 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step fo
411. plan area code RHNPA A foreign numbering plan area code that is treated as a home area code by the Automatic Route Selection ARS feature Calls can be allowed or denied based on the area code and the dialed CO code rather than just the area code If the call is allowed the ARS pattern used for the call is determined by these six digits Remote Operations Service Element ROSE A CCITT and ISO standard that defines a notation and services that support interactions between the various entities that make up a distributed application REN Ringer equivalency number reorder tone A tone to signal that at least one of the facilities such as a trunk or a digit transmitter needed for the call was not available report scheduler Software that is used in conjunction with the system printer to schedule the days of the week and time of day that the desired reports are to be printed RFP Request for proposal RHNPA See remote home numbering plan area code RHNPA RINL Remote indirect neighbor link RISC Reduced instruction set computer RLT Release link trunk DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 43 RMATS Remote Maintenance Administration and Traffic System RNX Route number index private network office code ROM See read only memory ROM RPN Routing plan number RS 232C A physical interface specified
412. points gt NOTE It is important to label every cable that you install gt NOTE Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave transceiver This section provides figures offering suggested ways of making these connections The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled either TX transmit or RX receive while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered either 1 or 2 A viable fiber connection is only made when both fibers in each cable 1 and 2 route from the TX connector of a port network to the RX connector of its adjacent port network See Figure 5 6 gt NOTE When finished refer to Appendix A Fiber Link Administration to administer the fiber links DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 27 Collocated Port Networks For a standard reliability system with 1 collocated EPN use 1 fiber optic cable and 2 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks For a standard reliability system with 2 collocated EPNs use 3 fiber optic cables and 6 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks gt NOTE Based on floor plan considerations the length of these cables may vary 20 foot 6 1 m cables are normally adequate for a Release 8 with 2 port networks For col
413. priate for the caller and routes the call to an agent when one becomes available Automatic Call Distribution ACD split A method of routing calls of a similar type among agents in a call center Also a group of extensions that are staffed by agents trained to handle a certain type of incoming call Automatic calling unit ACU A device that places a telephone call Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA A feature that tracks calls of unusual duration to facilitate troubleshooting A high number of very short calls or a low number of very long calls may signify a faulty trunk Automatic Number Identification ANI Representation of the calling number for display or for further use to access information about the caller Available with Signaling System 7 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 7 automatic restoration A service that restores disrupted connections between access endpoints nonsignaling trunks and data endpoints devices that connect the switch to data terminal and or communications equipment Restoration is done within seconds of a service disruption so that critical data applications can remain operational Automatic Route Selection ARS A feature that allows the system to automatically choose the least cost way to send a toll call automatic trunk A trunk that does not require addressing information because the de
414. process requires a service interruption of about 40 minutes Coordinate this service interruption with the customer and the local account team Call Management System CMS The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade This causes CMS data to be lost This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just after the last CMS measurement interval All measurement data is lost during the upgrade including BCMS If needed the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the conference dropped off the call before the end of the call Customers experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to r3v4ao e or higher Preventing Translation Errors When instructed in this chapter perform the save translation command Afterward check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade gt NOTE Be sure that the translations get saved without errors before continuing with any upgrade If errors are detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the problem Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors are corrected Contact Network Technicians Contact the technician for each public and private network accessed by the system before the upgrade begins Otherwise if these technicians are not aware of the service interruption caused by the u
415. processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones and keyboard characters and makes the proper connections both within the system and external to the system The communications system itself consists of a digital computer software storage device and carriers with special hardware to perform the connections A communications system provides voice and data communications services including access to public and private networks for telephones and data terminals on a customer s premises See also switch confirmation tone A tone confirming that feature activation deactivation or cancellation has been accepted connectivity The connection of disparate devices within a single system console See attendant console contiguous Adjacent DSOs within one T1 or E1 facility or adjacent TDM or fiber time slots The first and last TDM bus DSO or fiber time slots are not considered contiguous no wraparound For an E1 facility with a D channel DSOs 15 and 17 are considered contiguous control cabinet See control carrier control carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains the SPE circuit packs and unlike an R5r control carrier port circuit packs Also called control cabinet in a single carrier cabinet See also switch processing element SPE DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 14 controlled station
416. r card DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 10 Release 5 6si to Release 8r During the wiring of the PPN installation label the MDF with the new PN number of the Release 5 6si PPN The STS software upgrade assigns the next PN number after the highest numbered PN in the Release 5 6si system to the upgraded Release 8r EPN Required Tools The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade m 1 4 inch flat blade screwdriver m 1 4 inch socket with ratchet optional m Long nose pliers to straighten backplane pins m Static proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit packs m Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the rear of cabinets m Repair kit for backplane pins KS 22876 L2 or equivalent a One copy of each of the following manuals DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 11 Required Hardware The equipment in Table 3 2 must be on site before
417. r 3 29 For 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind port carrier D of the multicarrier PPN a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1D02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1D02 c Route the cable to the cabinet s cable tray and down out of the cabinet to the EPN stack d Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 3 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 3A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the lightwave transceiver at slot 3A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet 3 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed c Route the cable down the outsi
418. r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 61 cydffo5 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To EPN Carrier A Slot 2A02 5 RX Connection 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A02 6 TX Connection Figure 5 17 Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2 For Either One or Two Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 see Figure 5 19 through Figure 5 22 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connecta fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 62 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver Connect the fiber optic cable t
419. r Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 97 Remove Port Carrier D Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier position gt NOTE Note the position of the TDM LAN cables before disconnecting 1 If a switch node carrier is being installed in the D position of an EPN remove the TDM LAN cable from between the D and A carriers For other EPNs or the PPN disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the D and A carriers from the D carrier 2 Remove the ZAHF4 TDM LAN bus terminator from slot 21 of the D carrier 3 Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps between the D and E carriers from the D carrier See Figure 6 33 These straps will be reconnected to the new D carrier 4 Disconnect the 8 ground straps from the D carrier between the D and A carriers or the D carrier and the enhanced fan unit see Figure 6 33 Reconnect the 8 ground straps to the D carrier 5 Disconnect the P1 small 9 pin connector from the D carrier Move the cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier 6 Remove the 4 screws top 2 first holding the D carrier to the cabinet frame Use a long handle screwdriver or 5 16 inch socket with a 10 inch extension 7 Behind the D carrier in a DEFINITY s
420. r Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 20 LR B up LIL LL UL LII LI LI scdafo_4 KLC 051298 Figure 6 11 Connect Fiber Cable to Circuit Pack 14 Dress the cable using the supplied cable ties and cable tie mounts See Figure 6 12 zz NOTE Dress the fiber optic cable straight down the front of the circuit pack Do not allow the cable to cross in front of another circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 21 Icda4fop RPY 021398 Figure 6 12 Dress the Cable 15 If a circuit pack was removed to access 2 open slots from Cabinet Preparation on page 6 10 replace the circuit pack into its original slot 16 Close the front door 17 Discard the pass thru tool Test the Installation 1 Login to the management terminal 2 Administer the system by referring to the ATM section of the nstallation and Test for Adjuncts and Peripherals 3 Type list configuration all and press Enter to determine if the new circuit pack appears in the correct slot and that there are no circuit pack conflicts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removin
421. r all links 3 Write down which links are in service Disable TTI A CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Make sure the ISDN is in service If not attempt to busy out and release the ISDN D channel link This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service 2 Type change system parameters features and press Enter Use screen 2 to disable Terminal Translation Initialization TTI by changing the value to n Power Down G2 System 1 At the common control s power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to OFF 2 Atthe universal module s power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to OFF Install Power Failure Transfer Ground Wire A CAUTION To avoid contaminating single point ground do not connect the ground wire while the system is powered up 1 Connect a 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm wire to pin 49 of the connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP cable access panel on the power failure transfer panel 2 Route the opposite end of the wire to an approved ground and connect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 18 Disconnect Cables 1 With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible 4B or 4C locate the slot that is almost vertical This slot is adjacent to the part number Insert a 2 flat blade sc
422. r just installed Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 101 5 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A02 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 6 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A02 Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber cable to the
423. r the idle code in the Idle Code MSB 1 LSB 8 field The default value is 11101000 It is recommended that the default value be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary to change it The MSB means Most Significant Bit the LSB means Least Significant Bit Inthe Line Coding field enter the line coding information This information should match the line coding of the facility For T1 example line coding is b8zs For E1 example line coding is hdb3 gt NOTE If this data is not correct wideband errors multimedia call handling may occur 5 For T1 sites refer to T1 Installations Only For E1 sites refer to E1 Installations Only DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 4 T1 Installations Only 1 2 The Framing Mode field is display only and shows the hardware setting The DS1CONV 1 Line Compensation and the DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation fields are display only and show the hardware setting Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED E1 Installations Only 1
424. r to Technical Monthly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices for current information about usable vintages in a Release 8 system In most configurations the 2 or 3 circuit pack combination of a tone generator pack tone detector pack and or call classifier pack can be replaced with the TN2182 circuit pack freeing up 1 or 2 port slots Since Release 8 supports non United States call processing applications a wide variety of non United States circuit packs can be used Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information Site Inspections For the purposes of a Release 8 upgrade most G2 systems are already equipped with the correct TDM LAN cables WP 91716 L6 and L7 and the correct lightwave transceivers 9823A or 9823B However some G2 systems contain earlier versions of these components and based on a site inspection these older components must be replaced The 2 earlier versions of the TDM LAN cable included the WP 91112 L1 and L2 and the WP 91716 L1 and L2 Both of these versions had white labels In contrast the correct cables WP 91716 L6 and L7 have blue labels If a remediation site inspection reveals that the older cables reside in the system replace the older cables under the remediation process DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Read This Fi
425. rade begins Otherwise if these technicians are not aware of the service interruption caused by the upgrade it is possible that network access trunk facilities will be busied out at the far end DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Read This First 3 3 Relocation of Port Circuit Packs With the possible exception of a port circuit pack in slot 01 of carrier A that must be moved for a TN570 Expansion Interface an upgrade to Release 8 does not cause port circuit packs from the Release 5 6si control cabinet to be moved and manually retranslated This is because a Release 5 6si PPN is always upgraded to an EPN So during the PPN upgrade to a Release 8r EPN a Release 8r expansion control cabinet with 14 to 16 available port slots always replaces the Release 5 6si control cabinet with 10 available port slots providing a net gain of from 4 to 6 port slots If a port circuit pack does reside in slot 01 of control cabinet A the STS software upgrade retranslates this circuit pack to reside in an empty port slot in the new expansion control cabinet For an upgrade to a critical reliability Release 8r if a port circuit pack resides in slot 02 of port cabinet B the STS software upgrade retranslates this circuit pack to occupy another empty port slot in the new expansion control cabinet To p
426. rading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 53 Re record Announcements TN750 B Only 1 The off site STS translation upgrade does not preserve the contents of recorded announcements Therefore if a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack resides in the system re record the announcements that were stored on the circuit pack gt NOTE If a TN750C resides in the system re recording of announcements is not necessary Administer Fiber Links 1 After all fiber optic equipment is installed refer to Chapter A Fiber Link Administration Enable TTI 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 2 On the second screen set the Enabled field to y to activate the TTI feature Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Make note of all enabled links Type status link number and press Enter AA OO m Check the following items and note which links are in service m PPP links m Audix links a CMS links at both ends Also check the recovery time m ASAI links at the DEFINITY ECS end 5 Check that DS1 trunks and BRI phones are functioning normally 6 Repeat steps 3 5 for each enabled link Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 55
427. rameters Customer Options form and Operation of Duplication is disabled on the Duplication Related System Parameters form Administration of PNC Duplication The PNC Duplication feature is enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form and Operation of Duplication is enabled on the Duplication Related System Parameters form When PNC Duplication is enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form the following administration forms change Cabinet form Additional fields appear to allow administration of switch nodes to A PNC and B PNC sides of the CSS The B PNC is the duplicated hardware for the A PNC Either the A PNC or the B PNC can provide full customized service B PNC cannot be used in a simplex PNC configuration Pairing of switch nodes is also defined here Fiber Link form Additional fields appear to allow administration of fiber links on the B PNC side of the CSS If an endpoint on the A PNC side is administered as an SNI its corresponding endpoint on the B PNC side is determined if switch nodes are paired in the cabinet form prior to this administration and displayed However administration of the duplicate B PNC link is not enforced until duplication is in full operation Duplication Related System Parameters form An additional field appears to enable operation of PNC duplication DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A F
428. ray DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 59 DD NS LI SS I SS WW T PN Wu I NNN ID NS MUU SS LLL m DL SS I NS I NSSSSS 7 cad 023 PDH 102396 7 Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 Processor Port Network 3 Cabinet 3 Expansion Port 2 Cabinet 2 Expansion Port Network 1 Network a Figure 5 14 High Reliability Release 8 with Two or Three Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 60 cydffo5 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02 5 RX Connection 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 6 TX Connection Figure 5 15 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 cydffo5 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1D02 5 RX Connection 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A01 6 TX Connection Figure 5 16 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8
429. rcuit packs processor memory disk controller and bus interface cards mounted in a PPN control carrier The SPE serves as the control element for that PPN and optionally for one or more EPNs SXS Step by step synchronous data transmission A method of sending data in which discrete signal elements are sent at a fixed and continuous rate and specified times See also association SYSAM System Access and Administration system administrator The person who maintains overall customer responsibility for system administration Generally all administration functions are performed from the Management Terminal The switch requires a special login referred to as the system administrator login to gain access to System administration capabilities DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 47 system printer An optional printer that may be used to print scheduled reports via the report scheduler system report A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits system status report A report that provides real time status information for internally measured splits system manager A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for a system system reload A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape into the system memory normally after a power outage
430. re dialed denying a request Sending a negative acknowledgement NAK done by sending an FIE with a return error component and a cause value It should not be confused with the denial event report that applies to calls designated voice terminal The specific voice terminal to which calls originally directed to a certain extension are redirected Commonly used to mean the forwarded to terminal when Call Forwarding All Calls is active dial repeating trunks A PBX tie trunk that is capable of handling PBX station signaling information without attendant assistance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 17 dial repeating tie trunk A tie trunk that transmits called party addressing information between two communications Systems DID Direct Inward Dialing digit conversion A process used to convert specific dialed numbers into other dialed numbers digital The representation of information by discrete steps See also analog digital communications protocol DCP A proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and digitized data over the same communications link A DCP link is made up of two 64 kbps information I channels and one 8 kbps signaling S channel digital data endpoints In DEFINITY ECS devices such as the 510D terminal or the 515 type business communications terminal BCT digital multip
431. re 5 28 through Figure 5 31 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01 Connect the other end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m At the top of the cabinet coil the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable tray 3 Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1B01 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 4 Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2B02 Connect the other end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just installed Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions m At the top of the cabinet coil the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable
432. red directly from the Lucent Technologies Business Communications System Publications Fulfillment Center at 1 317 322 6791 or toll free at 1 800 457 1235 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book How to Comment on This Book XX How to Comment on This Book Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback Please fill out the reader comment card found at the front of this manual and return it Your comments are of great value and help improve our documentation If the reader comment card is missing FAX your comments to 1 303 538 1741 or to your Lucent Technologies representative and mention this book s name and number in footer DEFINITY Enterprise Communication Server Release 8 Upgrades and Additions for R8r Where to Call for Technical Support Refer to the table below for the telephone numbers for technical support Telephone Number DEFINITY Helpline feature administration and system 1 800 225 7585 applications Lucent Technologies Toll Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 Lucent Technologies National Customer Care Center 1 800 242 2121 Lucent Technologies Corporate Security 1 800 822 9009 Streamlined Implementation for missing equipment 1 800 772 5409 USA Canada Technical Service Center 1 800 248 1234 ITAC 1 303 804 3777 Lucent Technologies Centers of Excellence Asia Pacific Regional Support Center 65 872 86
433. rewdriver into the slot and twist The retainer will snap open easily Remove the cable 2 Disconnect the cables associated with the carrier to be removed 3 Remove the rear doors from the cabinet 4 Behind a previously upgraded cabinet remove all of the rear panels Two different types of screws hold the back panels to the cabinet Remove the 10 screws with a screwdriver or a 1 4 inch socket Remove the 12 screws with a screwdriver or a 5 16 inch socket Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carrier A 1 To ensure that power units in the A carrier are properly replaced label each power unit with its slot number 2 Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the A carrier 3 Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier A Store the circuit packs in the static proof packaging 4 Remove all circuit pack blanks 5 Remove the front trim plate from the A carrier by pulling it straight off Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A 1 Remove the CFY1 current limiter CURL from the pin field block marked CURL on the A carrier The CURL is reused in the Release 8 EPN gt NOTE Verify the CURL meets the minimum usable vintage requirements DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 19 Remove Module Control Carrier A Disconnect TDM LAN Cables
434. rier Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A Remove the CFY1 current limiter CURL from the pin field block marked CURL on the A carrier The CURL will be reused in the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPN gt NOTE Note the position of the components on the left side of the CURL gt NOTE Verify that the CURL meets the minimum usable vintage requirements DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Critical Reliability 5 79 Remove Module Control Carriers A and B 10 11 12 13 Remove the TDM LAN cable from between the A and B carriers See Figure 5 23 This cable will be reused Disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the A and D carriers from the A carrier Leave the other end connected to the D carrier and move the cable into a position so that it will not interfere with removing the A carrier gt NOTE Note the position of the TDM LAN cable before disconnecting Disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the B and C carriers from the B carrier Leave the other end connected to the C carrier and move the cable into a position so that it will not interfere with removing the B carrier A CAUTION When removing the TDM LAN cables from a previously upgraded carrier be careful that none of the short pieces of shrink
435. ril 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 10 Check TTI Status 1 Type status TTI and press Enter Wait until the Percent Complete field shows 100 Busyout MMI Circuit Packs H C only A CAUTION Multimedia to voice station calls are not preserved on an upgrade Failure to busy out the TN787 Multimedia Interface MMI circuit packs results in unusable TN787 and TN788 Multimedia Voice Conditioner ports 1 Type display system parameters customer options and press Enter On screen 2 under the Multimedia Call Handling MMCH options check the Basic and Enhanced fields 2 If either the Basic or Enhanced field is y type list configuration all and press Enter to locate all MMI TN787 circuit packs 3 If there are MMI circuit packs type busyout board cabinet carrier slot and press Enter to remove the circuit packs from service Lock the active SPE H C only 1 Type status spe and press Enter to determine which control carrier is active or observe the control carrier LEDs gt NOTE For high or critical reliability systems we recommend that you replace the circuit packs in the standby carrier first A CAUTION When replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap 2 Move the SPE SELECT switches on both Duplication Interface DUPINT circuit packs one at a time to the active carrier DE
436. ril 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades B 12 Software Incompatibility If these procedures do not clear the corruption problem then the software versions may be incompatible You may need to upgrade to an interim software version before upgrading to the final software version 1 Consult the remediation that came with the upgrade software 2 Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for this information Re install the ISDN PRI Links Only for Failed Upgrades If your upgrade failed and you need to re install the ISDN PRI links use this procedure 1 Type add data module PI ext and press Enter 2 Type the information in the fields based on the information that you entered earlier 3 Type change communication interface links and press Enter 4 Type the information in the fields based on the information that you entered earlier with one exception Leave the Enable field setting as it is 5 Type change communication interface processor channels and press Enter 6 Type the information in the fields based on the information that you entered earlier 7 Type change communication interface links and press Enter 8 Type the information in the Enable field based on the information that you entered earlier 9 Type save translation and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 C Acces
437. rom the B carrier by pulling it straight off Remove Port Carrier B 1 Behind the PPN disconnect and remove the ICCB cable from between carrier B and carrier A It will not be reused gt NOTE Note the position of the TDM LAN cables before disconnecting them 2 Disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the B and C carriers from the B carrier See Figure 6 28 3 Disconnect 1 end of the TDM LAN cable between the B and A carriers from the B carrier See Figure 6 28 4 Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps between the B and C carriers from the B carrier See Figure 6 29 These straps are reconnected to the new B carrier 5 Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps between the B and A carriers from the B carrier See Figure 6 29 These straps are reconnected to the new B carrier 6 Disconnect the P1 small 9 pin connector from the B carrier Move the cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier 7 Behind the B carrier remove the 2 screws holding the B carrier s rear connector panel to the cabinet frame These are frame ground screws 8 In front of B carrier remove the 4 screws top 2 first holding the B carrier to the cabinet frame Use a long handle screwdriver or 5 16 inch Socket with a 10 inch extension DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555
438. rovide maximum holdover for a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack that did not reside in the control carrier the STS software upgrade relocates this circuit pack to occupy another empty port slot in the new expansion control cabinet To ensure reliable DS1 timing in the upgraded Release 8r system the STS software upgrade relocates the DS1 circuit packs serving as the primary and secondary timing sources to occupy 2 empty port slots in the new Release 8r PPN When connecting adjuncts to an upgraded Release 8r STS locates any new interface circuit packs including TN577 Packet Gateway TN553 Packet Data Line and TN726B Data Line in the first available slots of the first PPN port carrier gt NOTE To find out where STS relocated these circuit packs refer to the annotated list configuration all that STS provides with the new Release 8r removable media Usable Circuit Packs Every circuit pack used in the upgraded Release 8r system must conform to the minimum usable vintage requirements for Release 8r Those circuit packs shipped in the new Release 8r PPN or shipped loose with the new EPN equipment must meet the usable vintage specifications In addition at a presale site inspection the remediation process must check the vintages of every Release 5 6si circuit pack that will be reused with the Release 8r and replace those circuit packs with unusable vintages Refer to Technical Quarterly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Chan
439. rrier connector panel bracket For an enhanced carrier install the 16 carrier ground straps The straps connect ground points G1 through G8 from the top of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel and ground points G9 through G16 from the bottom of the B carrier backplane to the B carrier connector panel Use the 8 screws to connect the ground straps to the connector panel see Figure 6 40 gt NOTE An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses either AC power U S or Global power gt NOTE DC powered cabinets DO NOT use any of the above carrier ground straps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability 6 115 Iedfgrn2 KLC 022100 Figure Notes 1 Standard AC powered Carrier 3 Top Ground Straps 2 Enhanced Carrier in R8r PPNs using 4 Bottom Ground Straps either AC power U S or Global power Figure 6 40 Locations of Top and Bottom Ground Straps on Standard and Enhanced Carriers 8 If a switch node carrier is being installed in the D position of the PPN install the TDM LAN cable between the E and D carriers to the pin field block marked TDM LAN on the right side of both carriers See Figure 6 41 and Table 6 10 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1
440. rst 5 4 Earlier versions of lightwave transceivers include the 4 series transceivers 4A through 4F These transceivers support fiber connections up to 7 000 feet 2134 m apart whereas the 9823A supports connections up to 5 000 feet 1524 m and the 9823B supports connections up to 25 000 feet 7620 m A single mode fiber transceiver 300A supports distances of up to 115 000 feet 21 7 miles 35 km If the site inspection reveals that the older 4 series transceivers reside in the system Order the correct transceivers according to a separate PEC gt NOTE Using the 300A may require 5 or 10 dB attenuators Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information gt NOTE The 9823A transceiver is not a direct replacement for the 4 series transceiver since a pair of 9823A transceivers cannot replace a pair of 4 series transceivers supporting a connection of between 5 000 feet 1524 m and 7 000 feet 2134 m Power and Ground The new multicarrier PPN cabinet or any EPN cabinet added for the upgrade can be either AC or DC powered If an added cabinet is powered differently from the existing cabinets the existing cabinets do not have to be converted since mixed power configurations are allowed However the system s power and grounding must be modified so that the AC powered cabinets are grounded to the same single point ground point as the DC powered cabinets If a new AC powered cabinet is to be added provide a s
441. rter complex is used to remote 1 endpoint If y is entered administer the A PNC DS1 Converter Board Location on Page 1 The A PNC DS1 Converter Board Type displays 7 On Page 2 of the form a Administer the A PNC DS1 Converter DS1CONV Attributes b Enter the DS1 Converter Facilities information In the Facility Installed field type y for all installed facilities A B C and D c In the Bit Rate field type 1 544 for T1 operation or 2 048 for E1 operation gt NOTE One bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1 Converter complex The Bit Rate field displays only under Facility A d Enter the idle code in the Idle Code MSB 1 LSB 8 field The default value is 11101000 It is recommended that the default value be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary to change it The MSB means Most Significant Bit the LSB means Least Significant Bit e Enter the appropriate data in the Line Coding field This data should match the line coding of the facility For T1 example line coding is b8zs For E1 example line coding is hdb3 f Scroll to Page 3 and modify the fields as needed for the B PNC gt NOTE If this data is not correct wideband errors such as multimedia call handling may occur 8 For T1 sites refer to T1 Installations Only For E1 sites refer to E1 Installations Only DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions
442. rthe Translation Corruption Detected message before proceeding with the upgrade If corruption is detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the problem A CAUTION Do not continue with the upgrade until the translations errors are corrected Reset SPE status H C only 1 Type status SPE and press Enter Wait until the Standby Handshake field displays up which takes about 3 minutes 2 Type reset spe standby 4 and press Enter gt NOTE You can continue the process while the SPE is resetting Set Daylight Savings Rules You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules If you have cabinets in several different time zones you can set up rules for each on a location basis A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight savings time It also specifies the increment at which to transition gt NOTE The default daylight savings rule is 0 no daylight savings 1 Type change daylight savings rules and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 2 Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 2 17 a DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES N Rule Change Day Month Date Time Increment 0 No Daylight Savings 13 Start first Sunday on or after April 1 at
443. rvice interruptions in a standard reliability system and must be closely coordinated with the customer and the local account team Call Management System CMS The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade This causes CMS data to be lost This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just after the last CMS measurement interval All measurement data is lost during the upgrade including BCMS If needed the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the conference dropped off the call before the end of the call Customers experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to r3v4a or higher Software Compatibility and Translation Errors Before starting the upgrade always check the Software Release Letter that accompanies the system removable media Translation corruption will occur if incompatible software is loaded After loading the new software check for translation errors To do this log in and check for a Translation Corruption Detected message before continuing with the upgrade process If errors are detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors are corrected Usable Circuit Packs Every circuit pack used in the Release 8 system must conform to the minimum usable vintage requirements for th
444. ry Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 16 Install Circuit Packs Replace the circuit packs and power supplies in port cabinets C and D if they were previously removed Using the label on the front of the carrier and the annotated list configuration all provided with the Release 8r removable media install the control circuit packs into the new expansion control cabinet Install the port circuit packs into the A cabinet using the label on the front of the carrier and the annotated list configuration all as a guide gt NOTE Since the new Release 8r expansion control carrier has 6 more port slots than the removed control carrier there should be no need to retranslate these circuit packs For an EPN in a critical reliability system install a TN2182B Tone Clock and a TN570 El in slots 1 and 2 of port cabinet B See Table 3 3 Table 3 3 TN570 Expansion Interface Requirements 2 PNs w o Critical 2PNs w Critical 3 PNs w o Critical 3PNs w Critical Cabinet Reliability Reliability Reliability Reliability PPN 1 2 2 4 EPN 1 1 2 2 4 EPN 2 N A N A 2 4 Change Cabinet Address Plugs If a duplicated control cabinet was removed from position B and was not replaced with a new port cabinet the upgraded EPN s port cabinets occupy different positions in the cabinet stack Behind each port cabinet find the address plug attached to 2 of the 6 backplane pins to the right of t
445. s All non duplicated Switch Node Interfaces to Switch Node Interface fiber links are automatically duplicated When PNC Duplication is enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form the following administration forms change Cabinet Form Additional fields appear to allow administration of switch nodes to A PNC and B PNC sides of the CSS The B PNC is the duplicated hardware for the A PNC Either the A PNC or the B PNC can provide full customized service B PNC cannot be used in a simplex PNC configuration Pairing of switch nodes is also defined here Fiber Link Administration Form Additional fields appear to allow administration of fiber links on the B PNC side of the CSS If an endpoint on the A PNC side is administered as an SNI its corresponding endpoint on the B PNC side is determined if switch nodes are paired in the cabinet form prior to this administration and displayed However administration of the duplicate B PNC link is not enforced until duplication is in full operation Duplication Related System Parameters Form An additional field appears to enable operation of PNC duplication Type change system parameters customer options and press Enter On Page 2 of the form set the PNC Duplication field to y Press Enter Type change system parameters duplication and press Enter Change the Enable operation of PNC duplication field to y Press Enter 3 Type status pnc and press Enter Verify the D
446. s Two are required for a standard reliability system with 2 port networks 6 with 3 port networks Either 1 or 4 Expansion Interfaces Els are shipped loose with the EPN equipment The factory has installed either 1 or 2 Els in the new PPN 2 Required port network interfaces in a Release 8 system with the optional packet bus 3 Depending on the number of DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPNs Two or 6 are required if the PPN and EPN s are remotely located Assuming acceptable lengths the fiber that previously connected an upgraded G2 universal module not a traditional module to the G2 TMS has the correct transceiver connectors and can be reused 4 One pair for each fiber connection For each connection either 1 lightwave transceiver is installed in an EPN and 1 in the PPN A transceiver can be reused from each upgraded G2 universal module Additional transceivers ordered separately are also shipped loose with the EPN equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 16 Required Tools The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade High intensity flashlight or AC drop light 3 8 inch flat blade screwdriver with a 10 inch shank minimum 5 16 inch and 1 4 inch sockets with a ratchet and 10 inch extension Long nose pliers to disconnect ground straps and straighten backplane
447. s if necessary 1 16 Restore Disk 1 16 Upgrade Software 1 17 Reset SPE status H C only 1 17 List Configuration Control 1 17 Set Daylight Savings Rules 1 18 Set Date and Time 1 19 Set Core Dump Vector 1 20 Enable TTI 1 20 Release MMI H C only 1 21 Resolve Alarms 1241 Check Link Status 1 21 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 121 Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 21 Check SPE status H C only 1 22 Save Translations 1 22 Save Announcements if necessary 122 Back Up Disk 1 23 Return Replaced Equipment 1 23 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 6 Upgrade the software and hardware Check SPE 1 Type status spe and press Enter to check the health of the SPE For high or critical reliability systems m The Standby Refreshed field shows yes m The Standby Shadowing field shows on m The Standby Handshake field shows up Save Translations 1 Type save translation and press Enter to write all translation information from memory to the disk which takes about 2 minutes Save Announcements if necessary gt NOTE The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in nonvolatile memory saving the announcements is optional 1 Ifthe PPN contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack type display announ
448. s B requirements m Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 1000 4 2 mw Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000 4 3 m Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000 4 4 m Lightning effects IEC 1000 4 5 Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000 4 6 a Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000 4 8 m Low frequency mains disturbance IEC 1000 4 11 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards xxiv European Union Standards Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that the DEFINITY equipment specified in this book bearing the CE mark conforms to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives The CE Conformit Europe nne mark indicates conformance to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment TTE Directive 91 263 EEC and with i CTR3 Basic Rate Interface BRI and i CTR4 Primary Rate Interface PRI as applicable The CE mark is applied to the following Release 8 products Global AC powered Multicarrier Cabinet MCC DC powered Multicarrier Cabinet MCC with 25 Hz ring generator AC powered Single Carrier Cabinet SCC with 25 Hz ring generator AC powered Compact Single Carrier Cabinet CSCC with 25 Hz ring generator Enhanced DC Power System Compact Modular Cabinet CMC wi
449. s Preferred Channel negotiation is not attempted for wideband calls CI Clock input circuit 1 An arrangement of electrical elements through which electric current flows 2 A channel or transmission path between two or more points circuit pack A card on which electrical circuits are printed and IC chips and electrical components are installed A circuit pack is installed in a switch carrier CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 13 Class of Restriction COR A feature that allows up to 64 classes of call origination and call termination restrictions for voice terminals voice terminal groups data modules and trunk groups See also Class of Service COS Class of Service COS A feature that uses a number to specify if voice terminal users can activate the Automatic Callback Call Forwarding All Calls Data Privacy or Priority Calling features See also Class of Restriction COR cm Centimeter CM Connection Manager CMDR Centralized Message Detail Recording CMS Call Management System CO See central office CO common control switching arrangement CCSA A private telecommunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for interconnecting company locations communications system The software controlled
450. s Security Gateway C 1 Access Security Gateway This appendix provides information on how to administer Access Security Gateway ASG ASG employs a challenge response protocol to confirm the validity of a user and reduce the opportunity for unauthorized access ASG authenication will be imposed for Lucent services logins as indicated below m init all types of access require ASG authenication m inads all types of access require ASG authenication Craft if accessing remotely ASG authenication is required gt NOTE Craft login sessions from a direct connect management terminal continue to rely on password authenication DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 C Access Security Gateway Using the ASG Mobile C 2 Using the ASG Mobile 1 Double click on the ASG Mobile V1 1 on your desktop and an ASG Mobile V1 1 Login window appears Inthe Tech ID field type your login ID which is the name of the attached file without the asg Your login ID is the same as your Lucent login or an abbreviated part of it Type the password twice Note that the password is case sensitive gt NOTE Your new password will be sent to you in a separate email Click the OK button and an ASG Mobile V1 1 Authentication window appears Use your communications package for example DNA ProComm or TerraNova to dial the switch you need to
451. s Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Troubleshooting Guidelines B 8 Removable Media Troubleshooting Guidelines Use the following guidelines when troubleshooting and resolving removable media R MEDIA problems 1 Avoid saving translations or announcements on the backup removable drive until all other removable media and Host Adapter problems have been resolved If there is something wrong with the Mass Storage System an attempt to save translations or announcements could destroy a good copy of the files on the removable media 2 In a system configured with duplicated SPEs the tests run on the standby removable media circuit pack are identical to those run on the active removable media circuit pack Communications between the active and standby SPEs is provided by the DUPINT circuit pack for both the control channel and memory shadowing Therefore problems with the DUPINT circuit pack may affect maintenance tests of the standby removable media circuit pack 3 Check the error log for power related problems and refer to the maintenance documentation on power 4 The data on the removable media will likely be destroyed if m The optical disk is removed when the amber LED on the removable media circuit pack is on m The removable media circuit pack is removed while the amber LED on the removable media circuit pack is on m Power is removed from the remo
452. s and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 13 6 Place the formatted removable media label facing left into the optical drive gt NOTE Make sure the formatted removable media is not write protected before placing it into the optical drive see Figure 1 2 2 hidfdsk KLC 112499 Figure Notes 1 Not Write protected 2 Write protected Figure 1 2 Make sure the disk is not write protected A CAUTION The removable media has a sliding metal cover to protect the surface of the disk DO NOT TOUCH THE DISK Figure 1 3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 14 hidfdsk1 KLC 091799 Figure 1 3 Do not touch the disk inside the cartridge Power Up the Processor Carrier 1 To restore power to the processor carrier insert the power plug on the right side of the carrier then insert the power plug on the eft side of the carrier If high or critical reliability 2 Monitor the SPE as it reboots by observing the LEDs and the terminal It is powered up when the YELLOW LED on the Processor circuit pack blinks in a steady state which takes about 10 minutes Unlock the Active SPE H C only 1 Move the SPE SELECT switches to the AUTO position one at a time 2
453. s and press Enter 2 If administered recorded announcements are listed type copy announce and press Enter gt NOTE The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in non volatile memory saving the announcements is not needed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Upgrade Completion 4 16 Upgrade Completion Install Remaining Hardware and Administer the System If the present system was removed to make room for the Release 8r cabinet skip to Step 3 If the Release 8r cabinet was installed while the present system is in service return to Remove the Present System on page 4 7 Return to this section when finished Connect all new and reusable I O cables to the Release 8r cabinet Cross connect at the MDF as required Remove all reusable circuit packs from the present system and install into the Release 8r cabinet Install any new circuit packs into the Release 8r cabinet Install fiber optic cables and administer the fiber links as needed Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets Administer any new translations as required Enable TTI Type change system parameters features and press Enter On the second screen set the Enabled field to y to activate the TTI feature Check Link Status Type disp
454. s for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 68 a DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES N Rule Change Day Month Date Time Increment 0 No Daylight Savings 13 Start first Sunday on or after April 1 at _2 0001 00 Stop first Sunday on or after October 25 at 2 00 2 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 3 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 4 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 5 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 6 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 7s Start first on or after at E Stop first on or after at 2 Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day Month Date Time and Increment fields for each rule for example 1 00 equals one hour gt NOTE You can change any rule except rule 0 zero You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens 3 When done press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 69 Set Date and Time 1 Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen a DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week Tuesday Month February Day of the Month 8 Year 2000 TIME Hour 20 Minute 30 Second XX Type standard Dayli
455. s for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 37 Set Daylight Savings Rules You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules If you have cabinets in several different time zones you can set up rules for each on a location basis A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight savings time It also specifies the increment at which to transition gt NOTE The default daylight savings rule is 0 no daylight savings 1 Type change daylight savings rules and press Enter a DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES ON Rule Change Day Month Date Time Increment 0 No Daylight Savings 1 Start first Sunday on or after April 1 at 2 0001 00 Stop first Sunday on or after October 25 at 2 00 2 Start first on or after at H Stop first on or after at 33 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 4 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 5s Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 6 Start first on or after at Stop first on or after at 72 Start first on or after at A e Stop first on or after at 2 Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day Month Date Time and Increment fields for each rule for example 1 00 equals one hour gt NOTE You can change any rule except rule 0 zero You cannot delete a dayl
456. s into only 1 slot but its faceplate occupies 3 slots m A10 BaseT or 10 100 BaseT Ethernet connection into the customer s local area network LAN m A valid unused IP address on the customer s LAN that can be assigned to the IP Interface server You also need the subnet mask default gateway domain name and so forth from the customer s network administrator a An analog telephone line reserved for the IP Interface diagnostic modem m A valid telephone number reserved for the IP Interface diagnostic modem If non U S customer a Modem comparable to a U S Robotics Inc Sportster Model USR 33 6 EXT a A cable from the modem to the TN802B external cable assembly We recommend that you protect the cabinet where the IP Interface is installed with an uninterruptible power system UPS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly Check your Shipment Issue 1 April 2000 6 57 When your DEFINITY ECS order arrives at the customer s site check the contents see Table 6 6 1 Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it If the box is damaged do not open it Inform the shipping company and ask for instructions on filing a claim 2 If the box is undamaged check the contents against the packing slip Check the condition of each component and note any damage or shortages on the packing slip The
457. s of the system software you may also need to disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields before you can submit the form successfully DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 81 Save Translations Label Cables Log in at the management terminal Type save translation spe a disk and press Enter This command instructs the system write all translation information from memory to disk Ifthe PPN or an EPN where PPN Port Carrier B will be relocated contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack type display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed type list configuration software version and press Enter Check screen 2 to see when the announcements were last saved Save the current announcements by typing save announcements disk and pressing Enter Type backup disk spe a and press Enter This instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the system tape Update backup tape if required To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable label both ends of the connector cables associated with the port carrier B to be removed Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded prepare to shut d
458. s set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal operating mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 93 Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1 Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu A OO Im Select Restart System from the Reset System menu Enable SPE Duplication 1 If not also duplicating switch node carriers refer to Duplication Related System Parameters in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator s Guide to enable Switch Processing Element SPE duplication Enable PNC Duplication 1 For acritical reliability R8r system type change system parameters customer options and press Enter Use this screen to enable the Port Network Connectivity PNC duplication option Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar 2 Ifthe Alarm Origination Activated field administration is already set to y be sure to enable Alarm Origination Otherwise you do not need to enable Alarm Origination proceed to the next section 3 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter The Alarm Origination Activated field was c
459. s takes about 2 minutes 4 The AUDIX System can now be removed for service Power Up the AUDIX System m If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet 1 Re install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors m If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the cabinet 1 Power up the cabinet The AUDIX reboots automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors m If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered down 1 At the AUDIX console hold the crti key and type cc 2 Type 5 at the prompt In about 2 minutes the AUDIX boots up 3 When the system initialization is complete log in as craft 4 Check for AUDIX System errors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G8vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r 4 1 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r This chapter provides the information necessary to perform an upgrade from either a Release 5 6 system with a RISC Processor or from a Generic 3 G3 vs system with an Intel 386 processor to a Release 8r system The upgrade to a Release 8r system requires a major change of hardware and software The port circuit packs from the present system may be reused only if a site inspection determines that the port circuit pack vintages are usable in the Release 8r Some of the I O cables from the existing system may be
460. sceiver just installed c Route the cable to the cabinet cable tray and out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility d Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interface unit provided e Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 26 2 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2 a b C Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01 Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed Route the cable down the outside of the rear covers and through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility Connect the fiber optic cable to the lightguide interface unit Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack Coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and place the coil in the cable manager cydf013 CJL102396 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 Fiber Optic Cross Connect Facility 2 PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02 6 Lightguide Interface Unit LIU 3 EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 Cabinet 7 TX Connector Stack 2 8 RX Connector 4 Fiber Optic Cable Figure3 8 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 DEFINITY Enterprise C
461. se verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 72 3 At the command prompt type ping nnn nnn nnn nnn which is the IP address of your gateway If everything is configured correctly the system responds with the following message Reply from nnn nnn nnn nnn bytes 32 time lt ms TIL If no response verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling f all else fails click on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Select the Adapters tab and highlight the 2 DEC adapter Click Properties gt Change From the Duplex Mode dropdown menu select a setting that matches the switch hub that the TN802B connects to For example 10BaseT Full Duplex or 10BaseT No Link Test 4 At the command prompt type ping nnn nnn nnn nnn which is the IP address of another external computer beyond the gateway If you have connectivity the system responds with the following message Reply from nnn nnn nnn nnn bytes 32 time lt ms TTL If no response verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling Consult your IP network administrator 5 Type exit and press Enter Test the IP Interfac
462. se 8r system removable media in the optical drive Behind each EPN cabinet set the circuit breaker to ON At the PPN power distribution unit set the main circuit breaker to ON The system performs a reset level 4 rebooting process loading blank translations from the disk Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes Type reset system 4 and press Enter This instructs the system to perform a reset level 4 rebooting process loading the upgraded STS translations from the new removable media Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes Log in as craft at the Login prompt on the terminal and set the time to ensure the system is booted properly After about 2 minutes type status spe and press Enter The standby handshake field must be up before continuing with the upgrade Type reset spe standby 4 and press Enter This changes the standby SPE to active and vice versa This takes about 10 minutes If the system is high or critical reliability type status spe and press Enter The handshake refresh and shadowing fields must be up before continuing with the upgrade Also the standby side must be in service The heartbeat on the standby SPE flashes yellow Type restore disk Spe a or both full and press Enter This instructs the system to write the upgraded STS translation information from memory to the disk s Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System A OO Im Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears sel
463. ses Lightwave System PMS Property Management System PN Port network PNA Private network access POE Processor occupancy evaluation POP Point of presence port A data or voice transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices port carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet or a single carrier cabinet containing port circuit packs power units and service circuits Also called a port cabinet in a single carrier cabinet port network PN A cabinet containing a TDM bus and packet bus to which the following components are connected port circuit packs one or two tone clock circuit packs a maintenance circuit pack service circuit packs and optionally up to four expansion interface El circuit packs in DEFINITY ECS Each PN is controlled either locally or remotely by a switch processing element SPE See also expansion port network EPN and processor port network PPN port network connectivity The interconnection of port networks PNs regardless of whether the configuration uses direct or switched connectivity DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 40 PPM 1 Parts per million 2 Periodic pulse metering PPN See processor port network PPN PRI See Primary Rate Interface PRI primary extension The main extension associated with the physical voic
464. si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 37 cydff06 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 EPN1 Cabinet B Slot 2B02 2 To PPN Carrier D Slot 1D02 6 Fiber Optic Cable 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 7 TX Connector Cabinet Stack 2 4 PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02 8 RX Connector Figure 3 13 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 38 Switch Connected Port Networks For 1 to 15 Standard Reliability EPNs 1 Behind the PPN cabinet See Figure 3 14 a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E02 b Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1B02 c Connect 1 end of the metallic intercarrier cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1E02 d Route the intercarrier cable from the lightwave transceiver to the cabinet cable tray and upward to carrier B e Connect the other end of the intercarrier cable to the lightwave transceiver at slot 1B02 f Attach the intercarrier cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1 See Figure 3 14 a For each EPN install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector with the following order of slots 1E20 1E03 1E19 1E04 1
465. si system is duplicated remove the ICC cables They are replaced with new ICC cables H600 248 G1 Remove the Existing Control Cabinet Since the control cabinet is at the bottom of the port network dismantle the cabinet stack Disconnect all the power ground TDM ICC and connector cables 1 Remove the cabinet clip between each cabinet or front earthquake plate as provided 2 Remove the rear ground plate 3 Remove the port cabinets from the stack A CAUTION A port cabinet may weigh as much as 125 pounds Use lifting precautions 4 Ifthe system is duplicated remove the control cabinet in position B It is not reused 5 If the basic control cabinet in position A is earthquake mounted remove and retain the hardware securing the cabinet to the floor 6 Remove the basic control cabinet It is not reused Unpack and Install Expansion Control Cabinet 1 Unpack and inspect the J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet 2 Position the expansion control cabinet at the desired location 3 Reinstall the earthquake mounting hardware if required Install Port Cabinets 1 Replace the port cabinets into their proper positions gt NOTE For a duplicated Release 5 6si the J58890M Control Cabinet can be replaced by a J58890H Port Cabinet in position B DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memo
466. sk in use LED 3 Red board status LED Figure 6 26 TN802B IP Interface faceplate gt NOTE To properly seat the circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged 1 Insert the TN802B IP Interface into the rightmost of the three slots you reserved for it see Figure 6 27 When you plug in the TN802B IP Interface the circuit pack starts to boot and the LCD reads PC Boot then after about 3 to 4 minutes it changes to IP TRK the default mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 63 indfmapd KLC 031299 Figure 6 27 J58890MA 1 L30 IP Interface Assembly Test the Modem 1 Check for dial tone 2 Contact Lucent Technologies Customer Support and ask a representative to dial into your IP Interface server Administer the IP Interface Adminstration is done either locally or remotely If administered locally proceed with the following adminstration steps on the attached keyboard mouse and monitor If administered remotely call your service representative to start the process DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Inter
467. spect 1 Verify the equipment received See Figure 6 1 Actual equipment may vary in appearance and may ship in separate packages 2 See Table 6 2 for a list of part comcodes indapkit RPY 012398 Figure Notes 1 Pass thru Tool 5 Fiber Optic Cable Disconnect Label 2 SC SC Fiber Optic Adapter 6 I O Connector Adapter Bracket 3 ST SC Fiber Optic Adapter 7 Cable Tie 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 Cable Tie Mount Figure 6 1 Fiber Pass Thru Kit Equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add the Fiber Optic Cable 6 9 Table 6 2 Parts List Quantity Description Comcode 1 Pass thru Tool 847978715 1 Beige SC SC Fiber Optic Adapter multimode 107118903 1 Beige ST SC Fiber Optic Adapter multimode 107087967 1 Ten foot 3 m Fiber Optic Cable multimode 107122640 1 l O Connector Adapter Bracket 847978673 1 Fiber Optic Cable Disconnect Label 848029286 10 Cable Ties 407814672 6 Cable Tie Mounts 403053150 LASER Product CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1993 The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device operates within the following parameters Maximum Power Output 5dBm m Wavelength 1310 nm m Mode Field Diameter 8 8 microns CAUTION Use of controls or
468. ssor port network PPN A port network controlled by a switch processing element that is directly connected to that PN s TDM bus and LAN bus See also port network PN processor port network PPN control carrier A carrier containing the maintenance circuit pack tone clock circuit pack and SPE circuit packs for a processor port network PPN and optionally port circuit packs Property Management System PMS A stand alone computer used by lodging and health services organizations for services such as reservations housekeeping and billing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 41 protocol A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control data movement and correction of errors PSC Premises service consultant PSDN Packet switch public data network PT Personal terminal PTC Positive temperature coefficient PTT Postal Telephone and Telegraph public network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long distance calling pulse code modulation PCM An extension of pulse amplitude modulation PAM in which carrier signal pulses modulated by an analog signal such as speech are quantized and encoded to a digital usually binary format Q OPPCN Quality Protection Plan Change Notice quadrant A group of six contiguous DSOs in fixe
469. st covers over all exposed fiber couplings that remain after the fiber optic cables are removed 11 If any fiber optic cables were removed from Lightguide Interconnect Units LIUs or Fiber Patch Panels remove the associated cable labeling This will prevent confusion if existing fiber is later moved 12 Return all unused equipment not owned by the customer to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in BCS Material Logistics MSL Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns 13 If any message waiting lamps are on skip to Troubleshooting on page 6 40 Unadminister Fiber Links Duplex Systems The fiber links routing to and from the EPN cabinet being removed must be unadministered before removing any hardware from the cabinet A CAUTION Failure to unadminister fiber links before removing hardware causes unnecessary alarm reports to INADS and causes errors that are very difficult to clear The fiber links are administered to match hardware and the Fiber Optic Cable Running List Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the endpoint pairs for each link To properly unadminister the fiber links this translation data must be removed 1 Type list fiber and press Enter All administered fiber connections are displayed Make note of the fiber links to be removed 2 Type change fiber link and press Enter The Fiber Link Administration screen appears
470. stall Circuit Packs Upgrade Paths Conventions Used in This Book Related Books How to Order Books How to Comment on This Book Where to Call for Technical Support Trademarks Standards Compliance LASER Product Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards Federal Communications Commission Statement 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Read This First Task Tables Upgrade the software and hardware Upgrading R5r R6r R7r to R8r without Adding Memory Read This First Task Tables Upgrade the software and hardware vii xv xv xvi xvi xvi xvii Xix Xix x Issue 1 April 2000 iii DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 Contents 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory 3 1 m Read This First 3 2 m Task Tables 3 6 m Preliminary Procedures 3 8 m Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 10 a DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 3 56 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r 4 1 m Read This First 4 2 Task Tables 4 4 m Preliminary Procedures 4 6 m Remove the Present System 4 7 a Install the Release 8r Cabinets 4 11 m Upgrade Completion 4 16 m DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 4 19 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN 5 1 m Single Mode Fiber Attenuators 51 m
471. steps Table 1 2 Tasks to upgrade the software and hardware Task Description Page Check SPE 1 6 Save Translations 16 Save Announcements if necessary 1 6 Back Up Disk 1 6 Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm Origination to INADS 1 7 Reconfigure the Tape G3rV2 V3 R31 0 and Earlier 1 8 Check Link Status 1 8 Disable TTI 1 8 Check Disk Drive 1 8 Install Disk Drive if not TN1657 V4 or earlier 19 Restore Disk 1 9 Check TTI Status 1 10 Busyout MMI Circuit Packs H C only 1 10 Lock the active SPE H C only 1 10 Check the active tone clock H C only T TT Power Down the Processor Carrier 1 11 Remove the Circuit Packs 1 11 Install the Circuit Packs 1 12 Power Up the Processor Carrier 1 14 Unlock the Active SPE H C only 1 14 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Task Tables 5 Table 1 2 Tasks to upgrade the software and hardware Continued Task Description Page Verify Interchange H C only 1 15 Upgrade other carrier H C only 1 15 Affix position label s 1 15 Verify software version 1 16 Save Translations 1 16 Save Announcement
472. stination is predetermined A request for service on the trunk called a seizure is sufficient to route the call The normal destination of an automatic trunk is the communications system attendant group Also called automatic incoming trunk and automatic tie trunk AUX Auxiliary auxiliary equipment Equipment used for optional system features such as Loudspeaker Paging and Music on Hold auxiliary trunk A trunk used to connect auxiliary equipment such as radio paging equipment to a communications system Aux Work mode A work mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls Agents enter Aux Work mode when involved in non ACD activities such as taking a break going to lunch or placing an outgoing call AVD Alternate voice data AWOH See Administration Without Hardware AWOH AWG American Wire Gauge AWT Average work time B B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution bandwidth The difference expressed in hertz between the defined highest and lowest frequencies in a range barrier code A security code used with the Remote Access feature to prevent unauthorized access to the system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 8 baud A unit of transmission rate equal to the number of signal events per second See also bit rate and bits per second bps BCC See Bearer capability class BCC
473. t NOTE Do this step only if the Terminal Translation Initialization TTI is enabled A CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted Make sure the ISDN is in service If not try to busy out and release the ISDN D channel link to bring the ISDN trunks back into service 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 2 On the second screen set the TTI Enabled field to n to de activate the TTI feature Check Disk Drive 1 Type list configuration control and press Enter to check the vintage of the disk drive If the drive is V4 or later go to Check TTI Status or If the drive is not V4 or later go to Install Disk Drive if not TN1657 V4 or earlier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 9 Install Disk Drive if not TN1657 V4 or earlier A CAUTION When replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap A CAUTION If a high or critical reliability system replace and restore the disk drives one at a time starting with the standby SPE Never replace the active and standby disk drives at the same time 1 Type busyout host adapter a b and press Enter to prevent other applications from accessing the disk or removable media 2
474. t TN479 Analog Line Port TN497 Tie Trunk Italy Port TN553 Packet Data Line Port TN556B C D ISDN BRI 4 Wire S T NT Interface Port TN570 B C Expansion Interface Port TN572 Switch Node Clock Control TN573 B Switch Node Interface Control TN574 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel Port TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk Port TN725B Speech Synthesizer Service TN726 B Data Line Port TN735 MET Line Port TN742 Analog Line Port TN744 B Call Classifier Service TN744 C D Call Classifier Detector Service TN746 B Analog Line Port TN747 B Central Office Trunk Port TN748 B C D Tone Detector Service Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware List of Circuit Packs 6 5 Table 6 1 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN750 B C Announcement Service TN753 B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN754 B C Digital Line 4 Wire DCP Port TN755 B Neon Power Unit Power TN756 Tone Detector Service TN758 Pooled Modem Port TN760B C D E Tie Trunk Port TN762 B Hybrid Line Port TN763B C D Auxiliary Trunk Port TN765 Processor Interface Control TN767B C D E DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel Port TN768 Tone Clock Control TN769 Analog Line Port TN771 D Maintenance Test Service TN773 Processor Control TN775 B C Maintenance Service TN776 E
475. tandard Reliability 5 31 9 e 1 LC cydffo5 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A01 5 TX Connector 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 6 RX Connector Figure 5 6 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 cydffo5 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02 5 TX Connector 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A01 6 RX Connector Figure 5 7 Collocated Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 32 e cydff05 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier A Slot 2A02 5 TX Connector 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A02 6 RX Connector Figure 5 8 Collocated Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2 For Either One or Two Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 See Figure 5 5 through Figure 5 9 m Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed m Route the cable to the cable tray and down out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facil
476. tape removable media to disk and takes about 30 minutes Type reset system 3 and press Enter 5 When the reboot is finished the system should contain all of the translations from the backup tape removable media DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades B 10 One Side Upgrades the Other Side Does Not No Shadowing Active Side Has Correct R8 Load This problem indicates that the software version on the standby side is incorrect 1 Perform a hot swap of the disk drives move the standby disk to the active side and vice versa Insert the Release 8 software removable media into the active optical disk drive Type list configure software and press Enter to verify the removable media contains the required Release 8 software If the software version on the removable media is incorrect type restore disk full active and press Enter This copies the entire backup removable media to disk and takes about 30 minutes Do not use the restore disk install command Perform a hot swap of the disk drives move the standby disk to the active side and vice versa Perform a power down reset on the standby side only Disconnect the power cords first from the left side and then the right side from the power supplies on both sides of the standby SPE Restore D
477. team Call Management System CMS The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade This causes CMS data to be lost This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just after the last CMS measurement interval All measurement data is lost during the upgrade including BCMS If needed the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the conference dropped off the call before the end of the call Customers experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to r3v4ao e or higher Preventing Translation Errors When instructed in this chapter perform the save translation command Afterward check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade gt NOTE Be sure that the translations get saved without errors before continuing with any upgrade If errors are detected refer to No Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B Troubleshooting an Upgrade to correct the problem Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors are corrected Communication Between Equipment Rooms For an upgrade where some of the equipment resides at a remote location the upgrade activity will be much easier if temporary communications are established between the equipment rooms Contact Network Technicians The technician for each public and private network accessed by the switch must be contacted before the upg
478. ted via Third Party Make Call or Domain Station Control capabilities or must have been taken control of via Third Party Take Control or Domain Station Control capabilities DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 3 adjunct controlled split An ACD split that is administered to be under adjunct control Agents logged into such splits must do all telephony work ACD login logout and changes of work mode through the adjunct except for auto available adjunct controlled splits whose agents may not log in out or change work mode adjunct monitored call An adjunct controlled call active notification call or call that provides event reporting over a domain control association Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI A recommendation for interfacing adjuncts and communications systems based on the CCITT Q 932 specification for layer 3 ADM Asynchronous data module administer To access and change parameters associated with the services or features of a system Administered Connection AC A feature that allows the switch to automatically establish and maintain end to end connections between access endpoints trunks and or data endpoints data modules administration group See capability group administration terminal A terminal that is used to administer and maintain a system See also terminal Administration
479. ted system 107849754 you need 2 MSSNet UN332C If duplicated system 108566381 you need 2 Formatted removable media J58890TO 1 If duplicated system with R8 2 software you need 2 Additional hardware available The following equipment is port slot hardware introduced with Release 8 2r Code Equipment Comcode Notes DS1 interface TN2313 Cost reduction no new features 108382607 Analog line TN793 24 port analog line with CID 103557468 Analog trunk line combo TN797 Combines an analog trunk and line into one 103557500 circuit pack Control LAN C LAN TN799B Updates TN799 enables trace route 108525528 command IP interface assembly TN802B Updates TN802 expansion of IP trunk 108517996 introduces two modes Media Processor Discontinued hardware Mode and IP Trunk Mode The following equipment was discontinued with Release 8 2si Equipment Notes TN1656 tape drive Replaced with the TN221 1 optical drive UN332 B MSSNet The TN2211 optical drive requires the UN332C DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 What s New in Release 8 2r Xi Tools No new tools became available with Release 8 2r Commands screens and fields No new commands and screens became available or were affected by Release 8 2r Procedures The following procedures and steps changed or were added because of problems identified in the laborator
480. ter the upgrade m PPP links m Audix links m ISDN a BX25 m Ethernet 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each enabled link Disable TTI A CAUTION If you do not disable the TTI the translations can be corrupted 1 Make sure the ISDN is in service If not attempt to busy out and release the ISDN D channel link This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service 2 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 3 On the second screen set the Enabled field to n to de activate the TTI feature DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 13 Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System A WARNING a A W Io Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet can damage the LAN Gateway disk Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway See the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway for the procedure to log on When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1 2 If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the system to be upgraded shut dow
481. terconnect unit provided Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 9 9 Issue 1 April 2000 5 64 9 I NS A SS LUU SS LUM LMU Wi A NN LI NNW ZUM M LI WAAAY AN eee P pA wm ZUM Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 Processor Port Network 2 Cabinet 2 Expansion Port Network 1 V7 cad 024 PDH 102396 7 3 Cabinet 3 Expansion Port Network 2 Figure 5 18 High Reliability Release 8 with Two or Three Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 65 cydf013 CJL102396 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 Optical Cross Connect Facility 2 To PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02 6 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 7 TX COnnector 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 RX Connector Figure
482. th 25 Hz ring generator Compact Modular Cabinet CMC with 50 Hz ring generator for France DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Federal Communications Commission Statement XXV Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 68 Statement Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when m Answered by the called station m Answered by the attendant m Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network Permissible exceptions are m Acallis unanswered m Abusytone is received m Areorder tone is received Lucent Technologies attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration nu
483. that has either switched or direct access to a host computer or to a processor interface DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 16 data terminal equipment DTE Equipment consisting of the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit In a connection between a data terminal and host the terminal the host and their associated modems or data modules make up the DTE dB Decibel dBA Decibels in reference to amperes dBrnC Decibels above reference noise with C filter DC Direct current DCE Data communications equipment D channel backup Type of backup used with Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS A primary D channel provides signaling for an NFAS D channel group two or more PRI facilities A second D channel on a separate PRI facility of the NFAS D channel group is designated as backup for the D channel Failure of the primary D channel causes automatic transfer of call control signaling to the backup D channel The backup becomes the primary D channel When the failed channel returns to service it becomes the backup D channel DCO Digital central office DCP Digital Communications Protocol DCS Distributed Communications System DDC Direct Department Calling DDD Direct Distance Dialing delay dial trunk A trunk that allows dialing directly into a communications system digits are received as they a
484. the flashing stops and the asterisk disappears about 2 min it is safe to remove the circuit pack After the TN802B is shut down reseat the circuit pack to restart the system Log in using ctrl alt del Upgrading IP trunks R7 to H 323 trunks If there are existing IP trunk connections that you want to upgrade to H 323 trunk connections do the following steps Otherwise go to Upgrade to TN802B R8 on page 6 76 To upgrade an existing IP trunk R7 to an H 323 trunk R8 requires first getting IP information from the existing TN802 before upgrading the TN802 to TN802B 1 Click the Protocols tab Select TCP IP Protocol from the list BOO mw Click on My Computer Control Panel Network Click the Properties option in the Network window Write down the IP address subnet address and gateway address shown for adaptor 2 see example below gt NOTE Do not use the addresses for adapter 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 75 Microsoft TCP IP Properties 2 Digital Semiconductor 21143 based 10 100 mpbs Ethernet ba 5 When done click OK OK DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 76 Upgrade to
485. the normal mode Retranslate Port Circuits If port circuit packs in the G2 module control carrier were relocated in order to put m Acritical port circuit pack requiring longer nominal battery holdover such as a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack in a port slot m A TN736 TN752 or TN755 power supply in port slots 18 and 19 m ATN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface in port slot 1 m A TN776 or TN570 in port slot 2 for a second directly connected EPN of the new expansion control carrier verify that they were retranslated during the off site software upgrade If not they must be retranslated now Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Helease 8 Administrator s Guide for instructions on performing the retranslations Enable TTI 1 Type change system parameters features and press Enter 2 On the second screen set the Enabled field to y to activate the TTI feature Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Compare it with the earlier status 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for each link Enable Scheduled Maintenance Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Enable the scheduled daily maintenance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 73 Resolve Alarms
486. this screen to unadminister fiber links each of which is identified by a fiber number a The rs one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter complex field must remain administered b Remove the location of the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit pack for both ENDPOINT 1 and ENDPOINT 2 4 Scroll to screen 2 a Type no as applicable in each Facility Installed field A B C and D b The Bit Rate field must remain administered if other fiber connections associated with the facility will remain c The idle code in the Idle Code MSB 1 LSB 8 field must remain administered d The Line Coding field must remain administered 5 Fora T1 site proceed to T1 Installations Only For an E1 site proceed to E1 Installations Only T1 Installations Only 1 The Framing Mode field is display only 2 The DS81CONV 1 Line Compensation and the DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation fields are display only 3 Remove the Facility Circuit ID from the facilities being unadministered if used Press Enter 4 A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED E1 Installations Only 1 The CRC field must remain administered 2 The Line Termination field is display only 3 Remove the Facility Circuit ID information from the facilities being unadministered if used Press Enter 4 A display similar t
487. tical Reliability 5 76 Required Tools The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade High intensity flashlight or AC drop light 3 8 inch flat blade screwdriver with a 10 inch shank minimum 5 16 inch and 1 4 inch sockets with a ratchet and 10 inch extension Long nose pliers to disconnect grounding straps and straighten backplane pins Static proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit packs Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the rear of cabinets Twelve 12 and 10 self tapping screws Four spare carrier grounding straps Wrist ground strap Repair kit for backplane pins KS 22876 L2 or equivalent One copy of each of the following manuals DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Aaministrator s Guide Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance During the upgrade follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the system to be upgraded For information about the procedures and necessary equipment refer to the Preventive Maintenance section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Her Label Cables To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable label both ends of the connector cables associated with the carrier to be removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for
488. tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN Standard Reliability 5 30 4 Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3 m Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver m Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot 3A02 See Figure 5 8 Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions At the top of the cabinet coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it to the wall of the cable tray 9 9 MUMMMWSs A SS A SS VUNA A NS 11010 SS ng WKY MMU NSSSSS LUM LI NS LI NS AUUE NS S Iw Iw Iw V cad o25 PDH 102396 7 Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 Processor Port Network 3 Cabinet 3 Expansion Port 2 Cabinet 2 Expansion Port Network 1 Menon Figure 5 5 Standard Reliability Release 8 with Two or Three Port Networks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN S
489. tions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 31 cydffO5 CJL 103196 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 4 Fiber Optic Cable 2 To PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02 5 TX Connector 3 To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 6 RX Connector Cabinet Stack 2 Figure 3 10 Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1 For 1 or 2 Fiber Remoted Expansion Port Networks 1 Behind port carrier C of the multicarrier PPN See Figure 3 9 and Figure 3 11 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1C02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed c Route the fiber cable to the cabinet cable tray and out of the cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross connect facility d Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interface unit provided e Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 32 2 Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using
490. tip ring module Brazil and Hungary E amp M signaling Fast analog modem support Security Platform DADMIN login 24 port analog line TN793 TN2793B with Caller ID Analog trunk amp line board TN797 without busy tone detection DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 What s New in Release 8 2r ix Hardware Minimum required hardware You need the following minimum required hardware to upgrade to Release 8 2r software Code Equipment Comcode Notes Basic processor carrier J58890AP Contains the following circuit packs E m TN573B SNI m TN780 tone clock m TN1648B SYSAM m TN1650B memory m IN1655 packet interface m 1N1657 disk drive m TN2211 optical drive m UN330B duplicate interface opt m UNG331B processor m UN332C MSSNet Duplex processor carrier J58890AP Contains the following circuit packs 7 m TN573B SNI m TN780 tone clock m TN1648B SYSAM m TN1650B memory m TN1655 packet interface m TN1657 disk drive m TN2211 optical drive m UN330B duplicate interface m UNG331B processor m UN332C MSSNet Power unit WP DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 What s New in Release 8 2r R8 2r hardware April 2000 x The following upgrade equipment is new to Release 8 2r Code Equipment Comcode Notes Optical drive TN2211 If duplica
491. to provide the EPN s environmental and alarm status to the switch processing element expansion port network EPN A port network PN that is connected to the TDM bus and packet bus of a processor port network PPN Control is achieved by indirect connection of the EPN to the PPN via a port network link PNL See also port network PN extension in Extension In Extln is the work state agents go into when they answer receive a non ACD call If the agent is in Manual In or Auto In and receives an extension in call it is recorded by CMS as an AUX In call extension out The work state that agents go into when they place originate a non ACD call external measurements Those ACD measurements that are made by the External CMS adjunct extension A 1 to 5 digit number by which calls are routed through a communications system or with a Uniform Dial Plan UDP or main satellite dialing plan through a private network external call A connection between a communications system user and a party on the public network or on another communications system in a private network F FAC Feature Access Code facility A telecommunications transmission pathway and associated equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 23 facility associated signaling FAS Signaling for which a D channel carries signaling only for thos
492. to the RX connector of its adjacent port network See Figure 5 16 gt NOTE When finished refer to Appendix A Fiber Link Administration to administer the fiber links DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 5 Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN High Reliability 5 56 Collocated Port Networks For a high reliability system with 1 collocated expansion port network use 1 fiber optic cable and 2 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks For a high reliability system with 2 collocated expansion port networks use 3 fiber optic cables and 6 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks gt NOTE Based on floor plan considerations the length of these fiber cables may vary 20 foot 6 1 m cables are normally adequate for a Release 8 with 2 port networks For collocated cabinets the fiber optic cables should be routed directly from the PPN to the EPN cabinet If a DEFINITY style PPN cabinet is collocated with another DEFINITY style EPN cabinet the preferred routing is to run the cables up the cable tray and out the top of the PPN cabinet The cables are then run to the other cabinet through the top of the cabinet and down the cable tray to the desired carrier level gt NOTE Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets for additional guidelin
493. twave Transceiver b Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed c Route the fiber optic cable from the lightwave transceiver to the cabinet s cable tray and down out of the cabinet to the EPN stack d Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 2 Behind port cabinet B of EPN stack 2 a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2B02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable coming from the PPN to the lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil the surplus fiber cable and place it either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet 3 Behind port carrier D of the multicarrier PPN a Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1D02 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed c Route the fiber cable to the cabinet s cable tray and down out of the cabinet to the EPN stack d Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions
494. tyle cabinet remove the 2 screws holding the D carrier to the cabinet frame 8 Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches then from the back be sure that no cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet carrier framework A CAUTION Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the carrier 9 Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability 6 98 e SEE AD A SS V Ve n See Sy Diy SEN V Ve MV iR 7 MUI TAUN Figure Notes 1 Port Carrier C Position 4 Switch Node Carrier D Position 2 Ground Jumpers 5 Switch Node Carrier E Position 3 Control Carrier A Position 6 Cabinet with standard fan unit and carrier 7 Cabinet with enhanced fan unit and enhanced carrier Figure 6 33 Locations of Ground Jumpers DEFINITY Enterprise C
495. uit packs and DS1 facility links between two endpoints The two fiber endpoints can be m An expansion interface El circuit pack m A switch node interface SNI circuit pack gt NOTE Only one administrative terminal can administer fiber links at a time others can display fiber link information Administration commands Use the following commands to administer the Fiber Link Administration form Action Object Qualifier add fiber link link number or next change fiber link link number display fiber link link number list fiber link link number remove fiber link link number 1 Brackets indicate the qualifier is optional Single quotes indicate the text inside the quote must be entered exactly as shown or an abbreviated form of the word may be entered DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 9 PNCs have three different reliability configurations one for each system reliability configuration as follows System Configuration PNC Standard Reliability Simplex Fibers High Reliability Simplex Fibers to Expansion Port Networks and Duplicated Fibers between Processor Port Networks PPN and Switch Nodes Critical Reliability Duplicated Fibers Simplex PNC For Simplex PNC PNC Duplication is disabled on the System Pa
496. ule except rule 0 zero You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and Time screens 3 Press Enter Set Date and Time 1 Type set time and press Enter 2 Verify the screen displays the Date and Time screen See Screen 4 1 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Week field di N DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week Tuesday Month February Day of the Month 8 Year 2000 TIME Hour 20 Minute 30 Second XX Type standard Daylight Savings Rule 0 W T Screen 4 1 Typical Date and Time Screen DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 4 G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r Install the Release 8r Cabinets 4 14 3 Type the day of the week in English Sunday through Saturday See Table 4 2 for English day of the week names Table 4 2 English Day of the Week Names Day Number Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday o cc nm Saturday 4 The cursor is positioned on the Month field Type the current month in English January through December See Table 4 3 for English month names After the month is entered press Tab to move to next field Table4 3 English Month Names Month Number Month Name 1 January February March April May June July August
497. uplicated field is yes 4 Type list fiber and press Enter All administered fiber connections display 5 If a previously used fiber link is to be reused type add fiber lt number gt and press Enter If this is a new fiber link type add fiber next and press Enter The Fiber Link Administration form appears On Page 1 of the form a Enter the Board Location for Endpoint 1 and Endpoint 2 This is the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of an SNI or El circuit pack that is the first endpoint of the fiber link Repeat for the remaining endpoints b The Board Type field is display only and shows the type of circuit pack in Endpoint 1 c Inthe DS1CONV Board Location field enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 1 s duplicate along with Endpoint 2 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B PNC link DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 A Fiber Link Administration Administer Fiber Links A 6 d The DS1CONV Board Type field is display only and shows the type of DS1 Converter circuit pack in Endpoint 1 The circuit pack type in Endpoint 1 A PNC and Endpoint 1 B PNC must match e Inthe Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex field type y to specify that a DS1 Conve
498. urrently installed The enhanced carriers come with 16 grounding straps that connect to the carrier connector panel See Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication on page 6 80 Add a Switch Node Carrier Standard Reliability on page 6 94 and Add a Switch Node Carrier High or Critical Reliability on page 6 108 gt NOTE An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses either AC power U S or Global power Cautions and warnings The following new cautions and warnings were generated from problems affecting possible data loss that were identified in the laboratory or during early introduction Procedure Caution or Warning Unlock the Active SPE Hi only A CAUTION Allow 10 minutes after unlocking to make sure the standby SPE has fully returned to service Upgrade Software A CAUTION All calls are dropped this is a service interruption Product names The following products have been renamed Product name Old name Note Removable media tape Optical drive does not use tapes We chose a name that is generic to whatever media is used in the future IP interface IP trunk TN802 TN802B adds MedPro mode not assembly TN802B just IP trunk DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 About This Book Offer Categories XV About This Book This book is intended for use by train
499. used Additional transceivers ordered separately ship loose with the EPN equipment standard reliability system 4 for a high or critical reliability system The 300A is connected using 2 fiber optic cables 5 10 or 15 dB attenuators may be required Depending on the reliability type of the Release 8r system Two removable media are required for a Depending on the number of EPNs in a critical reliability Release 8r system Required for the B port cabinet of a critical reliability Release 8r EPN Required for a critical reliability Release 8r EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 12 Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance 1 During the upgrade follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the system to be upgraded For more information refer to the Preventive Maintenance section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for Rar Label Cables 1 To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable label every connector cable associated with the system Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Make note of all enabled links Type status link number and press Enter AA WO Inm Check the following items and note which links are in service You will need this information af
500. vable media while the amber LED on the removable media circuit pack is on DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 B Troubleshooting an Upgrade Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades B 9 Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades The subsections to follow present specific procedures for common upgrade problems listed below No Translations After Upgrade One Side Upgrades the Other Side Does Not No Shadowing Active Side Has Correct R8 Load Restore Disk Install or Restore Disk Full Fails Message Waiting Lamps On After Removing an EPN Tone Clock Does Not Function in New EPN Translation Corruption Detected m Unsuccessful Translation Read on System Restart If Upgrading From Pre R7 1 m Software Incompatibility Re install the ISDN PRI Links Only for Failed Upgrades No Translations After Upgrade This problem usually means that the save translation command performed during the upgrade was not successful To recover 1 Install the backup tape removable media into the tape removable media drive This tape removable media must contain the original translations before the upgrade started Verify that the software is Release 8 and that shadowing is up Copy the translations from the backup tape removable media to the disk Type copy translation disk both and press Enter This copies the translations from
501. ve transceiver on a cable connector with the following order of slots 1E20 1E03 1E19 1E04 1E18 1E05 and so forth b Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach the fiber optic cables with cable ties to the wall of the cable tray at the built in cable tie positions 3 Behind control cabinet A of each single carrier EPN a Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot A01 gt NOTE Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a 300A Lightwave Transceiver b Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver just installed at slot A01 c Carefully attach the fiber optic cable with cable ties to the rear covers of the EPN stack d Coil the surplus length of fiber optic cable and place the coil either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf holding the power supply of the PPN cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 43 4 Behind switch node carrier D of PPN cabinet 1 a For each EPN install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector with the following order of slots 1E20 1E03 1E19 1E04 1E18 1E05 and so forth b Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver just installed c Carefully attach
502. ver Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add DCS Interface 6 42 Add DCS Interface Systems in a Distributed Communications System DCS network are interconnected by both tie trunks for voice communications and data links for control and transparent feature information These data links also called DCS signaling links support the feature transparency Various subsets depending on the specific configuration of DS1 Interface circuit packs including TN464F TN767E and TN760E provide the voice communications interface Meanwhile the data link interface between the processor and the physical signaling link is provided by or through a TN799 Control LAN circuit pack In some configurations the TN799 passes the signaling information over a separate 10BaseT TCP IP network usually via a hub For use with 10BaseT connect the appropriate pins of the I O field to the hub For pinouts and diagrams refer to the installation manual for your cabinet type In other configurations the TN799 circuit pack carries signaling over point to point protocol PPP for subsequent inclusion via the switching fabric in the same DS1 bit stream as the DCS voice transmissions A TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack installed in the PPN can interface external Stratum 3 synchronization for DS1 connections For further information about DCS refer to the following documents m AT a
503. ware loads set the Alarm Origination Activated field to n and setthe Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields to disable or n before pressing Enter Reconfigure the Tape G3rV2 V3 R31 0 and Earlier gt NOTE Do not issue the list configuration software command before reconfiguring the removable media For some software loads use 3 mem instead of large If standard reliability 1 Type configure tape large and press Enter to reconfigure the backup removable media for the 2 TN1650B Memory circuit packs This command takes about 1 minute to complete DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 1 Upgrading G3rV2 V3 V4 to R8r and Adding Memory Upgrade the software and hardware 1 8 If high or critical reliability 1 Type configure tape spe a large and press Enter to reconfigure the removable media in control carrier A for 2 TN1650B Memory circuit packs This command takes about 1 minute to complete 2 Type configure tape spe b large and press Enter to reconfigure the removable media in control carrier B for 2 TN1650B Memory circuit packs This command takes about 1 minute to complete Check Link Status 1 Type display communication interface links and press Enter Write down all enabled links 2 Type status link number and press Enter Repeat this step for all links 3 Write down which links are in service Disable TTI g
504. ween two communications systems or COs trunk allocation The manner in which trunks are selected to form wideband channels trunk data module A device that connects off premises private line trunk facilities and DEFINITY ECS The trunk data module converts between the RS 232C and the DCP and can connect to DDD modems as the DCP member of a modem pool DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 49 trunk group Telecommunications channels assigned as a group for certain functions that can be used interchangeably between two communications systems or COs TSC Technical Service Center TTI Terminal translation initialization TTR Touch tone receiver TTT Terminating trunk transmission TTTN See tandem tie trunk network TTTN TTY Teletypewriter e U UAP Usage allocation plan UART Universal asynchronous transmitter UCD Uniform call distribution UCL Unrestricted call list UDP See Uniform Dial Plan UDP UL Underwriter Laboratories UM User manager Uniform Dial Plan UDP A feature that allows a unique 4 or 5 digit number assignment for each terminal in a multiswitch configuration such as a DCS or main satellite tributary system UNMA Unified Network Management Architecture UNP Uniform numbering plan UPS Uninterruptible power supply DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2
505. wiring arrangement can provide PN to PN communication at the bandwidth of up to 4 DS1 CONV spans 1 544 Mbps each Between each port network s wall field the port networks communicate across leased lines in the public network Connect Power and Ground 1 Reconnect the 6 AWG 40 4 1 mm cabinet ground wire to the single point ground bar on the cabinet 2 Reconnect the 10 AWG 25 2 6 mm coupled bonding conductor wire 3 Reconnect the cabinet power cords at the rear of each cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 3 Upgrading R5si R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory Release 5 6si to Release 8r 3 47 Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages 1 Verify every circuit pack reused in the upgrade conforms to the usable vintage requirements for a Release 8r system see Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices Install System Access Ports 1 Before connecting various endpoints that use EIA interfaces to the system install up to 8 loop around connections for Mode 2 to Mode 3 and vice versa data conversion From the outgoing perspective of the system communicating with an EIA endpoint these loop around connections convert Mode 3 data circuit switched packet data with undefined bit rates and packet specifications to Mode 2 data low speed usually asynchronous data at rates of 300 to 19 200 bps by m Accepting Mode 3 data off the
506. witch are busy Bypass tie trunks are used only if all applicable intertandem trunks are busy byte A sequence of usually eight bits processed together C CACR Cancellation of Authorization Code Request cabinet Housing for racks shelves or carriers that hold electronic equipment cable Physical connection between two pieces of equipment for example data terminal and modem or between a piece of equipment and a termination field cable connector A jack female or plug male on the end of a cable A cable connector connects wires on a cable to specific leads on telephone or data equipment CAG Coverage answer group DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 Glossary and Abbreviations GL 10 call appearance 1 For the attendant console six buttons labeled a f used to originate receive and hold calls Two lights next to the button show the status of the call appearance 2 For the voice terminal a button labeled with an extension and used to place outgoing calls receive incoming calls or hold calls Two lights next to the button show the status of the call appearance call control capabilities Capabilities Third Party Selective Hold Third Party Reconnect Third Party Merge that can be used in either of the Third Party Call Control ASE cluster subsets Call Control and Domain Control Call Detail Recording CDR A feature that uses
507. with a TN802B circuit pack or upgrade the existing TN802 circuit pack to operate in MedPro mode Also to operate in the MedPro mode the DEFINITY ECS switch must be Release 8 or later gt NOTE The TN802 IP Interface must be V3 or later to upgrade to TN802B To upgrade the TN802 to a TN802B you need the following hardware Monitor keyboard and mouse to access the IP Interface s Windows NT environment or pCANYWHERE software 10 Mbyte SanDisk PCMCIA flashcard loaded with the MedPro NT Application Install Wizard m TN802B label The upgrade adds or modifies the following directories or files on your computer s hard drive a c dolan c mapd dnid medpro img c mapd dnid tmp img DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add IP Interface Assembly 6 74 Connect the Monitor Keyboard and Mouse 1 Attach a VGA monitor to the VGA connector of the TN802 IP Interface external cable assembly Attach the keyboard to the KEYBOARD connector of the external cable assembly Attach the mouse to the MOUSE connector of the external cable assembly 4 Plug the monitor into an AC power receptacle and turn it on 5 If upgrading locally reboot Windows NT by pressing the recessed reset 7 button on the faceplate see Figure 6 26 of the TN802B IP Interface until the LCD shows a flashing MSHUT When
508. with the DS1 circuit pack slot 3 Plug the 120A s 25 pair connector directly into the plug associated with the DS1 circuit pack slot DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU Module 6 144 4 5 10 Secure the 4C retainer around the 120A Attach the supplied H600 383 cable to the 120A and to the network smart jack This cable is directional To determine the end that connects to the 120A perform a continuity test between pins 3 and 7 The end with this continuity is the 120A end The shield is grounded only at the 120A end Use the cable provided If cabling other than that provided with the 120A is used observe the following guidelines m Use 24 gauge wire that provides individually shielded twisted pairs for transmit and receive signals Use the cable between the network interface and the 120A Ground the shields of this cable only at the 120A end to avoid ground loops Cabling between the network interface and 120A can have no bridge taps m lfusing standard house riser cable for connections between the network interface and the 120A maintain a 100 pair separation between the receive and transmit twisted pairs m lfusing standard house riser cable for connections between the network interface and the 120A allow no more than 2 cross connects to 110 t
509. xpansion Interface Port TN780 Tone Clock Control TN786 Processor Control TN786B Processor Control TN787F G H J K Multimedia Interface Service TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner Service TN789 Radio Controller Control TN790 B Processor Control TN792 Duplication Interface DUPINT Control TN793 Analog Line Port TN794 Network Control Packet Interface NetPkt Control TN796B Processor Control Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware List of Circuit Packs 6 6 Table 6 1 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN797 Analog CO Trunk and Line Combo Port TN799 Control LAN C LAN Port TN802B IP Interface Assembly Port TNPRI BRI PRI to BRI Converter Port TN1648 B System Access Maintenance Control TN1650B 32 MB Memory Control TN1654 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Port TN1655 Packet Interface Control TN1657 Disk Drive Control TN2135 Analog Line Port TN2136 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Port TN2138 Central Office Trunk Port TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2140 B Tie Trunk Hungary Italy Port TN2144 Analog Line Port TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2147 C Central Office Trunk Port TN2149 Analog Line Port TN2180 Analog Line Port TN2181 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Port
510. y inside the DEFINITY ECS The IP Interface is an assembly composed of a TN802B circuit board a processor card and DSP resource card For ordering purposes the assembly is identified as a J58890MA 1 L30 but for simplicity we refer to it in this book as the TN802B IP Interface The TN802B IP Interface operates in two modes IP Trunk available with Release 7 or later and Media Processor MedPro available with Release 8 The IP Trunk mode is Internet Telephone Server Enterprise ITS E compatible and the MedPro mode is H 323 V2 compatible The TN802B IP Interface is backwards compatible and defaults to IP Trunk mode You must administer it to use it in MedPro mode For more information on the IP Interface capabilities and limitations refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Overview The following sections describe the process for m Installing in Media Processor Mode m Installing in IP Trunk Mode m Upgrading a TN802 V3 or later to a TN802B MedPro mode Ax WARNING When connected remotely via pCANYWHERE only use the pc ANYWHERE Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to restart Windows NT Installing in Media Processor Mode To operate in MedPro mode you must install the TN802B IP Interface and if the system does not have one you must also install and administer a TN799B C LAN circuit pack For C LAN administration refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Administration f
511. y of the above carrier ground straps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 88 Iedfgrn2 KLC 022100 Figure Notes 1 Standard AC powered Carrier 3 Top Ground Straps 2 Enhanced Carrier in R8r PPNs using 4 Bottom Ground Straps either AC power U S or Global power Figure 6 30 Locations of Top and Bottom Ground Straps on Standard and Enhanced Carriers 8 Connect the loose end of the TDM LAN cable between the C and B carriers to the pin field block marked TDM LAN on the right side of the B carrier See Figure 6 31 and Table 6 8 The other end remained connected to the C carrier when the old carrier was removed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Add a Control Carrier Add Duplication 6 89 TDM LAN BUS TERMINATOR ZAHFA SLOT 21 a SEE NOTE py J58890BB C PORT CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L6 SLOT 21 aj SLOT 00 ai J58890AP 1 B CONTROL CARRIER TDM LAN GABLE nee WP91716 L6 SLOT 21 ay SLOT 01 a J58890AP 1 A CONTROL CARRIER TDM LAN CABLE WP91716 L7 SLO
512. y or during early introduction Many of the upgrade procedures were reordered and the steps within the procedure better defined Check the task tables at the beginning of each upgrade chapter for the current order Also to reduce redundancy in the book there is no longer a separate upgrade process for high or critical reliability The procedures and steps that apply to high or critical reliability are noted where they occur in the upgrade process Procedure Steps Notes Check SPE 1 Type status spe and press Becomes first step of Enter to check the health of upgrade procedure the SPE Install the Circuit 1 Insert the TN1650B Adding memory to the Packs memory circuit pack in standby SPE causes an error memory slot 3 because the memory number between the standby and active carriers does not match This requires an additional power down of the carrier DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 What s New in Release 8 2r Procedure Steps Issue 1 April 2000 Xii Notes Verify Interchange H C only After the circuit packs have been replaced in the first carrier 1 Type status spe and press Enter m The Standby Refreshed field shows no m The Standby Shadowing field shows off m The Standby Handshake field shows up After the circuit packs have been replaced in the second carrier 1 Type status spe and press Enter t
513. ype cross connect blocks m Never use quad cable untwisted two pair telephone cable in a DS1 line m Avoid mixing wires of different gauges in a DS1 line If using external alarm equipment attach the supplied DW8 cable to the 120A and the external equipment The maximum length of this cable depends on the alarm equipment lf a TN474F is used make sure the circuit pack is set for 24 channel operation Set the switch on the circuit pack as shown in Figure 2 1 From the DS1 circuit pack screen of the system administration console set the line compensation field to 0 133 feet 40 6 m Reset the 120A by reseating the DS1 circuit pack When you reinsert the DS1 circuit pack after installing a 120A CSU the 120A resets The DS1 circuit pack initializes and tests the 120A When initialization and testing is complete the green LED goes off If the RED indicator is OFF after the test the ICSU is working If the circuits do not pass the self test troubleshoot the 120A as instructed in Integrated CSU Module Installation and Operation DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Issue 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555 233 115 April 2000 6 Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU Module 6 145 Table 6 12 provides the H600 383 cable pinouts Table 6 13 provides the cable lengths for each cable group number Table 6 12 H600 383 cable Pin Assignments

Lucent Technologies 555-233

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents